Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 248

Physiology Lessons Lesson 1

for use with the ELECTROMYOGRAPHY I


Biopac Student Lab Standard and Integrated EMG

Richard Pflanzer, Ph.D.


Associate Professor Emeritus
Indiana University School of Medicine
Purdue University School of Science

J.C. Uyehara, Ph.D.


Biologist
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

William McMullen
Vice President
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

BIOPAC® Systems, Inc.


42 Aero Camino, Goleta, CA 93117
(805) 685-0066, Fax (805) 685-0067
info@biopac.com
www.biopac.com

Manual Revision 3.7.6


09092009
 BIOPAC Systems, Inc.
Page 4 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

II. EXPERIMENTAL OBJECTIVES


1) To observe and record skeletal muscle tonus as reflected by a basal level of electrical activity associated with the
muscle in a resting state.
2) To record maximum clench strength for right and left hands.
3) To observe, record, and correlate motor unit recruitment with increased power of skeletal muscle contraction.
4) To listen to EMG “sounds” and correlate sound intensity with motor unit recruitment.

III. MATERIALS
 BIOPAC electrode lead set (SS2LA/L)
 BIOPAC disposable vinyl electrodes (EL503), 6 electrodes per Subject
 BIOPAC electrode gel (GEL1) and abrasive pad (ELPAD) or Skin cleanser or alcohol prep
 Optional: BIOPAC Headphones (OUT1 for MP3X or 40HP for MP45)
 Biopac Student Lab System: software BSL 3.7.5 or above
data acquisition unit MP36, MP35, MP30 (Windows only), or MP45
 Computer system

IV. EXPERIMENTAL METHODS


 For further explanation, use the online support options under the Help Menu.
A. SETUP
FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION
1. Turn the computer ON.  The desktop should appear on the monitor. If it does not appear, ask the
2. Make sure the BIOPAC MP3X unit is OFF. laboratory instructor for assistance.
3. Plug the equipment in as follows:
Electrode lead (SS2LA/L) — CH 1
Headphones (OUT1) — back of unit
4. Turn ON the BIOPAC MP3X unit.
5. Attach three electrodes to each
forearm (Fig. 1.3).
6. Attach the electrode lead set (SS2LA/L)  If using 40HP for MP45, the Sound
to Subject’s dominant forearm, following Playback device must be set to MP45
the color code (Fig. 1.3). via Start > Control Panel.
Fig. 1.2 MP3X (left) and MP45 (right) equipment connections

Attach three electrodes to


each forearm as shown in
IMPORTANT
Fig. 1.3.
Make sure the electrode lead colors
match Fig. 1.3.  You will switch the lead
set to the Subject’s non-
dominant arm for
recording Segment 2
(Forearm 2).

Fig. 1.3 Electrode placement and lead attachment


Setup continues…
Lesson 1: EMG I Page 5

 If Subject is right-handed, the right forearm is generally dominant; if


Subject is left-handed, the left forearm is generally dominant.
 For optimal electrode adhesion, place electrodes on the skin at least 5
minutes before the start of Calibration.
 The electrode lead cables are each a different color and each must be
attached to a specific electrode position, as shown in Fig. 1.3.
 The pinch connectors work like a small clothespin and will only latch onto
the nipple of the electrode from one side of the connector.
7. Start the Biopac Student Lab Program. 
8. Choose lesson “L01” and click OK. Lesson L01 is Electromyography (EMG) I.
9. Type in a unique filename and click No two people can have the same filename, so use a unique identifier, such as
OK. Subject’s nickname or student ID#.
This ends default Setup.
10. Optional: Set Preferences. This lesson has optional Preferences for data and display while recording. Per
your Lab Instructor’s guidelines, you may set:
 Choose File > Preferences. Journal Text: show minimum guiding text vs. detailed text
 Select an option. Recording Length: allow from 30 seconds to 30 minutes of data
 Select the desired setting and click Grids: show or hide gridlines
OK.

END OF SETUP

B. CALIBRATION

Calibration establishes the hardware’s internal parameters (such as gain, offset, and scaling) and is critical for optimum
performance. Pay close attention to Calibration.

FAST TRACK Calibration DETAILED EXPLANATION OF CALIBRATION STEPS


1. Click Calibrate. This will start the Calibration recording.
2. Clench fist as hard as possible, then The program needs a reading of
release. the maximum clench to perform
an auto-calibration.

Fig. 1.4 Clench Fist for Calibration


3. Wait for Calibration to stop. Calibration will last eight seconds and stop automatically, let it run its course.
4. Check the Calibration data. At the end of the eight-
second Calibration
 If similar, proceed to the Data recording, the screen
Recording section. should resemble Fig.1.5.
 If different, Redo Calibration. If the calibration
recording does not show a
zero baseline and a burst
(when Subject clenched),
repeat calibration to obtain
a reading similar to Fig.
1.5. Fig. 1.5
END OF CALIBRATION
Page 6 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

C. DATA RECORDING
FAST TRACK Recording DETAILED EXPLANATION OF RECORDING STEPS
1. Prepare for the recording. You will record two segments:
a. Segment one records Forearm 1 (Dominant).
b. Segment two records Forearm 2.
To work efficiently, read this entire section before recording.
SEGMENT 1 — Forearm 1 (Dominant)
2. Click Record. When you click Record, the recording will begin and an append marker
labeled “Forearm 1” will automatically be inserted.
3. Perform a series of four Clench (hold for Repeat a cycle of Clench-Release-Wait, holding for 2 seconds and waiting for
2 sec.)-Release-Wait (for 2 sec.) cycles. two seconds after releasing before beginning the next cycle. Try to increase
 Begin with a weak clench, and then the strength in equal increments such that the fourth clench is the maximum
increase in equal increments so the force.
fourth clench is at maximum.
4. Click Suspend. The recording should halt, giving you time to review the data and prepare for
the next recording segment. The data should look similar to Fig. 1.6.
5. Review the data on the screen.
 If similar, proceed to Step 6.

Fig. 1.6 Clench, Release, Wait, Repeat

 If different, click Redo and repeat The data would be different if the:
Steps 2-5.
a. The Suspend button was pressed prematurely.
b. Instructions were not followed.
Click Redo and repeat Steps 2-5 if necessary. Note that once you press Redo,
the data you have just recorded will be erased.
SEGMENT 2 — Forearm 2
6. For Forearm 2, attach electrode leads to Remove the electrode cable pinch connectors form Forearm 1 electrodes and
Subject’s opposite arm. connect to Forearm 2 electrodes. Refer to Setup Steps 5-6 and Fig 1.3 for
proper electrode placement and lead attachment.
7. Click Resume. When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append marker
labeled “Forearm 2” will be automatically inserted.
8. Perform a series of four Clench (hold for Repeat a cycle of Clench-Release-Wait, holding for 2 seconds and waiting for
2 sec.)-Release-Wait (for 2 sec.) cycles. two seconds after releasing before beginning the next cycle. Try to increase
 Begin with a weak clench, and then the strength in equal increments such that the fourth clench is the maximum
increase in equal increments so the force.
fourth clench is at maximum.
9. Click Suspend. The recording should halt, giving you time to review the data for segment two.

Recording continues…
Lesson 1: EMG I Page 7

10. Review the data on the screen. If all went well, your data should look similar to Fig. 1.6. The data would be
different if the:
 If similar, go Step 11.
a. The Suspend button was pressed prematurely.
 If different, click Redo and repeat b. Instructions were not followed.
Steps 7-10.
If your data did not match Fig. 1.6, click Redo and repeat Steps 7-10. Note
that once you press Redo, the data you have just recorded will be erased.
11. Click Stop and then click Yes. When you click Stop, you will be prompted to confirm that you are sure you
want to stop the recording. Clicking “yes” will end the data recording
segment, and automatically save the data. Clicking “no” will bring you back
to the Resume or Stop options. This is simply one last chance to confirm you
don’t need to redo the last recording segment.
12. If you want to listen to the EMG signal, Listening to the EMG can be a valuable tool in detecting muscle
go to Step 13. abnormalities, and is performed here for general interest.
Or Listening to the EMG is optional. The data from this part of the Lesson will
not be saved. EMG data is sent to the headphones and simultaneously plotted
If you want to end the recording, go to
so you can listen to the signal and see it at the same time. Note the increase
Step 17.
in sound intensity as you increase the strength of your clench.
13. Subject puts on the headphones. You will hear the EMG signal through the headphones as it is being
displayed on the screen. The screen will display two channels: CH 1 EMG
14. Click Listen.
and CH 40 Integrated EMG. The data on the screen will not be saved.
15. Experiment by changing the clench force
Note The volume through the headphones may be very loud due to system
as you watch the screen and listen.
feedback. Position the headphones slightly off the ear to reduce the
volume or, if using an MP45 system, use the Volume + or Volume –
buttons.
The signal will run until you press Stop.
If others in your lab group would like to listen to the EMG signal, pass the
headphones around before clicking Stop.
16. Click Stop. This will end listening to the EMG.
 To listen again: click Redo, listen, If another person wants to listen to the EMG, switch the headphones from
and then click Stop. Subject to the new person and click Redo.
17. Click Done. A dialog with options will be generated. Make your choice, and continue as
directed.
18. Choose an option and click OK.
If choosing the “Record from another Subject” option:
a) Attach electrodes per Setup Steps 5-6 and continue the entire lesson
from Setup Step 8.
b) Each person will need to use a unique file name.
19. Remove the electrodes. Disconnect the lead cables. Peel off and discard the electrodes (BIOPAC
electrodes are not reusable). Wash the electrode gel residue from your skin
using soap and water. The electrodes may leave a slight ring on the skin for a
END OF RECORDING few hours, which is quite normal.
Page 8 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

V. DATA ANALYSIS
FAST TRACK Data Analysis DETAILED EXPLANATION OF DATA ANALYSIS STEPS
1. Enter the Review Saved Data mode and Enter the Review Saved Data mode. 
choose the correct file.
 Note Channel Number (CH)
designations:
Channel Displays
CH 1 EMG
CH 40 Integrated EMG
 Note measurement box settings:
Channel Measurement
CH 40 Mean Fig. 1.7
The measurement boxes are above the marker region in the data window. Each
measurement has three sections: channel number, measurement type, and result.
The first two sections are pull-down menus that are activated when you click
them. The following is a brief description of these specific measurements. 
Mean: displays the average value in the selected area.
The “selected area” is the area selected by the I-Beam tool (including
endpoints).
Record measurement data individually by hand or choose Edit > Journal >
Paste measurements to paste the data to your journal for future reference.
2. Set up your display window for optimal The first recording segment begins at the marker labeled “Forearm 1” and
viewing of the first segment of Integrated includes four clenches from Subject’s dominant arm.
EMG data.
The following tools help you adjust the data window: 
 Optional: Hide CH 1 data by using
“Ctrl-click” (Windows) or Display menu: Autoscale horizontal, Autoscale waveforms, Zoom Previous
“Option+click” (Mac) on the Scroll Bars: Time (Horizontal); Amplitude (Vertical)
channel number box. Cursor Tools: Zoom Tool
Buttons: Overlap, Split, Show Grid, Hide Grid
Channel Display: “Ctrl-click” (Windows) or “Option+click” (Mac) the
channel number box to toggle channel display.
3. Use the I-Beam cursor to select an area "Clusters" are the EMG bursts associated with each clench. Fig. 1.8 below
on the plateau of the first EMG cluster shows an EMG cluster selection in the first data segment.
(Fig. 1.8).

A
4. Repeat Step 3 on each successive EMG
cluster.

A

Data Analysis continues… Fig. 1.8 EMG cluster selection


Lesson 1: EMG I Page 9

5. Scroll to the second recording segment. The second recording segment begins at the marker labeled “Forearm 2” and
includes four clenches from Subject’s non-dominant arm.
6. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for Forearm 2 data.
7. Scroll to the first recording segment. Tonus is the resting state, and is represented by the area between clenches
(clusters). Fig. 1.9 below shows the selected area between clenches.
8. Use the I-Beam cursor to select the area
between the first and second clenches
(Fig. 1.9).

C
9. Repeat Step 8 between each successive
clench.
10. Scroll to the second recording segment.
11. Repeat Steps 8-9 for Forearm 2 data.

C

Fig. 1.9 Selection between clenches to measure tonus


12. Save or print the data file.  You may save the data to another location, save notes that are in the
journal, or print the data file.
13. Quit the program. 
END OF DATA ANALYSIS

END OF LESSON 1
Complete the Lesson 1 Data Report that follows.
Page 10 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
Lesson 1: EMG I Page 11

ELECTROMYOGRAPHY I
Standard and Integrated EMG
DATA REPORT
Student’s Name:
Lab Section:
Date:

I. Data and Calculations


Subject Profile
Name Height Gender: Male / Female

Age Weight Dominant forearm: Right / Left

A. EMG Measurements
Forearm 1 (Dominant) Forearm 2
Cluster #
1
2
3
4
Note: "Clusters" are the EMG bursts associated with each clench.

B. Use the mean measurement from the table above to compute the percentage increase in EMG activity recorded between the
weakest clench and the strongest clench of Forearm 1.
Calculation:

Answer: %

C. Tonus Measurements
Between Forearm 1 (Dominant) Forearm 2
Clusters #
1-2
2-3
3-4
Page 12 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

II. Questions
D. Compare the mean measurement for the right and left maximum clench EMG cluster.

Are they the same or different? _____ Same _____ Different

Which one suggests the greater clench strength? _____ Right _____ Left _____ Neither

Explain.

E. What factors in addition to sex contribute to observed differences in clench strength?

F. Does there appear to be any difference in tonus between the two forearm clench muscles? _____ Yes _____ No

Would you expect to see a difference? Does Subject’s gender influence your expectations? Explain.

G. Explain the source of signals detected by the EMG electrodes.


Lesson 1: EMG I Page 13

H. What does the term “motor unit recruitment” mean?

I. Define skeletal muscle tonus.

J. Define electromyography.

End of Lesson 1 Data Report


Physiology Lessons Lesson 2
for use with the
Biopac Student Lab
ELECTROMYOGRAPHY II
Motor unit recruitment
Fatigue

Richard Pflanzer, Ph.D.


Associate Professor Emeritus
Indiana University School of Medicine
Purdue University School of Science

J.C. Uyehara, Ph.D


Biologist
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

William McMullen
Vice President
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

BIOPAC® Systems, Inc.


42 Aero Camino, Goleta, CA 93117
(805) 685-0066, Fax (805) 685-0067
info@biopac.com
www.biopac.com

Manual Revision PL3.7.6


09092009
© BIOPAC Systems, Inc.
Page 4 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

II. EXPERIMENTAL OBJECTIVES


1) To determine the maximum clench strength for right and left hands and compare differences between male and
female.
2) To observe, record, and correlate motor unit recruitment with increased power of skeletal muscle contraction.
3) To record the force produced by clench muscles, EMG, and integrated EMG when inducing fatigue.

III. MATERIALS
 BIOPAC Hand Dynamometer (SS25LA or SS25L)
o Optional Hand Clench Force Pump Bulb (SS56L) may be used—pressure in bulb is proportional to clench
force. For SS56L units, set the Clench Force Transducer Preference BEFORE starting calibration.
 BIOPAC electrode lead set (SS2LA/L)
 BIOPAC disposable vinyl electrodes (EL503), 6 electrodes per subject
 BIOPAC electrode gel (GEL1) and abrasive pad (ELPAD) or Skin cleanser or Alcohol prep
 Optional: BIOPAC Headphones (OUT1 for MP3X or 40HP for MP45)
 Biopac Student Lab System: software BSL 3.7.5 or above
data acquisition unit MP36, MP35, MP30 (Windows only), or MP45
 Computer system

IV. EXPERIMENTAL METHODS


 For further explanation, use the online support options under the Help Menu.
A. SET UP
FAST TRACK SET UP Detailed Explanation
1. Turn your computer ON.  The desktop should appear on the monitor. If it does not appear,
2. Make sure the BIOPAC MP3X unit is OFF. ask the laboratory instructor for assistance.
3. Plug the equipment in as follows:
Electrode lead Set (SS2LA/L) — CH 1
Hand Dynamometer (SS25LA or SS25L)
or Clench Force Pump Bulb (SS56L) — CH 2
Headphones (OUT1 or 40HP) — back of unit
4. Turn ON the BIOPAC MP3X unit.

Setup continues... Fig. 2.3 MP3X (top) and MP45 (bottom) equipment connections
Lesson 2: EMG II www.biopac.com Page 5

5. Attach three electrodes to each forearm


(Fig. 2.4).
 Attach three electrodes to each forearm as shown in Fig. 2.4.
For optimal electrode adhesion, place electrodes on the skin at least 5
minutes before the start of Calibration.

6. Attach the electrode lead set (SS2LA/L) to the Attach the lead set (SS2LA/L) to the Subject’s dominant forearm (Fig.
Subject’s dominant forearm, following the color 2.4) for recording Segments 1 and 2 (forearm 1).
code (Fig. 2.4).

IMPORTANT
Make sure the electrode lead colors
match Fig. 2.4.
White Lead
(-)

Red Lead
(+)
Black Lead
(Ground)

Fig. 2.4 Electrode Placement & Lead Attachment

 If the subject is right-handed, the right forearm is generally dominant;


if the subject is left-handed, the left forearm is generally dominant.
 The electrode lead cables are each a different color and each must
be attached to a specific electrode position, as shown in Fig. 2.4.
 The pinch connectors work like a small clothespin and will only
latch onto the nipple of the electrode from one side of the
connector.
 You will switch the lead set to the Subject’s non-dominant arm for
recording Segments 3 and 4 (Forearm 2).

7. Start the BIOPAC Student Lab Program. 


8. Choose lesson “L02” and click OK. Lesson L02 is Electromyography (EMG) II.
9. Type in a unique filename. No two people can have the same filename, so use a unique identifier,
such as the subject’s nickname or student ID#.
10. Click OK.
This ends the Set Up procedure.
11. Optional: Set Preferences. This lesson has optional Preferences for data and display while
recording. Per your Lab Instructor’s guidelines, you may set:
 Choose File > Preferences. Journal Text: show minimum guiding text vs. detailed text
 Select an option. Recording Length: allow from 30 seconds to 30 minutes of data
 Select the desired setting and click OK. Clench Force Transducer: Choose model SS25LA/L or SS56L
(Bulb). The SS56L clench force bulb measures proportionality of
bulb pressure to clench force in “kgf/m^2” units (a pressure unit) and
END OF SETUP is the default when recording with an MP45 unit.
Page 6 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

B. CALIBRATION
The Calibration procedure establishes the hardware’s internal parameters (such as gain, offset, and scaling) and is critical for
optimum performance. Pay close attention to the Calibration procedure.

FAST TRACK CALIBRATION Detailed Explanation of Steps for Calibration


1. Click Calibrate. You will be prompted to remove any grip force from the hand dynamometer.
To do so, set the hand dynamometer down.
2. Set the hand dynamometer down and Remove your hands from the transducer to ensure there is no force on the
click OK. transducer. This establishes a zero-force calibration before you continue the
calibration sequence.
3. Grasp the BIOPAC hand dynamometer Clench with the hand of your dominant forearm.
with your hand and then click OK. Dynagrip crossbar

SS25LA: Place the short grip bar


against the palm, toward the thumb,
and wrap your fingers to center the
Hand close to
force. bracket but not
touching.
SS25L: Grasp as close to the dynagrip
crossbar as possible without actually
touching the crossbar (Fig. 2.5).
SS56L: WRAP your hand around the
bulb with relaxed fingers—do NOT
curl fingers into bulb.
SS25LA grip position SS25L grip position
IMPORTANT
Hold the dynamometer in the
same position for all
measurements from each arm.
Note your hand position for the
first segment and try to repeat it
for the other segments. SS56L grip position
Fig. 2.5

4. When Calibration recording begins, The program needs a reading of your maximum clench to perform an auto-
clench the hand dynamometer as hard calibration.
as possible and then release.
5. Wait for Calibration to stop. The Calibration procedure will last eight seconds and stop automatically, so let
it run its course.
6. Check the Calibration data. After the Calibration recording, the screen should resemble Fig.2.6.
 If using SS25LA/L, units are kg; if using SS56L, units are kgf/m^2.
 If similar, proceed to the data
Recording Section.
 If different, Redo Calibration.

Fig. 2.6
If the recording does not have a zero baseline, repeat calibration to match Fig.
END OF CALIBRATION 2.6.
Lesson 2: EMG II www.biopac.com Page 7

C. RECORDING LESSON DATA


FAST TRACK RECORDING Detailed Explanation of Steps for Recording Lesson Data
1. Prepare for the recording. You will record two segments on each forearm:
a. Segments 1 and 3 record Motor unit recruitment.
b. Segments 2 and 4 record Fatigue
In order to work efficiently, read this entire section so you will know what to
do before recording.
SEGMENT 1
2. Click Continue. When you click Continue, the display will change to show only the Clench
Force channel, with grids on and the grid division scale based on your
3. Note your Assigned Increment level from the assigned increment so that you can visually review the increment levels.
journal.
Based on your calibrated grip force, the software determines the optimal grid
display and force increments. Check the journal and use the indicated
increment when directed to increase force throughout the recording. The grid
display is set as follows:
SS25L/LA Force calibration Assigned Increment
0-25 kg 5kg
25-50 kg 10 kg
> 50 kg 20 kg

SS56L Max Clench Assigned Increment


≤ 5,000 kgf/m^2 1,000 kgf/m^2
≥ 5,000 up to and including 10,000 kgf/m^2 1,500 kgf/m^2
> 10,000 kgf/m^2 2,000 kgf/m^2

4. Click Record. After you click Record, an append marker labeled “Forearm 1, Increasing
clench force” will be automatically inserted and recording will begin.
5. Subject performs Clench-Release-Wait Repeat a cycle of Clench-Release-Wait, holding for two seconds and waiting
cycles with increasing clench force. for two seconds after releasing before beginning the next cycle. Begin with
your Assigned Increment and increase each successive cycle by the Assigned
Increment until maximum is reached (i.e., 5-10-15-20 kg).
6. Click Suspend. Suspend will halt the recording, giving you time to review the data and
prepare for the next recording segment. If data looks similar to Fig. 2,
7. Review the data on the screen.
continue.
 If similar, go to Step 8.  The important aspect for you to review is that the data shows multiple
 If different, click Redo and repeat Steps peaks (indicating the clench cycles).
4-7.  The data shown is from a Subject who was able to maintain an even force
throughout the clench. Your data may be correct even if your peaks are
not smooth.

Recording continues… Fig. 2.7 Motor Unit Recruitment


Page 8 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
The data might be different if the:
a. Suspend was clicked prematurely.
b. Instructions were not followed.
Click “Redo” and repeat Steps 4-7 if necessary. Note that once you click
Redo, the data you have just recorded will be erased.
SEGMENT 2
8. Click Continue. After you click Continue, review the updated directions in the journal.
After you click Resume, an append marker labeled “Forearm 1, Continued
9. Click Resume.
clench at maximum force” will be automatically inserted and the recording
will continue.
10. Clench the bulb with your maximum force. Note the maximum clench force so you can determine when the force has
Note this force and try to maintain it. decreased by 50% (the maximum force may scroll out of view). Try to
maintain the maximum clench force (the forearm will fatigue and the force
will decrease).
11. When the maximum clench force displayed The time to fatigue to 50% of maximal clench force will vary greatly among
on the screen has decreased by more than individuals.
50%, click Suspend.
12. Review the data on the screen. When you click Suspend, the recording should halt, giving you time to
review the data for segment two. If data looks similar to Fig. 2.8, continue.
 If similar, go Step 13.
 If different, click Redo and repeat Steps
9-12.

Fig. 2.8 Fatigue


Note that the peak found immediately following the start of the Segment
represents the maximal clench force. This example shows the point of fatigue
to 50% maximal clench force captured on the same screen, but your
maximum force may scroll out of view. You may use the horizontal (time)
scroll bar to view your entire recording.
The data might be different if:
a) You didn’t record to the point of 50% maximal clench force.
b) Suspend was clicked prematurely.
c) The instructions were not followed.
Click “Redo” and have the Subject rest so the arm muscles recover and the
fatigue data will be meaningful. When ready, repeat Steps 9-12. Note that
once you click Redo, the data you have just recorded will be erased.

Recording continues…
Lesson 2: EMG II www.biopac.com Page 9
SEGMENT 3
13. To record Forearm 2, connect the lead set Segments 3 and 4 record Forearm 2, White Lead
(SS2LA/L) to the electrodes on Subject’s the non-dominant forearm, (-)
non-dominant forearm. following the same procedure used for Red Lead
Forearm 1. (+)
Black Lead
IMPORTANT Disconnect the lead set (SS2LA/L) (Ground)
Make sure the electrode lead from the electrodes on Forearm 1 and
colors match Fig. 2.9. connect to electrodes on Forearm 2
per Fig. 2.9
 If electrodes are not attached to
Forearm 2, refer to Setup Step 5 Fig. 2.9 Electrode lead attachment
for proper placement.
14. Click Continue and note your Assigned After you click Continue, review the updated directions in the journal and
Increment level from the journal. use the indicated increment when directed to increase force throughout the
recording.
After you click Resume, an append marker labeled “Forearm 2, Increasing
15. Click Resume.
Clench Force” will be automatically inserted and the recording will
continue.
16. Subject performs Clench-Release-Wait Repeat a cycle of Clench-Release-Wait, holding for 2 seconds and waiting
cycles with increasing clench force. for two seconds after releasing before beginning the next cycle. Begin with
your Assigned Increment of force and increase by the Assigned Increment
for each cycle until maximum clench force is obtained.
17. Click Suspend. The recording should halt, giving you time to review the data and prepare
for the next recording segment. If data looks similar to Fig. 2.7, continue.
18. Review the data on the screen.
The data might be different if the:
 If similar, go to Step 19.
a. Suspend was clicked prematurely.
 If different, click Redo and repeat
Steps 15-18. b. Instructions were not followed.
Click Redo and repeat Steps 15-18 if necessary. Note that once you click
Redo, the data you have just recorded will be erased.
SEGMENT 4
19. Click Continue. After you click Continue, review the updated directions in the journal. The
grid division scale will be based on your assigned increment so that you can
20. Resume. visually review the force level.
After you click Resume, an append marker labeled “Forearm 2, Continued
clench at maximum force” will be automatically inserted and the recording
will continue.
21. Clench the bulb with your maximum force Note the maximum clench force so you can determine when the force has
and try to sustain this level. decreased by 50% (the maximum force may scroll out of view). Try to
maintain the maximum clench force (the forearm will fatigue and the force
will decrease).
22. When the maximum clench force displayed The time to fatigue to 50% of maximal clench force will vary greatly among
on the screen has decreased by more than individuals.
50%, click Suspend.
23. Review the data on the screen. When you click Suspend, the recording should halt, giving you time to
review the data from the last recording segment. If data looks similar to Fig.
 If similar, go Step 24.
2.8, continue.
 If different, click Redo and repeat The data might be different if:
Steps 20-23. a) You didn’t record to the point of 50% maximal clench force.
b) Suspend was clicked prematurely.
c) The instructions were not followed.
Click Redo and have the Subject rest so the arm muscles recover and the
fatigue data will be meaningful. When ready, repeat Steps 21-24. Note that
Recording continues… once you click Redo, the data you have just recorded will be erased.
Page 10 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
24. Click Stop and then click Yes. When you click Stop, a dialog box is generated, asking if you are finished
with both Forearm recordings. This is simply one last chance to confirm that
you don’t need to redo the last recording segment. Click “Yes” to end data
recording and automatically save the data. Click “No” to return to a display
with a Redo option.
25. If you want to listen to the EMG signal, go Listening to the EMG is optional.
to Step 26.
Listening to the EMG can be a valuable tool in detecting muscle
or
abnormalities, and is performed here for general interest.
To skip listening and end the recording,
go to Step 30.
26. Subject puts on the headphones. You will hear the EMG signal through the headphones as it is being
displayed on the screen. The screen will display two channels: CH 1 EMG
27. Click Listen.
and CH 41 Clench Force. The data on the screen will not be saved.
28. As you listen, try a variety of Clench-
Note The volume through the headphones may be very loud due to system
Release–Wait cycles and watch how the
feedback. Use the Volume + or Volume – buttons or position the
data changes on the screen.
headphones slightly off the ear to reduce the volume.
29. Click Stop.
The signal will run until you click Stop. If others in your lab group would
like to hear the EMG signal, pass the headphones around before clicking
 To listen again: click Redo, listen, and Stop or click Redo and then Stop when done.
then click Stop.

30. Click Done. A dialog with options will be generated. Make your choice and click OK.
31. Select an option and click OK. If choosing the “Record from another subject” option:
a) Attach electrodes per Setup Step 5 and continue the entire lesson
from Setup Step 8.
b) Each person will need to use a unique file name.
32. Remove the electrodes from each forearm. Remove the electrode cable pinch connectors, and peel off the electrodes.
Discard the electrodes (BIOPAC electrodes are not reusable). Wash the
electrode gel residue from the skin, using soap and water. The electrodes
END OF RECORDING may leave a slight ring on the skin for a few hours, which is quite normal.
Lesson 2: EMG II www.biopac.com Page 11
V. DATA ANALYSIS
FAST TRACK DATA ANALYSIS Detailed Explanation of Data Analysis Steps
1. Enter the Review Saved Data mode and
choose the correct file.
Enter Review Saved Data from the Lessons menu.
 For the first part of the analysis, use the data labeled “Increasing clench
force” recorded in Segment 1 for Forearm 1 and Segment 3 for Forearm 2.
Note your findings in Table 2.1.
 For the second part of the analysis, use the data labeled “Continued
clench at maximum force” recorded in Segment 2 for Forearm 1 and
Segment 4 for Forearm 2. Note your findings in Table 2.2.

 Note Channel Number (CH)


designations:
Channel Displays
CH 1 EMG (hidden*)
CH 40 Integrated EMG
CH 41 Clench Force
* To show hidden channel data,
“Ctrl+click” (Windows) or
“Option+click” (Mac) the channel
number box.

 Note measurement settings:


Channel Measurement Fig. 2.10
CH 41 Mean The measurement boxes are above the marker region in the data window.
CH 40 Mean Each measurement has three sections: channel number, measurement type,
CH 41 Value and result. The first two sections are pull-down menus that are activated
when you click them.
CH 40 Delta T
The following is a brief description of these specific measurements. 
Mean: displays the average value in the selected area.
Value: displays the amplitude value for the channel at the point selected by
the I-beam cursor. If a single point is selected, the value is for that point, if
an area is selected, the value is the endpoint of the selected area (based on
the direction the cursor was dragged).
Delta T: displays the amount of time in the selected segment (the difference
in time between the endpoints of the selected area).
The “selected area” is the area selected by the I-Beam tool (including
endpoints).
Analysis of Increasing Clench Force
2. Setup your display for optimal viewing of The first data segment was the recording before the first marker. See Fig.
Segment 1 data. 2.11.
 Display menu: Autoscale horizontal Autoscale waveforms, Zoom
Previous
Scroll Bars: Time (Horizontal); Amplitude (Vertical)
Cursor Tools: Zoom Tool
Buttons: Overlap, Split, Show Grid, Hide Grid
3. Read the journal and note your force The Journal summary shows the force increment used in your recordings.
increment in the Data Report. The grid divisions should use the same increment. Note this increment in
A Table 2.1 in the second column, Force (kg) Increments for Peak #1. For
subsequent peaks, add the increment (i.e., 5, 10, 15 kg or 10, 20, 30 kg).
Data Analysis continues….
Page 12 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
4. Use the I-Beam cursor to select an area on
the plateau phase of the first clench (Fig.
2.11).

A
5. Repeat Step 4 on the plateau of each
successive clench.

A

Fig. 2.11 Plateau of first clench selected

6. Scroll to Segment 3 and set up your Segment 3 begins at the third append marker, labeled “Forearm 2, Increasing
display for optimal viewing. clench force.”
7. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for Segment 3. Enter your measurement findings in Table 2.1.
Analysis of Continued Clench …
8. Scroll to Segment 2 and set up your Segment 2 begins at the second append marker, labeled “Forearm 1,
display for optimal viewing. Continued clench at maximum force.”
9. Use the I-Beam cursor to select a point of
maximal clench force immediately
following the start of the segment (Fig.
2.12).

B

Fig. 2.12

The point selected should represent the maximal clench force at the start of
Segment 2 (continuous maximal clench), as shown in Fig. 2.12.

10. Calculate 50% of the maximum clench You will need this number to complete Step 12.
force from Step 9.

B
11. Find the point of 50% maximum clench Make an eyeball approximation of the point that is 50% down from the
force by using the I-beam cursor and leave maximal clench point. Then, use the I-beam cursor to click points near this
the cursor at this point. region, noting the value displayed in the measurement box, until you are on a
point within 5% of the maximal clench force. Leave the cursor at this point.
12. Select the area from the point of 50% One way to select the area is as follows:
clench force back to the point of maximal
The cursor should be flashing on the point of 50% maximal clench force.
clench force by using the I-beam cursor
Hold down the mouse button and drag to the left of this point until you reach
and dragging. (Fig. 2.13). Note the time to
the point of maximal clench force, then release the mouse button.
fatigue measurement (CH 40 Delta T).

B
Data Analysis continues…
Lesson 2: EMG II www.biopac.com Page 13

13. Scroll to Segment 4 and set up your display


for optimal viewing.
14. Repeat Steps 9 to 13 for Segment 4.

Fig. 2.13 showing area max-50%

Segment 4 begins at the fourth append marker, labeled “Forearm 2,


Continued clench at maximum force.”
Enter your measurement findings in Table 2.2.
15. Save or print the data file. You may save the data to another location, save notes that are in the
16. Exit the program. journal, or print the data file.
END OF DATA ANALYSIS

END OF LESSON 2
Complete the Lesson 2 Data Report that follows.
Page 14 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
Lesson 2: EMG II www.biopac.com Page 15

ELECTROMYOGRAPHY II
Motor unit recruitment and Fatigue

DATA REPORT
Student’s Name:
Lab Section:
Date:

Subject Profile

Name Height Gender: Male / Female

Age Weight Dominant forearm: Right / Left

I. Data and Calculations


Motor Unit Recruitment
A. Complete Table 2.1 using Segment 1 and Segment 3 data. In the "Force (kg) Increments" column, note the force
increment assigned for your recording under Peak #1; the increment was pasted to the Journal and should be noted
below from Data Analysis—Step 2. For subsequent peaks, add the increment (i.e., 500, 1000, 1500). You may not
need eight peaks to reach max. Take measurements on plateaus of the Integrated EMG data.
Table 2.1 Increasing Clench Force Data
Assigned Seg. 1 Forearm 1 (Dominant) Seg. 3 Forearm 2
Peak Force Increment Force at Peak Integrated EMG Force at Peak Integrated EMG
# SS25L/LA = Kg (mV) (mV)

SS56L = kgf/m^2
1

Fatigue
B. Complete Table 2.2 using Segment 2 and Segment 4 data.
Table 2.2 Maximum Clench Force Data
Seg. 2 Forearm 1 (Dominant) Seg. 4 Forearm 2
Maximum 50% of Max Time* to Maximum 50% of Max Time* to
Clench Force Clench Force Fatigue Clench Force Clench force fatigue
calculate calculate

*Note: You do not need to indicate the Delta T (time to fatigue) polarity. The polarity of the Delta T measurement reflects
the direction the "I-beam" cursor was dragged to select the data. Data selected left to right will have a positive ("+")
polarity, while data selected right to left will have a negative ("-") polarity.
Page 16 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
II. Questions
C. Is the strength of your right arm different than your left arm? Yes No
D. Is there a difference in the absolute values of force generated by males and females in your class? Yes No
What might explain any difference?

E. When holding an object, does the number of motor units remain the same? Are the same motor units used for the
duration of holding the object?

F. As you fatigue, the force exerted by your muscles decreases. What physiological processes explain the decline in strength?

G. Define Motor unit

H. Define Motor unit recruitment

I. Define Fatigue

J. Define EMG

K. Define Dynamometry

End of Lesson 2 Data Report


Physiology Lessons Lesson 3
for use with the ELECTROENCEPHALOGRAPHY I
Biopac Student Lab EEG I
Relaxation and Brain Rhythms
Alpha, beta, delta, and theta rhythms

Richard Pflanzer, Ph.D.


Associate Professor Emeritus
Indiana University School of Medicine
Purdue University School of Science

J.C. Uyehara, Ph.D.


Biologist
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

William McMullen
Vice President
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

BIOPAC® Systems, Inc.


42 Aero Camino, Goleta, CA 93117
(805) 685-0066, Fax (805) 685-0067
info@biopac.com
www.biopac.com

Manual Revision 3.7.6


09092009
 BIOPAC Systems, Inc.
Page 4 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
II. EXPERIMENTAL OBJECTIVES
1) To record an EEG from an awake, resting subject with eyes open and eyes closed.
2) To identify and examine alpha, beta, delta, and theta components of the EEG complex.

III. MATERIALS
 BIOPAC electrode lead set (SS2LA/L)
 BIOPAC disposable vinyl electrodes (EL503), 3 electrodes per subject
 BIOPAC electrode gel (GEL1) and abrasive pad (ELPAD) or Skin cleanser or alcohol prep
 Lycra® swim cap (such as Speedo® brand) or supportive wrap (such as 3M Coban™ Self-adhering Support Wrap)
to press electrodes against head for improved contact
 Cot or lab table and pillow
 Biopac Student Lab System: software BSL 3.7.5 or above
data acquisition unit MP36, MP35, MP30 (Windows only), or MP45
 Computer system

IV. Experimental Methods

 For further explanation, use the online support options under the Help Menu.

A. SETUP
FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION
1. Turn the computer ON.  The desktop should appear on the monitor. If it does not appear, ask the
2. Make sure the BIOPAC MP3X unit is laboratory instructor for assistance.
turned OFF.
Plugs into Channel 1
3. Plug the equipment in as follows:
Electrode lead (SS2LA/L)—CH 1
4. Turn ON the BIOPAC MP3X unit.

SS2LA/L Electrode Lead Set

Fig. 3.2 MP3X (top) and MP45 (bottom)0 equipment connections

Setup continues….
Lesson 3: EEG I Page 5
5. Position electrodes on the scalp.
RED Lead
Fig. 3.3 shows a sample configuration.

 If it is easier, you can


attach the BLACK lead
IMPORTANT (ground) to the neck
Electrode adhesion to the scalp instead of to the ear
WHITE Lead
is crucial for obtaining a
meaningful EEG recording.
lobe.

BLACK Lead
(Ground)
Fig. 3.3

 Guidelines for electrode placement:


a) The placement of the scalp electrodes can vary (within limits)
depending on your instructor’s or Subject’s preference.
b) Keep the electrodes on one side (right or left) of the head.
c) The third electrode is the ground electrode and is connected to the
earlobe or neck. The adhesive collar is larger than the earlobe but it can
be folded under the ear.
Hints for obtaining optimal data:
a) As much as possible, move the hair away from the electrode adhesion
area. Otherwise the hair will pull the electrodes up, away from the scalp.
b) Apply pressure to the electrodes for about 1 minute after the initial
placement.
c) Subject should remain still. Blinking and other movement will affect
the recording of all four rhythms.
d) Despite your best efforts, electrode adhesion may not be strong enough
to record data; try another Subject or different electrode placement.
6. Attach the electrode leads to the The pinch connectors work like a small clothespin, but only latch onto the
electrodes, following the color code in nipple of the electrode from one side of the connector. Drape the electrode
Fig. 3.3. cables over the head so that they are not pulling on the electrodes.
7. Place supportive cap/wrap on Subject’s Place a Lycra® swim cap or supportive wrap on Subject’s head to press the
head to press electrodes against the scalp electrodes against the scalp with a constant pressure. Subject should not hold
with constant pressure. electrodes against scalp.
8. Ask Subject to lie down and relax with A supine position with the head resting comfortably but tilted to one side is
eyes closed for approximately 5 minutes recommended. Ideally, the room should be reasonably quiet to help Subject
before recording. mentally relax. This 5-minute period is also important to give the electrodes
time to establish contact with the surface of the skin.
9. Start the Biopac Student Lab Program. 
10. Choose “L03” and click OK. Lesson L03 is Electroencephalography (EEG) I.
11. Type in your filename and click OK. Use a unique identifier.

This ends the default setup.


12. Optional: Set Preferences. This lesson has optional Preferences for data and display while recording. Per
your Lab Instructor’s guidelines, you may set:
 Choose File > Preferences. Grids: show or hide gridlines
 Select an option. Journal Text: show minimum guiding text vs. detailed text
 Select the desired setting and click Recording Length: allow from 30 seconds to 30 minutes of data
OK.
END OF SETUP
Page 6 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
B. CALIBRATION
Calibration establishes the hardware’s internal parameters (such as gain, offset, and scaling) and is critical for optimum
performance. Pay close attention to Calibration.
FAST TRACK Calibration DETAILED EXPLANATION OF CALIBRATION STEPS
1. Ensure that electrodes and electrode Subject remains relaxed with eyes closed during Calibration. The best
leads are properly placed and that Subject recordings occur when Subject is relaxed for the entire recording.
is supine and relaxed.
2. Click Calibrate. The Calibrate button is in the upper left corner of the program screen.
3. Check connections and click OK. A prompt will be generated, requesting that you check the electrode
attachments one last time. Click OK to begin Calibration. The Biopac Student
Calibration continues…. Lab will begin recording data and use it to calculate optimal settings for the
Subject. Calibration will stop automatically after 8 seconds.
4. Check the calibration data. At the end of the 8-
sec calibration
 If similar, proceed to the Data recording, the screen
Recording section. should resemble Fig.
3.4.
 If different, click Redo Calibration.

Figure 3.4

There should be zero baseline (a relatively flat line) as in Fig. 3.4.


If the data shows any large spikes, click Redo Calibration and repeat the
END OF CALIBRATION entire calibration sequence.

C. RECORDING DATA
FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION
1. Prepare for the recording. You will record the “raw EEG” while Subject is relaxed with eyes closed, eyes
opened, and eyes closed again. After recording the EEG signal, the software will
extract four brain rhythms: alpha, beta, delta, and theta.
In order to work efficiently, read this entire section before starting to record.
Hints for obtaining optimal data:
a) Good electrode contact is essential to minimize “noise” and increase signal
amplitude.
b) Subject should be supine and keep muscles still, especially facial muscles.
c) During the “eyes open” segment, Subject should not blink.
d) Subject should try relaxation techniques, such as concentrating on
breathing slowly or relaxing muscles.

2. Click Record. When you click Record, the recording will


begin and an append marker labeled “EEG
with changing eye conditions” will
automatically be inserted. You may edit the
marker label after acquisition.
TIP In this lesson, Display > Autoscale
Waveforms and Autoscale Horizontal
are enabled DURING recording.

Recording continues…
Lesson 3: EEG I Page 7
3. Director should instruct Subject to The EEG will be recorded on CH 1. The recording should last about 60 seconds.
remain relaxed but change eye condition, The Director should tell Subject to change the eye condition for 20-second
and Recorder should insert event intervals, and the Recorder should insert an event marker at each change.
markers when condition changes. Recorder should press F4 when eyes are opened and F5 when eyes are closed to
Director and Subject: insert pre-labeled markers.
First 20 seconds (secs. 0-20)
Time Eye Condition
Subject should be relaxed, with eyes closed for the first 20 seconds.
Seconds 0-20 eyes closed
Seconds 21-40 eyes open Next 20 seconds (secs. 21-40)
Seconds 41-60 eyes closed Director should tell Subject to open the eyes and try not to blink for the
Recorder next 20 seconds.

 “eyes open” 21 secs. — press F4


Recorder presses F4 to insert a marker labeled “eyes open.”
After another 20 seconds (secs. 41-60)
 “eyes closed” at 41 secs. — press F5 Director should tell Subject to close his/her eyes for the next 20 seconds.
Recorder presses F5 to insert a marker labeled “eyes closed.”
 Labels can also be entered manually (F9 on Windows, Esc on Mac) or
edited after data is recorded.
4. Click Suspend.
5. Review the data on the screen
 CH 1 EEG
 If similar to Fig.3.5, go to CH 40 alpha
Step 6. CH 41 beta
 If different click Redo. CH 42 delta
CH 43 theta

(Frequency band channels


are hidden during
Fig. 3.5 recording.)
Data should show a decrease in amplitude during the “eyes open” segment.
Amplitude change may be more obvious in the alpha band (CH 40) than in the
unfiltered EEG band (CH 1); to show/hide channels to review specific bands,
Windows: Ctrl-click the channel box, Mac: Option-click the channel box.
If data looks similar to Fig. 3.5, proceed to Step 6.
You should consider redoing the recording if data shows
 large drifts in baseline (poor electrode adhesion)
 large spikes (indicating Subject may have blinked or moved)
 no change (indicating electrodes may not have been properly attached to
the skin or the recording procedure may not have been properly
followed)
To redo the recording and record the “raw EEG” again, click Redo and then
click Yes, then click Resume and repeat Steps 3-5; the data you have previously
recorded will be erased.
6. Click Done. When you click Yes, the program will compute and display the specific
frequency bands behind the dialog with close options. Make your choice, and
7. Click Yes.
continue as directed (you will review the bands in the Analysis section).
If choosing the “Record from another Subject” option:
a) Attach electrodes per Setup Steps 5-8 and continue the entire lesson
from Setup Step 11.
b) Each person will need to use a unique file name.
8. Remove electrodes. Remove the electrode cable pinch connectors. Peel off and discard the
electrodes; BIOPAC electrodes are not reusable. Wash the electrode gel residue
from the skin, using soap and water. The electrodes may leave a slight ring on
END OF RECORDING
the skin for a few hours, which is quite normal.
Page 8 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
IV. DATA ANALYSIS
FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION
1. Enter the Review Saved Data mode. Enter the Review Saved Data mode from the Lessons menu. 
 Note Channel Number (CH) The data window should be similar to Fig. 3.6 (in the Recording section).
designations.
Channel Displays
CH 1 EEG (unfiltered, hidden)
CH 40 alpha
CH 41 beta
CH 42 delta
CH 43 theta
 Note measurement box settings:
Channel Measurement
CH 40 Stddev
CH 41 Stddev
Rhythm Frequency (Hz) Amplitude (µV)
CH 42 Stddev
Alpha 8-13 ~20-200
CH 43 Stddev Beta 13-30 ~5-10
SC Freq Delta 1-5 ~20-200
Theta 4-8 ~10
The measurement boxes are above the marker region in the data window. Each
measurement has three sections: channel number, measurement type, and result.
The first two sections are pull-down menus that are activated when you click
them.

Stddev: standard deviation is a measure of the variability of data points. The
data represent amplitudes of the brain rhythms. The advantage of the stddev
measurement is that extreme values or artifacts do not unduly influence the
measurement.
Freq: converts the time segment of the selected area to frequency in
cycles/sec. It will not calculate the correct frequency if the selected area
contains more than one cycle.
Note The Freq measurement applies to all channels since it is
calculated from the horizontal time scale.
The “selected area” is the area selected by the I-Beam tool (including endpoints).
2. Set up your display window for optimal To hide a channel, click the channel box while holding down the “Ctrl” (control)
viewing of channels 40-43. key on Windows or the “Option” key on Mac. This will toggle between hiding
and showing the channel’s data.
The following tools help you adjust the data window: 
Display menu: Autoscale horizontal Autoscale waveforms, Zoom Previous
Scroll Bars: Time (Horizontal); Amplitude (Vertical)
Cursor Tools: Zoom Tool
Buttons: Overlap, Split, Show Grid, Hide Grid

Data Analysis continues…


Lesson 3: EEG I Page 9

3. Use the I-Beam cursor to select the area This is the data from the append marker at Time 0 to the first event marker when
of “eyes closed” data from Time 0 to the Subject’s eyes were first closed. (See Fig. 3.7.)
first event marker.

A

Fig. 3.7

4. Repeat Step 3 using “eyes open” data. This is the data between the first and second event markers, when the eyes were
open.
A
5. Repeat Step 3 using “eyes re-closed” This is the data between the second event marker and the end of the file, and
data. represents the time when the eyes were re-closed.

A
6. Zoom in on a 3-4 second section of the This is the data (from the append marker at Time 0 to the first event marker)
“eyes closed” data from Time 0 to the when Subject’s eyes were first closed. Zoom in to display 3-4 seconds of data.
first event marker.
7. Use the I-beam cursor to select an area Accurate Frequency calculation requires a selected area of only one cycle.
that represents one cycle in the alpha
wave (Fig. 3.8).

B

Fig. 3.8 Selected area shows one cycle in the alpha wave.

8. Repeat Step 9 for two other alpha wave Make sure you stay in the first recorded data (from the append marker at Time 0
cycles. to the first event marker) when Subject’s eyes were first closed.

B
Click in the beta wave to make it the selected channel for “SC” measurements.
9. Repeat Steps 8-9 using the beta wave.

B

Data Analysis continues…


Page 10 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

10. Repeat Steps 8-9 using the delta wave. Click in the delta wave to make it the selected channel for “SC” measurements.

B
11. Repeat Step 8-9 using the theta wave. Click in the theta wave to make it the selected channel for “SC” measurements.

B  You may save the data to another location, save notes that are in the
journal, or print the data file.
12. Save or print the data file.
13. Quit the program.
END OF DATA ANALYSIS

END OF LESSON 3
Complete the Lesson 3 Data Report that follows.
Lesson 3: EEG I Page 11
ELECTROENCEPHALOGRAPHY I
EEG I

DATA REPORT

Student’s Name:
Lab Section:
Date:

I. Data and Calculations


Subject Profile
Name Height

Age Gender: Male / Female Weight

A. EEG Amplitude Measurements


Complete Table 3.2 with Standard Deviation measurements:
Table 3.2 Standard Deviation [Stddev]
Rhythm CH Measurement Eyes Closed Eyes Open Eyes Re-closed
Alpha
Beta
Delta
Theta

B. EEG Frequency Measurements


Complete Table 3.3 with the frequencies for each rhythm and calculate the mean frequency. Freq measurement applies
to all channels since it is calculated from the horizontal time scale, but you must select the correct area in each band.
Table 3.3 Frequency (Hz)
Rhythm CH Measurement Cycle 1 Cycle 2 Cycle 3 Mean
Alpha
Beta
Delta
Theta

II. Questions

C. List and define two characteristics of regular, periodic waveforms.

D. Compare and contrast synchrony and alpha block.


Page 12 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
E. Examine the alpha and beta waveforms for change between the “eyes closed” state and the “eyes open” state.

i. Does desynchronization of the alpha rhythm occur when the eyes are open?

ii. Does the beta rhythm become more pronounced in the “eyes open” state?

F. The amplitude measurements (Stddev) are indicative of how much alpha activity is occurring in Subject. But, the
amplitude values for beta do not truly reflect the amount of mental activity occurring with the eyes open. Explain.

G. Examine the delta and theta rhythm. Is there an increase in delta and theta activity when the eyes are open?
Explain your observation.

H. Define the following terms:

i. Alpha rhythm

ii. Beta rhythm

iii. Delta rhythm

iv. Theta rhythm

End of Lesson 3 Data Report


Physiology Lessons Lesson 4
for use with the
Biopac Student Lab ELECTROENCEPHALOGRAPHY II
EEG II
Alpha Rhythms in the occipital lobe

Richard Pflanzer, Ph.D.


Associate Professor Emeritus
Indiana University School of Medicine
Purdue University School of Science

J.C. Uyehara, Ph.D.


Biologist
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

William McMullen
Vice President
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

BIOPAC® Systems, Inc.


42 Aero Camino, Goleta, CA 93117
(805) 685-0066, Fax (805) 685-0067
info@biopac.com
www.biopac.com

Manual Revision 3.7.6


09032009
 BIOPAC Systems, Inc.
Lesson 4: EEG II Page 3

II. EXPERIMENTAL OBJECTIVES


1) To record an EEG from an awake, resting subject under the following conditions:
a) Relaxed with eyes closed;
b) Performing mental arithmetic with eyes closed;
c) Hyperventilating (breathing quickly and deeply) with eyes closed;
d) Relaxed with eyes open.
2) To examine differences in the level of alpha rhythm activity during mental arithmetic and hyperventilation,
compared to the control condition of eyes closed and relaxed.

III. MATERIALS
 BIOPAC electrode lead set (SS2LA/L)
 BIOPAC disposable vinyl electrodes (EL503), 3 electrodes per subject
 BIOPAC electrode gel (GEL1) and abrasive pad (ELPAD) or Skin cleanser or alcohol prep
 Lycra® swim cap (such as Speedo® brand) or supportive wrap (such as 3M Coban™ Self-adhering Support Wrap) to
press electrodes against head for improved contact
 Biopac Student Lab System: software BSL 3.7.5 or above
data acquisition unit MP36, MP35, MP30 (Windows only), or MP45
 Computer System
IV. EXPERIMENTAL METHODS

 For further explanation, use the online support options under the Help Menu.

A. SET UP
FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION
1.
2.
Turn the computer ON.
Make sure the BIOPAC MP3X unit is
 The desktop should appear on the monitor. If it does not appear, ask the
laboratory instructor for assistance.
turned OFF.
Plugs into Channel 1
3. Plug the equipment in as follows:
Electrode lead (SS2LA/L)—CH 1
4. Turn ON the BIOPAC MP3X unit.

SS2LA/L Electrode Lead Set

Fig. 4.2 MP3X (top) and MP45 (bottom)0 equipment connections

Setup continues…
Page 4 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

5. Position electrodes on the scalp.


Fig. 4.3 shows a sample configuration. RED Lead

 If it is easier, you can


attach the BLACK lead
IMPORTANT
Electrode adhesion to the scalp
(ground) to the neck
is crucial for obtaining a instead of to the ear
WHITE Lead lobe.
meaningful EEG recording.

BLACK Lead
(Ground)
Fig. 4.3

 Guidelines for electrode placement:


a) The placement of the scalp electrodes can vary (within limits) depending
on your instructor’s or Subject’s preference.
b) Keep the electrodes on one side (right or left) of the head.
c) The third electrode is the ground electrode and is connected to the earlobe
or neck. The adhesive collar is larger than the earlobe but it can be folded
under the ear.
Hints for obtaining optimal data:
1. As much as possible, move the hair away from the electrode adhesion
area. Otherwise the hair will pull the electrodes up, away from the scalp.
2. Apply pressure to the electrodes for about 1 minute after the initial
placement.
3. Subject should remain still. Blinking and other movement will affect the
recording of all four rhythms.
4. Despite your best efforts, electrode adhesion may not be strong enough to
record data; try another Subject or different electrode placement.
6. Attach the electrode leads to the The pinch connectors work like a small clothespin, but only latch onto the
electrodes, following the color code in nipple of the electrode from one side of the connector. Drape the electrode
Fig. 4.3. cables over the head so that they are not pulling on the electrodes.
7. Place supportive cap/wrap on Subject’s Place a Lycra® swim cap or supportive wrap on Subject’s head to press the
head to press electrodes against the scalp electrodes against the scalp with a constant pressure. Subject should not hold
with constant pressure. electrodes against scalp.
8. Ask Subject to sit and relax with eyes Ideally, the room should be reasonably quiet to help Subject mentally relax.
closed for approximately 5 minutes This 5-minute period is also important to give the electrodes time to establish
before recording. contact with the surface of the skin.
9. Start the Biopac Student Lab Program. 
10. Choose Lesson 4 (LO4-EEG-II) and
Use a unique identifier.
click OK.
11. Type in your filename and click OK. This ends the default setup.
12. Optional: Set Preferences. This lesson has optional Preferences for data and display while recording. Per
your Lab Instructor’s guidelines, you may set:
 Choose File > Preferences. Grids: show or hide gridlines
 Select an option. Journal Text: show minimum guiding text vs. detailed text
 Select the desired setting and click OK. Recording Length: allow from 30 seconds to 30 minutes of data

END OF SETUP
Lesson 4: EEG II Page 5

B. CALIBRATION
Calibration establishes the hardware’s internal parameters (such as gain, offset, and scaling) and is critical for optimum
performance. Pay close attention to Calibration.
FAST TRACK Calibration DETAILED EXPLANATION OF CALIBRATION STEPS
1. Ensure that electrodes and electrode Subject remains relaxed with eyes closed during Calibration. The best
leads are properly placed and that Subject recordings occur when Subject is relaxed for the entire recording.
is seated and relaxed.
2. Click Calibrate. The Calibrate button is in the upper left corner of the program screen.
3. Check connections and click OK. A prompt will be generated, requesting that you check the electrode
attachments one last time. Click OK to begin Calibration. The Biopac Student
Lab will begin recording data and use it to calculate optimal settings for
Subject. Calibration will stop automatically after 8 seconds.
4. Check the calibration data. At the end of the 8-
sec calibration
 If similar, proceed to the Data recording, the screen
Recording section. should resemble Fig.
4.4.
 If different, click Redo Calibration.

Figure 4.4

There should be zero baseline (a relatively flat line) as in Fig. 4.4.


If the data shows any large spikes, click Redo Calibration and repeat the
END OF CALIBRATION entire calibration sequence.

C. RECORDING LESSON DATA


FAST TRACK Recording DETAILED EXPLANATION OF RECORDING STEPS
1. Prepare for the recording while Subject You will record Subject in four conditions; Subject will perform tasks in the
remains seated, relaxed, and still. intervals between recordings.
Segment 1: Relaxed with eyes closed
Segment 2: Performing mental math with eyes closed
Segment 3: Recovering from hyperventilation with eyes closed
Segment 4: Relaxed with eyes open
In order to work efficiently, read this entire section so you will know what to do
for each recording segment.
Subject should remain in a supine position and continue to relax while you
review the lesson.
Hints for obtaining optimal data:
a) It is important that you pay attention to the specific instructions for each
recording segment.
b) Good electrode contact is essential to minimize noise and increase signal
amplitude.
c) Subject should not blink during the “eyes open” segment. Best results are
obtained if the eyes remain still at all times.
d) Subject should not talk during any of the recording segments, and should
not verbalize answers to the mental arithmetic.
e) The alpha signal will be increased during the relaxation segment if
Subject concentrates on breathing slowly and/or relaxing muscles.
Recording continues…
Page 6 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

f) For the “mental math” segment: the Director should prepare by coming
up with a math problem before recording begins. The math problem
should be challenging but not too difficult, e.g. take the number 2 and
double it, double again, double again, divide by 3, multiply by 15, divide
by 7, multiply by 12. The point is to make Subject really work to get the
answer, not to stump Subject or make them give up. The math problem
should require a minimum of twenty seconds.
g) Before the “recovery from hyperventilation” segment: Subject should
breathe quickly and deeply for two minutes, as if he/she had just finished
exercising and needed air. Subject should not be hyperventilating during
the recording.
Segment 1 Subject relaxed with eyes closed (Control)
2. Click Record and have Subject When Record is clicked, the recording will
continue to relax with eyes closed. begin and an append marker labeled
“Relaxed with eyes closed” will
automatically be inserted.
TIP In this lesson, Display > Autoscale
Waveforms and Autoscale
Horizontal are enabled DURING
recording.
Note The graph window will reduce to fit the Input
values window on the right side of the display.
The Input values window shows the alpha-RMS
value in a thermometer-like bar display, and can
be used as a visual aid to determine fluctuations
in alpha-RMS activity. It is only displayed when
data is recorded, and does not show in the
Review Saved Data mode.

Fig. 4.5
3. Record for 10 seconds. Subject should be relaxed with eyes closed (seconds 0-10).
4. Click Suspend. The recording should halt, giving you time to review the data and prepare for the
next recording segment.
5. Review the data on the screen. If data looks similar to Fig. 4.6, proceed to Step 6.
 If similar, go to Step 6.

Fig. 4.6 Relaxed, Eyes Closed

Recording continues…
Lesson 4: EEG II Page 7

 If different, click Redo. You should consider redoing the recording if


 Data shows
a.) large drifts in baseline (poor electrode adhesion)
b.) large spikes/EMG artifact (indicating Subject blinked or moved)
c.) no change (indicating electrodes may not have been properly attached to
the skin or the procedure may not have been properly followed)
 The Suspend button was pressed prematurely.
 Subject did not follow the proper procedure.
In this case, click Redo and repeat recording Steps 2-5. Once Redo is pressed, the
data that was just recorded will be erased.
Segment 2 Mental Arithmetic
6. Subject remains relaxed with eyes Subject remains relaxed with eyes closed. Director prepares a math problem.
closed while Director prepares a math The problem should be challenging but not too difficult—the point is to make
problem. Subject really work for the answer, not to stump Subject. For example:
 2 minus 4…times 3…plus 9…double that…double again…divide by 4...
7. Click Resume. When Resume is clicked, the recording will continue and an append marker
labeled “Mental arithmetic” will be automatically inserted.
8. Director verbalizes a math problem Director verbally provides a continuous arithmetic problem and Subject remains
and Subject silently processes it. seated with eyes closed and silently processes this problem for a minimum of 20
seconds (seconds 11-30).
9. Click Suspend. The recording should halt, giving you time to review the data and prepare for the
next recording segment.
10. Review the data on the screen. If data looks similar to Fig. 4.7, proceed to Step 11.
 If similar, go to Step 11.

Fig. 4.7 Mental Math, Eyes Closed

 If different, click Redo. The data may be different for the reasons in Step 5.
If different, click Redo and repeating recording Steps 7-10. Once Redo is
clicked, the data that was just recorded will be erased.
Segment 3 After Hyperventilation
11. Director advises Subject to Subject should hyperventilate for two minutes with eyes closed (see Hints).
hyperventilate for two minutes.
It is important that you resume recording as quickly as possible after Subject has
hyperventilated. However, it is also important that you do not click Resume
WARNING while Subject is hyperventilating or you will capture EMG artifact.
Hyperventilation can make
Subject dizzy and light headed.
Subject should be seated with
Director watching. Stop the
procedure if Subject starts to
feel sick or dizzy.

Recording continues…
Page 8 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

12. Click Resume. When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append marker
labeled “After hyperventilation” will be automatically inserted.
13. Record for 10 seconds while Subject is Subject should be in a relaxed state with eyes closed, recovering from
recovering from hyperventilation. hyperventilation.
14. Click Suspend. The recording should halt, giving you time to prepare for the next recording
segment.
15. Review the data on the screen. If data looks similar to Fig. 4.8, proceed to Step 16. It is normal to have some
baseline drift after hyperventilation, as shown in Fig. 4.8.

 If similar, go to Step 16.

Fig. 4.8 Recovering from Hyperventilation, Eyes Closed

 If different, click Redo. The data may be different for the reasons in Step 5.
If different, click Redo and repeat recording Steps 12-15. Once Redo is clicked,
the data that was just recorded will be erased.
Segment 4 Eyes Open
16. Director advises Subject to open Director should advise Subject to open his/her eyes.
his/her eyes, and continue to relax.
Subject should remain relaxed but open his/her eyes.
17. Click Resume. When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append marker
labeled “Eyes open” will be automatically inserted.
18. Record for 10 seconds. Subject should be seated and relaxed with eyes open and should try not to blink.
19. Click Suspend. The recording should halt.
20. Review the data on the screen. If data looks similar to Fig. 4.9, proceed to Step 21.
 If similar go to Step 21.

Fig. 4.9 Relaxed, Eyes Open


Recording continues…
Lesson 4: EEG II Page 9

 If different, click Redo. The data may be different for the reasons in Step 5.
If different, click Redo and repeat recording Steps 17-20. Once Redo is clicked,
the data that was just recorded will be erased.
21. Click Done. A dialog with options will be generated. Make your choice, and continue as
directed.
22. Click Yes.
If choosing the “Record from another Subject” option:
a) Prepare subject and attach electrodes per Setup Steps 5-8 and continue
the entire lesson from Setup Step 11.
b) Each person will need to use a unique file name.
23. Remove electrodes. Remove the electrode cable pinch connectors. Peel off and discard the electrodes;
BIOPAC electrodes are not reusable. Wash the electrode gel residue from the
skin, using soap and water. The electrodes may leave a slight ring on the skin for
END OF RECORDING a few hours, which is quite normal.

V. DATA ANALYSIS
FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION
1. Enter the Review Saved Data mode. Enter the Review Saved Data mode from the Lessons menu. 
 Note Channel Number (CH) The data window should come up the same as Fig. 4.10.
designations:
Channel Displays
CH 1 EEG
CH 40 alpha
CH 41 alpha RMS
 Note measurement box settings:
Channel Measurement
CH 1 Stddev
CH 40 Stddev
Fig 4.10
CH 41 Mean
CH 40 Freq The measurement boxes are above the marker region in the data window. Each
measurement has three sections: channel number, measurement type, and result.
The first two sections are pull-down menus that are activated when you click
them.
 Brief definition of measurements:
Stddev: standard deviation will be higher if there is a lot of activity and lower
if there is less. The advantage of the stddev measurement is that extreme
values or artifacts do not unduly influence the measurement.
Mean: displays the average value in the selected area.
Freq: converts the time segment of the selected area to frequency in cycles
per second
Note: The Freq measurement applies to all channels since it is calculated
from the horizontal time scale.
The “selected area” is the area selected by the I-beam tool (including endpoints).

Data Analysis continues…


Page 10 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

2. Set up your display window for optimal


viewing of the entire recording.
 The following tools help you adjust the data window:
Display menu: Autoscale horizontal Autoscale waveforms, Zoom Previous
Scroll Bars: Time (Horizontal); Amplitude (Vertical)
Cursor Tools: Zoom Tool
Buttons: Overlap, Split, Show Grid, Hide Grid
3. Use the I-Beam cursor to select the first Fig. 4.11 shows an example of the selected area. The first data segment begins at
data segment. the first append marker labeled “Relaxed with eyes closed.”

A
4. Repeat the measurements for each of
the data segments.

A

Fig. 4.11

5. Zoom in on a small section of the Be sure to zoom in far enough so that you can easily measure the frequency of
Segment 1 data. the alpha wave.
6. Use the I-Beam cursor to select an area Fig. 4.12 shows a sample setup for measuring the frequency in the alpha band
from one peak to the next in the alpha [CH 40].
band [CH 40].

B

Fig. 4.12

7. Save or print the data file.  You may save the data to another location, save notes that are in the journal,
8. Quit the program. or print the data file.
END OF DATA ANALYSIS

END OF LESSON 4
Complete the Lesson 4 Data Report that follows.
Lesson 4: EEG II Page 11

ELECTROENCEPHALOGRAPHY II
EEG II
DATA REPORT

Student’s Name:

Lab Section:

Date:

I. Data and Calculations


Subject Profile
Name Height

Age Gender: Male / Female Weight

Amplitudes
A. Complete Table 4.1 with the amplitudes of the recorded data in the control and experimental conditions. Calculate the
difference for the Alpha-RMS Mean between the Experimental Conditions and the Control, and then summarize whether the
Experimental Mean was larger (+), smaller (), or the same (=) as the Control Mean.
Table 4.1
EEG Alpha Alpha-RMS Alpha-RMS Alpha-RMS
Segment Condition Difference Summary
(Exp. - Control) (+, , =)

Eyes closed
1
(Control)

Mental arithmetic
2

Recovering from
3
hyperventilation
Eyes open
4

Frequency

B. What is the frequency of an alpha rhythm from Segment 1 data? = Hz


Does this agree with the expected values? Yes No

II. Questions
C. Refer to Table 4.1: When was the general amplitude of the EEG highest?

D. Refer to Table 4.1: When were the alpha wave levels highest?
Page 12 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

E. Refer to Table 4.1: How do your results compare with the information presented in the Introduction?

F. Did Subject need to concentrate during math problems? Yes No


How would the level of concentration required affect the data?

G. What might account for the amplitude difference of waves recorded from a subject tested alone, in a darkened room, and
subjects tested in a lab full of students?

H. Which conditions produced the lowest alpha activity?

End of Lesson 4 Report


Physiology Lessons Lesson 5
for use with the ELECTROCARDIOGRAPHY I
Biopac Student Lab Components of the ECG

Richard Pflanzer, Ph.D.


Associate Professor Emeritus
Indiana University School of Medicine
Purdue University School of Science

William McMullen
Vice President
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

BIOPAC® Systems, Inc.


42 Aero Camino, Goleta, CA 93117
(805) 685-0066, Fax (805) 685-0067
info@biopac.com
www.biopac.com

Manual Revision 3.7.6


09032009
 BIOPAC Systems, Inc.
Lesson 5: ECG I Page 5

II. EXPERIMENTAL OBJECTIVES


1) To become familiar with the electrocardiograph as a primary tool for evaluating electrical events within the heart.
2) To correlate electrical events as displayed on the ECG with the mechanical events that occur during the cardiac
cycle.
3) To observe rate and rhythm changes in the ECG associated with body position and breathing.

III. MATERIALS
 BIOPAC electrode lead set (SS2LA/L)
 BIOPAC disposable vinyl electrodes (EL503), 3 electrodes per subject
 BIOPAC electrode gel (GEL1) and abrasive pad (ELPAD) or Skin cleanser or alcohol prep
 Cot or lab table and pillow
 Biopac Student Lab System: software BSL 3.7.5 or above
data acquisition unit MP36, MP35, MP30 (Windows only), or MP45
 Computer System
IV. EXPERIMENTAL METHODS

 For further explanation, use the online support options under the Help Menu.
A. SETUP

FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION


1.
2.
Turn the computer ON.
 The desktop should appear on the monitor. If it does not appear, ask the
Make sure the BIOPAC MP3X unit is turned laboratory instructor for assistance.
OFF.
3. Plug the equipment in as follows: Plugs into Channel 1
Electrode lead (SS2LA/L)—CH 1
4. Turn ON the BIOPAC MP3X unit.

SS2LA/L Electrode Lead Set

Fig. 5.5 MP3X (top) and MP45 (bottom)0 equipment connections

5. Place three electrodes on Subject as shown


in Fig. 5.6.
 Place one electrode on the medial surface of each leg, just above the
ankle. Place the third electrode on the right anterior forearm at the wrist
(same side of arm as the palm of hand).
Note For optimal electrode adhesion, place electrodes on skin at least 5 minutes
before Calibration is started.

Setup continues…
Page 6 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

6. Attach the electrode lead set SS2LA/L to


the electrodes following Fig. 5.6.

Fig. 5.6 Lead II Setup

When the electrode leads are connected properly, the LEAD II electrode
configuration will be established. The electrode lead cables are each a different
color and the pinch connectors on the ends of the cables need to be attached to
a specific electrode. Follow Fig. 5.6 to ensure that each cable is connected to
the proper electrode.
The pinch connectors work like a small clothespin, but will only latch onto the
nipple of the electrode from one side of the connector.
7. Have Subject lie down and relax. Position the electrode cables such that they are not pulling on the electrodes.
Connect the electrode cable clip (where the cable meets the three individual
colored wires) to a convenient location (can be on Subject’s clothes). This
will relieve cable strain.
Subject should not be in contact with nearby metal objects (faucets, pipes,
etc.), and should remove any wrist or ankle bracelets.
8. Start the BIOPAC Student Lab program. 
9. Choose Lesson L05-ECG-I and click OK.
10. Type in your filename and click OK. Type in a unique identifier. Click OK to end the default setup.
11. Optional: Set Preferences. This lesson has optional Preferences for data and display while recording. Per
 Choose File > Preferences. your Lab Instructor’s guidelines, you may set:
 Select an option. Heart Rate Data: Calculate and display Heart Rate data – enabled by default
 Select the desired setting and click OK. We recommend that you leave Heart Rate data enabled. Heart Rate data
is derived by finding each R-R interval in the ECG channel and then
calculating the corresponding rate (in BPM).
Rate (BPM) = (60 sec./minute) / (R-R Interval -sec.)
Since Heart Rate data requires a full, preceding R-R interval, it is
always delayed from ECG data by one R-R Interval and the data is only
updated once per R-R interval.
Time scale: set horizontal time scale from 10-120 seconds
ECG filter: set bandwidth
Journal Text: show minimum guiding text vs. detailed text
Grids: show or hide gridlines
END OF SETUP Recording Length: allow from 30 seconds to 30 minutes of data
Lesson 5: ECG I Page 7

B. CALIBRATION

Calibration establishes the hardware’s internal parameters (such as gain, offset, and scaling) and is critical for optimum
performance. Pay close attention to the following calibration steps.
FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION
1. Double check electrode connections and Make sure the electrodes adhere securely to the skin. If they are being pulled up,
make sure Subject is supine, relaxed, and you will not get a good ECG signal.
still.
Subject must be relaxed and as still as possible during the Calibration. The
electrocardiograph is very sensitive to small changes in voltage caused by
contraction of skeletal muscles, and Subject’s arms and legs need to be relaxed
so that the muscle (EMG) signal does not corrupt the ECG signal.
2. Click Calibrate. The Calibrate button is in the upper left corner of the program window. This
will start the calibration recording, which will stop automatically after eight
seconds.
Subject needs to remain supine, relaxed, and still throughout calibration.
3. Check the calibration data: At the end of the 8-sec
calibration recording, there
 If similar, proceed to Data Recording. should be a recognizable ECG
 If different, Redo Calibration. waveform with no large
baseline drifts. If data
resembles Fig. 5.7 (with
allowance for any difference in
vertical scaling), proceed to the
Data Recording section.

Fig. 5.7

If data shows any large baseline drifts, check that electrodes are making good
END OF CALIBRATION contact, then click Redo Calibration and repeat the entire calibration sequence.

C. RECORDING LESSON DATA


FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION
1. Prepare for the recording and have Subject Four conditions will be recorded: Supine, Seated, Breathing deeply, and After
lie down and relax. exercise. Subject will perform tasks in the intervals between recordings.
In order to work efficiently, read this entire section so you will know what to do
for each recording segment. Subject should remain in a supine position and
continue to relax while you review the lesson.

Hints for obtaining optimal data: 


a) The electrocardiograph is very sensitive to small changes in voltage
caused by contraction of skeletal muscles. To minimize artifact:
 Subject’s arms and legs need to be relaxed so that the muscle
(EMG) signal does not corrupt the ECG signal.
 Subject should be as still as possible and should not talk or
laugh during any of the recording segments.
 Subject should be in a relaxed state for each recording segment
and in the position noted for each segment.
b) When asked to sit, Subject should sit with arms relaxed at side of body
and hands apart in lap, with legs flexed at knee and feet supported.
c) For Steps 5-6: Click Resume as soon as possible after Subject sits up in
order to capture the heart rate variation, but not while Subject is in the
process of sitting up or there will be excessive motion artifact.
Recording continues…
Page 8 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

Segment 1 — Supine
2. Click Record. When Record is clicked, the recording will begin and an append marker labeled
“Supine” will automatically be inserted.
3. Record for 20 seconds and then click Subject is supine for seconds 0-20. The recording should halt, giving you time
Suspend. to review the data and prepare for the next recording segment.
4. Review the data on the screen. If data looks similar
to Fig. 5.8, proceed
 If correct, go to Step 6.
to Step 5.

Fig. 5.8 Supine

 If different, click Redo The data might be different if:


a) The Suspend button was pressed prematurely.
b) An electrode peeled up, causing a large baseline drift, spike, or loss of
signal.
c) Subject has too much muscle (EMG) artifact.
In this case, click Redo and repeat Steps 2-4. Note that when Redo is clicked,
the data that was just recorded will be erased.
Segment 2 — Seated
5. Have Subject quickly get up and sit in a Subject should sit with arms relaxed at side of body and hands apart in lap, with
chair, with arms relaxed and feet legs flexed at knee and feet supported for seconds 21-40.
supported.
In order to capture the heart rate variation, it is important that you resume
recording as quickly as possible after Subject sits. However, it is also important
that you do not click Resume while Subject is in the process of sitting or you
will capture motion artifact.
6. Click Resume as soon as possible once When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append marker
Subject sits and relaxes. labeled “Seated” will be automatically inserted.
7. Record for 20 seconds and then click Subject remains seated, relaxed, and still while maintaining the original
Suspend. breathing rate.
The recording should halt, giving you time to review the data and prepare for
the next recording segment.
8. Review the data on the screen. If data looks similar
to Fig. 5.9, proceed
 If similar, go to Step 9.
to Step 9.

Fig. 5.9 Seated


Recording continues…
Lesson 5: ECG I Page 9

 If different, click Redo. The data would be different for the reasons in Step 4. If different, redo the
recording by clicking Redo and repeating Steps 5-8. Note that once you press
Redo, the data that was just recorded will be erased.
Segment 3—Deep Breathing
9. Click Resume. When Resume is clicked, the recording will continue and an append marker
labeled “Deep breathing” will be automatically inserted.
10. Subject remains seated and inhales and Subject remains seated, relaxed, and still.
exhales as completely as possible for five
After the recording begins, Subject should complete a series of five prolonged
prolonged (slow) breath cycles.
(slow), deep, breath cycles, inhaling fully and exhaling completely.
Recorder inserts event markers at a
Note It is important to breathe with long, slow, deep breaths
corresponding inhale and exhale.
to help minimize the EMG artifact.
 “start of inhale” — press F4 During this time, Recorder presses F4 at start of one inhale and F5 at start of
corresponding exhale to insert pre-labeled markers. These event markers will help
 “start of exhale” — press F5 you locate data to complete Table A in the Data Report.

 Labels can also be entered manually: press F9 on Windows or Esc on Mac;


labels can be added or edited after data is recorded.
11. Click Suspend after 5 breath cycles. The recording should halt, giving you time to prepare for the next recording
segment.
12. Review the data on the screen. If data looks similar
to Fig. 5.10, proceed
 If similar, go to Step 13.
to Step 13.

Fig. 5.10 Deep Breathing

 If different, click Redo. The data might be different for the reasons in Step 4.

Note The “Deep breathing” recording may have some baseline drift (as shown
previously in Fig. 5.10). Baseline drift is fairly normal and unless it is
excessive, it does not necessitate redoing the recording.

If incorrect, click Redo and repeat Steps 9-12. Note that when Redo is clicked,
the data that was just recorded will be erased.
Segment 4 — After exercise
13. Have Subject perform an exercise to Subject should perform an exercise to elevate his/her heart rate fairly rapidly,
elevate his/her heart rate. such as running up stairs, push-ups, or jumping-jacks.
Note You may remove the electrode cable pinch connectors so that Subject
can move about freely, but do not remove the electrodes.
If you do remove the cable pinch connectors, you must reattach them
following the precise color placement in Fig. 5.6 prior to clicking
Resume.
In order to capture the heart rate variation, it is important that you resume
recording as quickly as possible after Subject has performed the exercise.
However, it is also important that you do not click Resume while Subject is
Recording continues… exercising or you will capture motion artifact.
Page 10 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

14. Click Resume. When Resume is clicked, the recording will continue and an append marker
labeled “After exercise” will be automatically inserted.
15. Record for 60 seconds. Subject is seated in a relaxed state, recovering from exercise.
16. Click Suspend. The recording should halt.
17. Review the data on the screen. If data looks similar to Fig. 5.11, proceed to Step 18.
 If similar, go to Step 18.

Fig. 5.11 After Exercise

 If different; click Redo. The data would be incorrect for the reasons in Step 4.
Note The “After exercise” recording may have some baseline drift (as shown
in Fig. 5.11 above). Baseline drift is fairly normal and, unless excessive,
does not necessitate redoing the recording.
If incorrect, clicking Redo and repeating Steps 13-17. Note that once you press
Redo, the data that was just recorded will be erased.
18. Click Done. A dialog with options will be generated. Make your choice and continue as
directed. If choosing the “Record from another Subject” option:
19. Click Yes.
a) Attach electrodes per Setup Steps 5-7 and continue the entire lesson
from Setup Step 9.
b) Each person will need to use a unique file name.
20. Remove the electrodes. Remove the electrode cable pinch connectors. Peel off the electrodes and discard
the electrodes; BIOPAC electrodes are not reusable. Wash the electrode gel
residue from the skin, using soap and water. The electrodes may leave a slight
ring on the skin for a few hours. This is normal, and does not indicate that
END OF RECORDING anything is wrong.
Lesson 5: ECG I Page 11

V. DATA ANALYSIS

In this section, you will examine ECG components of cardiac cycles and measure amplitudes (mV) and durations (msecs) of the
ECG components.
Note: Interpreting ECGs is a skill that requires practice to distinguish between normal variation and those arising from medical
conditions. Do not be alarmed if your ECG is different than the normal values and references in the Introduction.
FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION
1. Enter the Review Saved Data mode.  Enter the Review Saved Data mode from Lessons menu.
 Note Channel Number (CH) The data window should come up the same as Fig. 5.12.
designation:
CH 1 ECG (Lead II)
CH 40 Heart Rate

 Note measurement box settings:


Channel Measurement
CH 40 Value
CH 1 Delta T
Fig 5.12
CH 1 P-P
The measurement boxes are above the marker region in the data window. Each
CH 1 BPM measurement has three sections: channel number, measurement type, and result.
The first two sections are pull-down menus that are activated when you click
them.

 Brief definition of measurements:


Value: Used to measure BPM, the value measurement displays the amplitude
value for the active channel at the point selected by the I-beam cursor.
 CH 40 heart rate data is only updated at the end of an R-R interval so it
remains constant within an R-R interval; therefore, the Value (BPM)
measurement will be accurate from any selected point in the R-R interval.
 Value can also be determined by using the Arrow tool while holding
down the left mouse button.
Delta T: Used to measure duration, this is the difference in time between the
beginning and end points of the selected area.
P-P (peak-to-peak): Used to measure amplitudes, this finds the maximum value
in the selected area and subtracts the minimum value in the selected area.
BPM: Use only if CH 40 was not recorded. The Beats Per Minute
measurement first calculates the difference in time between the beginning and
end of the selected area (seconds/beat), and divides this value into 60
seconds/minute.
The “selected area” is the area selected by the I-beam tool (including endpoints).

Data Analysis continues…


Page 12 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

2. Set up your display window for optimal


viewing of three complete cardiac cycles
from Segment 1.

Fig. 5.13 Sample data from Segment 1

The following tools help you adjust the data window: 


Display menu: Autoscale horizontal Autoscale waveforms, Zoom Previous
Scroll Bars: Time (Horizontal); Amplitude (Vertical)
Cursor Tools: Zoom Tool
Buttons: Overlap, Split, Adjust Baseline (Up, Down), Show Grid, Hide Grid

The Heart Rate plot


needs two cycles to
“catch up” to the
ECG plot because
heart rate is
calculated with ECG
data.

Fig. 5.14 Overlap sample: Heart Rate and ECG after supine Subject is seated

Adjust Baseline allows you to position the waveform up or down in small


increments so that the baseline (isoelectric line) can be exactly zero. After Adjust
Baseline is pressed, Up and Down buttons are generated. Simply click these to
move the waveform up or down. This is not needed to get accurate amplitude
measurements, but may be desired before making a printout, or when using grids.

Data Analysis continues…


Lesson 5: ECG I Page 13

3. For measuring heart rate, use the cursor to Note that the CH 40 Value measurement displays the BPM for the interval
select any data point within an R-R preceding the current R-R interval.
interval.
If CH 40 Heart Rate data was not recorded, use CH 1 BPM to determine the heart
A rate; select from R wave peak to R wave peak as precisely as possible.
Follow the examples shown above to complete all the measurements required for
the Data Report
4. Take measurements within two other R-R
intervals in the current segment.

A
5. Repeat measurements on the other
segments as required for the Data Report.

A

Fig. 5.15 Data point selection for Heart Rate data correlated to ECG data

6. Hide CH 40. The remaining measurements use ECG data only. To hide Heart Rate data display
and focus on ECG data, Ctrl-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac) the “40”
7. Zoom in on a single cardiac cycle from
channel number box.
Segment 1.
For Ventricular Systole and Diastole measurements, the T wave reference point
8. Measure Ventricular Systole and Diastole.
for the selected area is 1/3 of the way down the descending portion of the T wave;
B if necessary, see Fig. 5.2 and Table 5.1 in the Introduction for selected area
details.
9. Repeat measurements for Segment 4. Segment 4 starts at the marker labeled “After exercise.”

B
10. Zoom in on a single cardiac cycle Be sure to stay in the first recorded segment when you select the cardiac cycle.
from Segment 1.
11. Use the I-Beam cursor to select segments Select the components of the ECG as specified in the table and gather data for 3
to measure the durations and amplitudes cycles; if necessary, see Fig. 5.2 and Table 5.1 in the Introduction for selected
required for the Data Report. area details. To paste measurements into the Journal, choose Edit > Journal >
Paste measurement.
C

Fig. 5.17 sample selection for measuring P wave duration (Delta T) and amplitude (P-P)

Data Analysis continues…


Page 14 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

Fig. 5.18 sample selection for measuring P-R Interval duration (Delta T).

12. Zoom in on a single cardiac cycle Follow the examples shown above to complete all the measurements required for
from Segment 4. your Data Report.
13. Repeat duration measurements using
segment 4 data as required for the Data
Report.

C
14. Save or print the data file. You may save the data to a drive, save notes that are in the journal, or print the
data file.
15. Exit the program.
END OF DATA ANALYSIS

END OF LESSON 5
Complete the Lesson 5 Data Report that follows.
Lesson 5: ECG I Page 15

ELECTROCARDIOGRAPHY I
ECG I

DATA REPORT
Student’s Name:
Lab Section:
Date:
I. Data and Calculations
Subject Profile
Name Height

Age Gender: Male / Female Weight

A: Heart Rate
Complete the following tables with the lesson data indicated, and calculate the Mean as appropriate;
Table 5.3
Cardiac Cycle Mean  If CH 40 was not recorded,
Segment: Condition
1 2 3 (calculate) use .

1: Supine
2: Seated
3: Start of inhale
3: Start of exhale
4: After exercise

B: Ventricular Systole and Diastole


Table 5.4
Duration (ms)
Segment: Condition
Ventricular Systole Ventricular Diastole
1: Supine
4: After exercise
Page 16 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

C: Components of the ECG


Table 5.5
Duration (ms) Amplitude (mV)
Normative
ECG Values
Component Based on resting Segment 1 Cycle Seg 1 Seg Segment 1 Cycle Seg 1
heart rate 75 BPM Mean 4 One Mean
1 2 3 (calc.) cycle 1 2 3 (calc.)

Waves Dur. (sec) Amp. (mV)

P .07 - .18 < .20

QRS Complex .06 - .12 .10 – 1.5

T .10 - .25 < .5

Intervals Duration (seconds)

P-R .12 - .20

Q-T .32 - .36

R-R .80

Segments Duration (seconds)

P-R .02 - .10

S-T < .20

T-P 0 - .40

Note Interpreting ECGs is a skill that requires practice to distinguish between normal variation and those arising
from medical conditions. Do not be alarmed if your ECG does not match the “normal values” and references
above and in the Introduction.

II. Questions
A. Using data from table 5.3:
1) Explain the changes in heart rate between conditions. Describe the physiological mechanisms causing these
changes.

2) Are there differences in the cardiac cycle with the respiratory cycle (segment 3 data)?

B. Using data from table 5.4:


1) What changes occurred in the duration of systole and diastole between resting and post-exercise?
Lesson 5: ECG I Page 17

C. Using data from table 5.5:


1) Compared to the resting state, do the durations of the ECG intervals and segments decrease during exercise?
Explain

2) Compare your ECG data to the normative values. Explain any differences.

3) Compare ECG data with other groups in your laboratory. Do their data differ? Explain why this may not be
unusual.

D. In order to beat, the heart needs three types of cells. Describe the cells and their function.
1) ____________________________________________________________________
2) ____________________________________________________________________
3) ____________________________________________________________________
E. List in proper sequence, starting with the normal pacemaker, elements of the cardiac pacemaker system.
1) _________________________
2) _________________________
3) _________________________
4) _________________________
5) _________________________
6) _________________________
7) _________________________
8) _________________________
F. Describe three cardiac effects of increased sympathetic activity, and of increased parasympathetic activity.
Sympathetic

Parasympathetic

G. In the normal cardiac cycle, the atria contract before the ventricles. Where is this fact represented in the ECG?

H. What is meant by “AV delay” and what purpose does the delay serve?

I. What is the isoelectric line of the ECG?

J. Which components of the ECG are normally measured along the isoelectric line?

End of Lesson 5 Data Report


Physiology Lessons Lesson 6
for use with the ELECTROCARDIOGRAPHY II
Biopac Student Lab Bipolar Leads (Leads I, II, III)
Einthoven’s Law
Mean Electrical Axis on the Frontal Plane

Richard Pflanzer, Ph.D.


Associate Professor Emeritus
Indiana University School of Medicine
Purdue University School of Science

William McMullen
Vice President
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

- Lead I +
- -
Le
Le

ad
ad

III
II

+ +

RA LA

LL
BIOPAC® Systems, Inc.
42 Aero Camino, Goleta, CA 93117
(805) 685-0066, Fax (805) 685-0067
info@biopac.com
www.biopac.com

Manual Revision 3.7.6


09032009
 BIOPAC Systems, Inc.
Lesson 6: ECG II Page 5

II. EXPERIMENTAL OBJECTIVES


1) Record ECG from Leads I and III in the following conditions: supine, seated, and breathing deeply while seated.
2) Compare the displayed calculated ECG Lead II to recorded ECG Leads I and III, and use the R wave amplitudes to
confirm Einthoven’s Law.
3) Approximate the mean electrical axis of the ventricles on the frontal plane using vectors derived from the amplitude and
polarity of the QRS complex in ECG Leads I and III.
4) Approximate the mean electrical potential of the ventricles on the frontal plane using the resultant vector derived from
the vectors of Leads I and III.

III. MATERIALS
 BIOPAC electrode lead set x 2 (SS2LA/L)
 BIOPAC disposable vinyl electrodes (EL503), 6 electrodes per subject
 BIOPAC electrode gel (GEL1) and abrasive pad (ELPAD) or Skin cleanser or alcohol prep
 Cot or lab table and pillow
 Protractor
 Two different colored pens/pencils
 Biopac Student Lab System: software BSL 3.7.5 or above
data acquisition unit MP36, MP35, MP30 (Windows only), or MP45
 Computer System

IV. EXPERIMENTAL METHODS


 For further explanation, use the online support options under the Help Menu.
A. SETUP
FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION
1. Turn the computer ON.  The desktop should appear on the monitor. If it does not appear, ask
2. Make sure the BIOPAC MP3X unit is turned the laboratory instructor for assistance.
OFF.
3. Plug the equipment in as follows:
Electrode lead (SS2LA/L)—CH 1
Electrode lead (SS2LA/L)—CH 2
4. Turn the MP3X Data Acquisition Unit ON.

Setup continues… Fig. 6.5 MP3X (top) and MP45 (bottom) equipment connections
Page 6 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
5. Place six electrodes on Subject, as shown
Place six electrodes as shown in Fig. 6.6:
in Fig. 6.6.
- two electrodes on right leg, just above ankle bone
- one electrode on left leg, just above ankle bone
- two electrodes on left wrist (same side of arm as palm of hand)
- one electrode on right wrist (same side of arm as palm of hand)

1 above 2 above
right wrist left wrist

2 above 1 above
right ankle left ankle

Fig. 6.6 Electrode Placement
Note For optimal electrode adhesion, electrodes should be placed on skin
at least 5 minutes before Calibration is started.
6. Attach the first electrode lead set Each of the pinch connectors on the end of the electrode cable needs to be
(SS2LA/L) from Channel 1 to the attached to a specific electrode. The electrode cables are each a different
electrodes, following LEAD I in Fig. 6.7. color, and you should follow Fig. 6.7 to ensure that you connect each
cable to the proper electrode.
7. Attach the second electrode lead set
(SS2LA/L) from Channel 2 to the When the electrode cable is connected properly, the LEAD I and LEAD
electrodes, following LEAD III in Fig. 6.7. III electrode configurations will be established.

- Lead I +
-

Le
ad
III
+

right forearm left forearm left forearm


WHITE lead RED lead WHITE lead

right leg right leg left leg


BLACK lead BLACK lead RED lead
(Ground) (Ground)

Fig. 6.7 Electrode lead connections: Lead I and Lead III

Note: On the right ankle and on the left wrist, Lead I should go to the
upper of the two electrodes and Lead III should go to the lower of the two
electrodes.
The pinch connectors work like a small clothespin, but will only latch
onto the nipple of the electrode from one side of the connector.
8. Have Subject lie down and relax. Position the electrode cables such that they are not pulling on the
electrodes. Connect the electrode cable clip (where the cable meets the
three individual colored wires) to a convenient location (can be on
Subject’s clothes). This will relieve cable strain.
Subject should not be in contact with nearby metal objects (faucets,
pipes, etc.) and should remove any wrist or ankle bracelets.

Setup continues…
Lesson 6: ECG II Page 7
9. Start the BIOPAC Student Lab program. 
10. Choose Lesson 6 (L06-ECG-II) and click
OK.
11. Type in your filename and click OK.  Use a unique identifier. Click OK to end the default setup.
12. Optional: Set Preferences. This lesson has optional Preferences for data and display while recording.
Per your Lab Instructor’s guidelines, you may set:
 Choose File > Preferences. Heart Rate Data: Calculate and display Heart Rate data
 Select an option. Time scale: set horizontal time scale from 10-120 seconds
 Select the desired setting and click OK. ECG filter: set bandwidth
Journal Text: show minimum guiding text vs. detailed text
END OF SETUP Grids: show or hide gridlines
Recording Length: allow from 30 seconds to 30 minutes of data

B. CALIBRATION
Calibration establishes the hardware’s internal parameters (such as gain, offset, and scaling) and is critical for optimum
performance. Pay close attention to Calibration.

FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION


1. Double check the electrodes, and make Make sure the electrodes adhere securely to the skin. If they are being pulled
sure Subject is supine, relaxed, and still. up, you will not get a good ECG signal.
Subject must be relaxed during calibration. Subject’s arms and legs need to
be relaxed so that the muscle (EMG) signal does not corrupt the ECG signal.
2. Click Calibrate. The Calibrate button is in the upper left corner of the Setup window. This
will start the calibration recording, which will stop automatically after eight
seconds.
Subject needs to remain relaxed throughout calibration.
3. Check the calibration data. At the end of the 8-sec calibration recording, there should be a recognizable
ECG waveform with no large baseline drifts.

 If similar, proceed to Data


Recording.

 If different, Redo Calibration.

Fig. 6.8

If data resembles Fig. 6.8 (with allowance for any difference in vertical
scaling), proceed to the Data Recording section.
If data shows any large baseline drifts, check that electrodes are making good
contact and click Redo Calibration, then repeat the entire calibration
END CALIBRATION sequence.
Page 8 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
C. RECORDING LESSON DATA

FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION


1. Prepare for the recording. You will record two segments, one with Subject supine and another with
Subject seated. In order to work efficiently, read this entire section so you will
know what to do before recording.
Hints for obtaining optimal data
To minimize muscle (EMG) corruption of the ECG signal and baseline drift:
a) Subject should not talk or laugh during any of the recording segments.
b) When supine or seated, Subject should be completely relaxed.
c) When seated, Subject should sit with arms relaxed at side of body and
hands apart in lap, with legs flexed at knee and feet supported.
d) The recording should be suspended before Subject prepares for the next
recording segment.
e) Subject should breathe normally during the recording to minimize EMG
from the chest area.
f) Make sure electrodes do not “peel up.”
Segment 1— Supine
2. Click Record. When you click Record, the recording will begin and an append marker labeled
“Supine” will automatically be inserted.
3. Record for 30 seconds (Segment 1). Subject should be supine, relaxed, and still.
4. Click Suspend. When you click Suspend, the recording should halt, giving you time to review
the data.
5. Review the data on the screen. If data looks similar to Fig. 6.9, proceed to Step 6.
 If correct, go to Step 6.

Fig. 6.9 Segment 1 (Supine)

 If incorrect, click Redo. The data would be incorrect if:


a) The Suspend button was pressed prematurely
b) An electrode peeled up, giving a large baseline drift
c) Subject has too much muscle (EMG) artifact
Note: A little baseline drift when Subject breathes in and out is normal and
does not indicate incorrect data.
Click Redo and repeat Steps 2-5. Note that when Redo is clicked, the data that
was just recorded will be erased.

Recording continues…
Lesson 6: ECG II Page 9

Segment 2— Seated
6. Have Subject quickly get up and sit in Subject should sit with arms relaxed at side of body and hands apart in lap, with
a chair, with arms relaxed and feet legs flexed at knee and feet supported.
supported.
In order to capture the heart rate variation, it is important that you resume
recording as quickly as possible after Subject sits. However, it is also important
that you do not click Resume while Subject is in the process of sitting or you
will capture motion artifact.
7. Click Resume as soon as possible after When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append marker
Subject is seated. labeled “Seated” will be automatically inserted.
8. After 10 seconds of recording, Subject After about 10 seconds of recording, the Director should instruct Subject to
should breathe in and out once such breathe in and out once such that the inhale and exhale are audible.
that the breath is audible and the
Note: Subject should not breathe in too deeply as that will cause excessive
Recorder should insert event
EMG or baseline drift.
markers:
a) F4 at beginning of inhale. To insert pre-labeled Event Markers, press F4 (inhale) and then F5 (exhale).
 “start of inhale”
 Labels can also be entered manually (F9 on Windows, Esc on Mac) or
b) F5 at beginning of exhale. edited after data is recorded.
 “start of exhale”
The recording should run for about 30 seconds total.
9. Click Suspend. The recording should halt, allowing you to review the data.
10. Review the data on the screen. If data looks similar to Fig. 6.10, proceed to Step 11.
 If similar, go to Step 11.

Fig. 6.10 Segment 2 (Seated)

 If different, Redo. The data would be different if:


a) The Suspend button was pressed prematurely.
b) An electrode peeled up, giving a large baseline drift.
c) Subject has too much muscle (EMG) artifact.
Note A little baseline drift when Subject breathes in and out is normal and
does not indicate incorrect data.
If different, click Redo and repeat Steps 7-11. Note that once you press Redo,
the data that was just recorded will be erased.
11. Click Done. After you press Done, a dialog with options will be generated. Make your
choice and continue as directed.
12. Click Yes.
If choosing the “Record from another Subject” option:
a) Attach electrodes per Setup Step 6 and continue the entire lesson from
Setup Step 11.
b) Each person will need to use a unique file name.
13. Remove the electrodes. Disconnect the lead cables. Peel off and discard the electrodes (BIOPAC
electrodes are not reusable). Wash the electrode gel residue from your skin
using soap and water. The electrodes may leave a slight ring on the skin for a
END RECORDING few hours, which is quite normal.
Page 10 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
V. DATA ANALYSIS
FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION
1. Enter the Review Saved Data mode.  Enter the Review Saved Data mode.
 Note Channel Number (CH)
Note: After Done was pressed in the final recording section, the program
designations: used Einthoven’s Law to automatically calculate Lead II from Leads I and III
Channel Displays and added a channel for Lead II to the initial two channel recording, which is
why three channels are displayed in Review Saved Data mode (Fig. 6.11).
CH 1 Lead I
CH 2 Lead III
CH 40 Lead II (calculated)
 Note measurement box settings:
Channel Measurement
CH 1 Delta
CH 2 Delta
CH40 Delta

Fig. 6.11

 The measurement boxes are above the marker region in the data window.
Each measurement has three sections: channel number, measurement type, and
result. The first two sections are pull-down menus that are activated when you
click them.
Delta: Computes the difference in amplitude between the first point and the
last point of the selected area. It is particularly useful for taking ECG
measurements, because the baseline does not have to be at zero to obtain
accurate, quick measurements.
2. Set up the display window for optimal The following tools help you adjust the data window: 
viewing of the first data segment.
Display menu: Autoscale horizontal Autoscale waveforms, Zoom Previous
Scroll Bars: Time (Horizontal); Amplitude (Vertical)
Cursor Tools: Zoom Tool
Buttons: Overlap, Split, Show Grid, Hide Grid
The first data segment is the area from the append marker “Supine” at Time 0
to the next append marker. The data window should resemble Fig. 6.12.

Data Analysis continues… Fig. 6.12


Lesson 6: ECG II Page 11

3. Zoom in to select two consecutive The “Supine” segment begins at the first append marker, and represents the time
“clean” cardiac cycles in the “Supine” when Subject was supine, breathing normally, in a relaxed state. Zoom in to so
segment. that there are two “clean” cardiac cycles displayed. A clean cardiac cycle has low
noise and the ECG components are easy to discern (Fig. 6.13).
4. Place an event marker above the
second R-wave to indicate which
cardiac cycle will be used for
measurements.

Fig. 6.13
Insert the event marker directly above the R wave of the second cardiac cycle in
the display.
To place an event marker, click the cursor in the event marker region under the
marker label bar (above the top data channel). An inverted triangle should appear
which, when selected, will be the color yellow.
Type “Reference 1” to label the marker.
5. Use the I-Beam cursor to select the Start at the midpoint between the T-wave of cardiac cycle 1 (left) and the P-
area from the midpoint between the wave of cardiac cycle 2. Press and hold the mouse and sweep the cursor to the
cycles (baseline) and the R-wave of the right until the end of the selected area is at peak of the desired wave—monitor
second cycle and complete “Supine” the Delta measurement to determine when the actual peak is reached; small
segments in the data report. movements to the right or left may be necessary.

 A, B

Fig. 6.14

Note R-waves may be inverted on some of the leads (Fig. 6.15); include the
polarity of the Delta result in the Data Report tables.

Data Analysis continues…


Page 12 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

Fig. 6.15 Inverted R-wave on Lead II and Lead III

6. Scroll to the “Seated” segment and Use the append markers to find the proper data segment and then use the display
select two consecutive cardiac cycles as tools to adjust the data window if necessary. Do not use a section between the
described in Step 5. “start of inhale” and “start of exhale” event markers.

B Note All remaining measurements are taken on Lead I and Lead III only so you
may choose to hide Lead II (CH 40). “Ctrl+click” (Windows) or
“Option+click” (Mac) the channel number box to toggle between hiding
and showing channel data.
7. Scroll to the “start of inhale” section Use the event markers to find the proper data section and use the display tools to
and select two consecutive cardiac adjust the data window if necessary.
cycles as described in Step 5.
B
8. Scroll to the “start of exhale” section Use the event markers to find the proper data section and use the display tools to
and select two consecutive cardiac adjust the data window if necessary.
cycles as described in Step 5.
B
9. Go back to the “Reference 1” marker This is the same cardiac cycle event marked inserted in Step 4.
created in Step 4.
 Use the marker tools to move to different markers.
10. Measure the waves of the QRS To measure a wave, select the area from the baseline (Isoelectric Line) to the
complex and record the amplitudes for peak of the wave.
Lead I and Lead III.

C

Fig. 6.16 Sample measurement of the Q wave

Data Analysis continues…


Lesson 6: ECG II Page 13

Fig. 6.17 Sample measurement of the R wave

Fig. 6.18 Sample measurement of the S wave

11. Save or print the data file.  You may save the data to a drive, save notes that are in the journal, or
12. Exit the program. print the data file.
END OF DATA ANALYSIS

END OF LESSON 6
Complete the Lesson 6 Data Report that follows.
Page 14 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
Lesson 6: ECG II Page 15

ELECTROCARDIOGRAPHY II
Bipolar Leads (Leads I, II, III), Einthoven’s Law, and
Mean Electrical Axis on the Frontal Plane

DATA REPORT
Student’s Name:
Lab Section:
Date:

Subject Profile
Name Height

Age Gender: Male / Female Weight

I. Data and Plots


A. Einthoven’s Law—Simulated Confirmation: Lead I + Lead III = Lead II
Table 6.1 Supine

Same Single Note The software automatically computes and then displays
Lead mV
Cardiac Cycle Lead II values. Actual confirmation of Einthoven’s law
Lead I + or - requires all three bipolar limb leads to be simultaneously
recorded.
Lead III + or -
SUM + or - Include the polarity (+ or -) of the Delta result since
Lead II + or - R-waves may be inverted on some of the leads.

B. Mean Electrical Axis of the Ventricles (QRS Axis) and Mean Ventricular Potential—Graphical Estimate
Use Table 6.2 to record measurements from the Data Analysis section:
Table 6.2
QRS
CONDITION Lead I Lead III

Supine
Seated
Start of inhale
Start of exhale
Page 16 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

One way to approximate the mean electrical axis in the frontal plane is to plot the magnitude of the R wave from Lead I and
Lead III, as shown in the Introduction (Fig. 6.4).
1. Draw a perpendicular line from the ends of the vectors (right angles to the axis of the Lead) using a
protractor or right angle guide.
2. Determine the point of intersection of these two perpendicular lines.
3. Draw a new vector from point 0,0 to the point of intersection.
The direction of this resulting vector approximates the mean electrical axis (QRS Axis) of the ventricles. The length of this
vector approximates the mean ventricular potential.
Create two plots on each of the following graphs, using data from Table 6.2. Use a different color pencil or pen for each plot.
Graph 1: Supine and Seated

From the above graph, find the following values:


Condition Mean Ventricular Potential Mean Ventricular (QRS) Axis
Supine
Seated

Explain the difference (if any) in Mean Ventricular Potential and Axis under the two conditions:
Lesson 6: ECG II Page 17

Graph 2: Inhale /Exhale

From the above graph, find the following values:


Condition Mean Ventricular Potential Mean Ventricular (QRS) Axis
Start of inhale
Start of exhale

Explain the difference (if any) in Mean Ventricular Potential and Axis under the two conditions:
Page 18 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

C. Mean Electrical Axis of the Ventricles (QRS Axis) and Mean Ventricular Potential—More Accurate Approximation
Use Table 6.3 to add the Q, R, and S potentials to obtain net potentials for Segment 1—Supine.
Table 6.3
QRS
POTENTIAL
Lead I Lead III
Q
R
S
QRS Net

Graph 3: Supine

From the above graph, find the following values:


Condition Mean Ventricular Potential Mean Ventricular (QRS) Axis
Supine

Explain the difference in Mean Ventricular Potential and Axis for the Supine data in this plot (Graph 3) and the first plot
(Graph 1).
Lesson 6: ECG II Page 19

II. Questions
D. Define ECG.

E. Define Einthoven’s Law.

F. Define Einthoven’s Triangle.

G. What normal factors effect a change the orientation of the Mean Ventricular (QRS) Axis?

H. Define Left Axis Deviation (LAD) and its causes.

I. Define Right Axis Deviation (RAD) and its causes.

J. What factors affect the amplitude of the R wave recorded on the different leads?

End of Lesson 6 Data Report


Physiology Lessons Lesson 7
for use with the
Biopac Student Lab ECG & PULSE
Mechanical Action of the Heart
Peripheral Pressure Pulse
Plethysmography

Richard Pflanzer, Ph.D.


Associate Professor
Indiana University School of Medicine
Purdue University School of Science

J.C. Uyehara, Ph.D.


Biologist
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

William McMullen
Vice President
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

BIOPAC Systems, Inc.


42 Aero Camino, Goleta, CA 93117
(805) 685-0066, Fax (805) 685-0067
info@biopac.com
www.biopac.com

Manual Revision 3.7.6


09092009
 BIOPAC Systems, Inc.
Lesson 7: ECG & Pulse Page 3

II. EXPERIMENTAL OBJECTIVES


1) To become familiar with the principle of plethysmography and its usefulness in qualitatively assessing peripheral
changes in blood volume.
2) To observe and record changes in peripheral blood volume and pressure pulse under a variety of both experimental and
physiological conditions.
3) To determine the approximate speed of the pressure pulse wave travelling between the heart and the finger.
4) To illustrate the electrical activity associated with normal cardiac activity and how it relates to the flow of blood
throughout the body.

III. MATERIALS
 BIOPAC electrode lead set (SS2LA/L)
 BIOPAC disposable vinyl electrodes (EL503), three electrodes per subject
 BIOPAC pulse plethysmograph (SS4LA or SS4L)
 Ruler or Measuring Tape
 Ice water or warm water in plastic bucket
 BIOPAC electrode gel (GEL1) and abrasive pad (ELPAD) or skin cleanser or alcohol prep
 Biopac Student Lab System: software BSL 3.7.3 or above
data acquisition unit MP36, MP35, or MP30 (Windows only)
 Computer System

IV. EXPERIMENTAL METHODS


 For further explanation, use the online support options under the Help Menu.
A. SET UP
FAST TRACK Set Up DETAILED EXPLANATION OF SET UP STEPS
1. Turn the computer ON.  The desktop should appear on the monitor. If it does not appear,
2. Make sure the BIOPAC MP3X unit is ask the laboratory instructor for assistance.
turned OFF. 
3. Plug the equipment in as follows:
Electrode lead (SS2LA/L) — CH 1
Electrode Lead Set
Pulse transducer (SS4LA) or Pulse Transducer
(SS2LA/L) plugs
Pulse transducer (SS4L) — CH 2 into Channel 1 (SS4LA or SS4L)
plugs into Channel 2
4. Turn the MP3X Data Acquisition Unit Fig. 7.2
ON.

Fig. 7.2

Setup continues…
Page 4 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

5. Place three electrodes on the Subject one on right forearm


(Fig. 7.3) (just above wrist)

one on inside right leg


(just above ankle bone)

one on inside left leg


(just above ankle bone)
Fig. 7.3
- One electrode on the medial surface of the right leg, just above the
ankle bone
- One electrode on the medial surface of the left leg, just above the
ankle bone
- One electrode on the right anterior forearm just above the wrist
(same side of arm as the palm of hand).
 Note: For optimal electrode adhesion, the electrodes should be
placed on the skin at least 5 minutes before the start of the Calibration
procedure.
6. Attach the first electrode lead set
(SS2LA/L) to the electrodes, following
the color code (Fig. 7.4). right forearm
WHITE lead

right leg left leg


BLACK lead RED lead
(ground)

Fig. 7.4
Each of the pinch connectors on the end of the electrode cable needs
to be attached to a specific electrode. The electrode cables are each a
different color. Follow Fig. 7.4 to ensure that you connect each cable
to the proper electrode.
The pinch connectors work like a small clothespin, but will only latch
onto the nipple of the electrode from one side of the connector.
When the electrode cable is connected properly, the LEAD II
electrode configuration will be established.
7. Clean the window of the sensor. It is a good idea to clean the window of the SS4LlA/L sensor before
each use. This will prevent any oil or dirt on the window from
interfering with the signal. Use a soft cloth or other non-abrasive
material to wipe it clean.

Setup continues…
Lesson 7: ECG & Pulse Page 5

8. Wrap the pulse transducer (SS4L) around On the hand of the right arm with electrode positioned in Steps 5 and
the tip of your index finger (Fig. 7.5) on 6, position the transducer so that the sensor is on the bottom of your
the right hand with the electrode/lead fingertip (the part without the fingernail). Wrap the Velcro tape
attached. around your finger so the transducer fits snugly, but not so that blood
circulation is cut off—it’s a fine line between tight and too tight.

Sensor attaches to
bottom of fingertip

Velcro strap
wraps around
finger

Fig. 7.5 Figure demonstrates sensor position only — attach to


the hand used for electrode/lead placement
9. Have the Subject sit down with forearms Position the electrode cables such that they are not pulling on the
supported and relax. electrodes or the transducer.
Connect the electrode cable clip (where the cable meets the three
individual colored wires) to a convenient location (can be on the
Subject’s clothes). This will relieve cable strain.
The Subject should not be in contact with nearby metal objects
(faucets, pipes, etc.), and should remove any wrist or ankle bracelets.
10. Start the Biopac Student Lab Program. 
11. Choose lesson “L07” and click OK. Lesson L07 is ECG & Pulse.
12. Type in your filename.  Use a unique identifier.
13. Click OK. This ends default Setup.
END OF SET UP

B. CALIBRATION

The Calibration procedure establishes the hardware’s internal parameters (such as gain, offset, and scaling) and is
critical for optimum performance. Pay close attention to the Calibration procedure.

FAST TRACK Calibration DETAILED EXPLANATION OF CALIBRATION STEPS


1. Double check the electrodes, and make Make sure the electrodes adhere securely to the skin. If they are being pulled
sure the Subject is relaxed. up, you will not get a good ECG signal.
The Subject must be relaxed during the Calibration procedure. The Subject’s
arms and legs need to be relaxed so that the muscle (EMG) signal does not
corrupt the ECG signal.
2. Click Calibrate. The Calibrate button is in the upper left corner of the Setup window. This will
start the calibration recording.
The Subject needs to remain relaxed throughout Calibration.
3. Wait for the calibration procedure to stop. The calibration procedure will stop automatically after 8 seconds.
Calibration continues…
Page 6 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

4. Check the calibration data: At the end of the 8-sec calibration recording, the screen should resemble Fig.
7.6.

 If similar, proceed to Data Recording.

 If different, Redo Calibration.

Fig. 7.6

There should be a greatly reduced ECG waveform with a relatively flat baseline
in the upper band. There should be wavelike forms in the pulse band. If your
data resembles Fig. 7.6, proceed to the Data Recording section.
If the data shows any large spikes, jitter, or large baseline drifts, or if you have
a flat line instead of a clear signal on the pulse channel, then you should redo
the calibration by clicking Redo Calibration and repeating the entire
END OF CALIBRATION calibration sequence.

C. RECORDING LESSON DATA


FAST TRACK Recording DETAILED EXPLANATION OF RECORDING STEPS
1. Prepare for the recording and have the You will record ECG on one channel and indirect pulse pressure on another
Subject sit down in a chair and relax, with channel with the Subject in three conditions: Arm relaxed, Temperature
arms on the armrests. change, and Arm up. The Subject will perform tasks in the intervals between
recordings.
In order to work efficiently, read this entire section so you will know what to
do for each recording segment.
The Subject should remain in a seated position and continue to relax while you
review the lesson.
Hints for obtaining optimal data:
To minimize muscle (EMG) corruption of the ECG signal and baseline drift:
a) The Subject should keep still during all of the recording segments
because the recording from the pulse transducer is sensitive to motion
and the ECG recording is sensitive to EMG artifact.
b) The Subject should be in a relaxed state for each recording segment.
c) Initially, the Subject’s forearms should be supported on armrests.
d) After the Subject has repositioned his/her forearm, check to make
sure that the cable is not pulling on the pulse transducer.
e) The recording should be suspended before the Subject prepares for
the next recording segment.
f) Make sure electrodes do not “peel up.”

Recording continues…
Lesson 7: ECG & Pulse Page 7

Segment 1
2. Click Record. When you click Record, the recording will begin and an append marker
labeled “Seated and relaxed” will automatically be inserted.
3. Record for 15 seconds. Subject is seated in chair, with arms relaxed on the armrests (seconds 0-15).
4. Click Suspend. The recording should halt, giving you time to review the data and prepare for
the next recording segment.
5. Review the data on the screen. If data is similar to Fig. 7.7, proceed to Step 6.
 If similar, go to Step 6.

Fig. 7.7 End of Segment 1, Arm relaxed

 If different, click Redo. The data would be incorrect if:


a) The Suspend button was pressed prematurely.
b) An electrode peeled up causing a large baseline drift, spike, or loss of
signal.
c) The Subject has too much muscle (EMG) artifact.
If incorrect, redo the recording by clicking Redo and repeating Steps 2-5. Note
that once you press Redo, the data you have just recorded will be erased.
Segment 2
6. Subject remains seated and sticks the left, Warm water should be approximately 40° C, cold water approximately 20° C.
non-recording hand in a plastic bucket filled
with warm or cold water.
WARNING

The container for the water must not


be metal, as this poses the potential
danger of bypassing the electrical
isolation of the MP unit.

7. Click Resume. When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append marker
labeled “Seated, one hand in water” will be automatically inserted.
8. Record for 30 seconds. Subject remains sitting with hand in water (seconds 16-45).
9. Click Suspend. The recording should halt, giving you time to review the data and prepare for
the next recording segment.
10. Review the data on the screen. If data is similar to Fig. 7.8, proceed to Step 11.
 If correct, and more segments are
required, go to Step 11.

Recording continues… Fig. 7.8 End of Segment 2, One hand in water


Page 8 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

 If incorrect, click Redo. The data might be incorrect for the reasons in Step 5.
If different, click Redo and redo the recording by repeating Steps 6-10. Note
that once you press Redo, the data you have just recorded will be erased.
Segment 3
11. Subject remains seated, raises the right Subject’s right hand (with transducer attached) should remain raised with arm
hand (with transducer attached), extends extended above the head for the duration of the recording.
the arm above the head, and holds that
position.
12. Click Resume. When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append marker
labeled “Seated, arm raised above head” will be automatically inserted.
13. Record for 60 seconds. Subject remains seated with arm extended above head (seconds 46-105).
14. Click Suspend. The recording should halt.
15. Review the data on the screen. If data is similar to the Fig. 7..9, proceed to Step 16.
 If similar, go to Step 16. Note: The recording will vary greatly with different Subjects. When the hand
is raised above the head, there may not be enough blood pressure at the
fingertips to overcome the pressure of the Pulse Transducer strap. In
such cases, switch Subjects.

Fig. 7.9 End of Segment 3, Arm raised above head


 If different, click Redo. The data might be different for the reasons in Step 5.
If incorrect, you should redo the recording by clicking Redo and repeating
Steps 11-15. Note that once you press Redo, the data you have just recorded
will be erased.
16. Click Done. A pop-up window with options will appear. Make your choice, and continue as
directed. If choosing the “Record from another Subject” option:
a) Attach electrodes and transducer per Set Up Steps 5-7, have the new
Subject sit and relax, and continue the entire lesson from Set Up Step
10.
b) Each person will need to use a unique file name.
17. Remove the electrodes and the transducer. Remove the electrode cable pinch connectors, and peel off the electrodes.
Throw out the electrodes (BIOPAC electrodes are not reusable). Wash the
electrode gel residue from the skin, using soap and water. The electrodes may
leave a slight ring on the skin for a few hours. This is normal, and does not
indicate that anything is wrong.
END OF RECORDING
Lesson 7: ECG & Pulse Page 9

V. DATA ANALYSIS
FAST TRACK Data Analysis DETAILED EXPLANATION OF DATA ANALYSIS STEPS
1. Enter the Review Saved Data mode and  Enter Review Saved Data mode from the Lessons menu.
choose the correct file.
 Note Channel Number (CH) The data window should come up the same as Fig. 7.10.
designations:
Channel Displays
CH 1 ECG
CH 40 Pulse
 Note measurement box settings:
Channel Measurement
CH 1 Delta T (time interval) Fig 7.10

CH 1 BPM (rate) The measurement boxes are above the marker region in the data window. Each
measurement has three sections: channel number, measurement type, and result.
CH 1 P-P The first two sections are pull-down menus that are activated when you click
CH 40 P-P on them.

 Brief definition of measurements:


Delta T: The Delta Time measurement is the difference in time between the
end and beginning of the selected area.
BPM: The Beats Per Minute measurement first calculates the difference in
time between the end and beginning of the area selected by the I-Beam tool
(same as Delta T), then divides this value into 60 seconds/minute. Because
BPM only uses the time measurement of the selected area for its
calculation, the BPM value is not specific to a particular channel.
P-P: Peak-to-Peak finds the maximum value in the selected area and
subtracts the minimum value found in the selected area.
The “selected area” is the area selected by the I-Beam (including endpoints).
2. Setup your display window for optimal The following tools help you adjust the data window: 
viewing of the entire recording.
Display menu: Autoscale horizontal Autoscale waveforms, Zoom Previous
Scroll Bars: Time (Horizontal); Amplitude (Vertical)
Cursor Tools: Zoom Tool
3. Zoom in on a small section of the Be sure to zoom in far enough so that you can easily measure the intervals
Segment 1 data. between peaks, approximately 4 cardiac cycles.
4. Using the I-Beam cursor, select the area Try to go from R wave peak to R wave peak as precisely as possible (Fig 7.11
between two successive R waves (one follows).
cardiac cycle).

 A

5. Repeat the above measurements for each


of the data segments.

A
Fig. 7.11
Data Analysis continues…
Page 10 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

6. Using the I-Beam cursor, select the area


between two successive pulse peaks (one
cardiac cycle).

A
7. Repeat the above measurements for each
of the data segments.
A Fig. 7.12

8. Select individual pulse peaks for each Use the P-P [CH 40] measurements.
segment and determine their amplitudes.
Important: Measure the first pulse peak after the recording resumed. The
B body’s homeostatic regulation of blood pressure and volume occurs quickly.
The increase or decrease in your results will be dependent on the timing of your
data relative to the speed of physiological adjustments.

Fig. 7.13
9. Using the I-Beam cursor, select the Record the time interval (Delta T) between the two peaks.
interval between the R-wave and pulse
peak.
C
10. Save or print the data file.  You may save the data to a drive, save notes that are in the journal, or
print the data file.
11. Exit the program. 
END OF DATA ANALYSIS

END OF LESSON 7
Complete the Lesson 7 Data Report that follows.
Lesson 7: ECG & Pulse Page 11

ECG & Pulse


Mechanical Action of the Heart, Peripheral Pressure Pulse,
and Plethysmography

DATA REPORT
Student’s Name:
Lab Section:
Date:

I. Data and Calculations


Subject Profile
Name Height

Age Gender: Male / Female Weight

A. Comparison of ECG with Pulse Plethysmogram (Segments 1-3)

Complete Table 7.1 with data from three cycles from each segment and calculate the Means.
Table 7.1
Condition Selected Area Measurement Cycle I Cycle 2 Cycle 3 Mean
Arm Relaxed R-R Interval DeltaT CH 1
Segment 1 Heart Rate BPM CH 1
Pulse Interval DeltaT CH 1
Pulse Rate BPM CH 1
Temp. Change R-R Interval DeltaT CH 1
Segment 2 Heart Rate BPM CH 1
Pulse Interval DeltaT CH 1
Pulse Rate BPM CH 1
Arm Up R-R Interval DeltaT CH 1
Segment 3 Heart Rate BPM CH 1
Pulse Interval DeltaT CH 1
Pulse Rate BPM CH 1
B. Relative Volume Changes (Segments 1-3)

Complete Table 7.2 with data from each recording segment.

Table 7.2
Arm Temperatur Arm Up
Resting e
Measurement Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3
QRS Amplitude
CH1 p-p
Relative Pulse Amplitude
(mV)
CH 40 p-p
Page 12 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

C. Calculation of Pulse Speed

Distance between Subject’s sternum and shoulder? ___________________cm


Distance between Subject’s shoulder and fingertip? ___________________cm
Total distance? __________________cm

Data from Segment 1 of the recording (measure with I-Beam)


Time between R-wave and Pulse peak? ____________________secs

Speed?____________________________________________cm/sec

Data from Segment 3 of the recording (measure with I-Beam)


Time between R-wave and Pulse peak? ____________________secs

Speed?____________________________________________cm/sec

II. Questions

D. Referring to data in table 7.1, are the values of heart rate and pulse rate similar for each condition? Yes / No

Explain why the values might differ or be similar.

E. Referring to Table 7.2 data, how much did the amplitude of the QRS complex change between conditions?

Extreme temp – Arm Resting? __________ mV

Arm up – Arm Resting? ____________ mV

F. Referring to Table 7.2 data, how much did the pulse amplitude change between arm positions?

Extreme temp – Arm Resting? __________ mV

Arm up – Arm Resting? ____________ mV

G. Referring to Table 7.2 data, does the amplitude of the QRS complex change with the pulse amplitudes? Why or why not?

H. Describe one mechanism that causes changes in blood volume to your fingertip.

I. Referring to data from section C of this report, how would you explain the difference in speed, if any?
Lesson 7: ECG & Pulse Page 13

J. Which components of the cardiac cycle (atrial systole and diastole, ventricular systole and diastole) are discernible in the
pulse tracing?

K. Would you expect the calculated pulse wave velocities of other students to be very close if not the same as yours? Why or
why not?

L. Explain any amplitude or frequency changes that occurred with arm position.

End of Lesson 7 Data Report


Physiology Lessons Lesson 8
for use with the
Biopac Student Lab RESPIRATORY CYCLE I
Respiratory Rates
Relative Depths of Breathing
Regulation of Ventilation

Richard Pflanzer, Ph.D.


Associate Professor
Indiana University School of Medicine
Purdue University School of Science

J.C. Uyehara, Ph.D.


Biologist
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

William McMullen
Vice President
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

BIOPAC Systems, Inc.


42 Aero Camino, Goleta, CA 93117
(805) 685-0066, Fax (805) 685-0067
info@biopac.com
www.biopac.com

Manual Revision 3.7.6


09022009
 BIOPAC Systems, Inc.
Page 4 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
II. EXPERIMENTAL OBJECTIVES
1) To record and measure ventilation utilizing pneumograph and air temperature transducers.
2) To show how ventilation relates to temperature changes in airflow through one nostril.
3) To observe and record chest expansion and contraction and modifications in the rate and depth of the breathing cycle
due to cerebral influence and chemoreceptor influence on the medullary control centers.

III. MATERIALS
 BIOPAC Respiratory Transducer SS5LB (or older SS5LA or SS5L)
 BIOPAC Temperature Transducer SS6L (Fast Response Thermistor)
 Single-sided (surgical) tape (TAPE1)
 Biopac Student Lab System: software BSL 3.7.3 or above
data acquisition unit MP36, MP35, or MP30 (Windows only)
 Computer System
IV. EXPERIMENTAL METHODS

 For further explanation, use the online support options under the Help Menu.
A. SET UP
FAST TRACK Set Up DETAILED EXPLANATION OF SET UP STEPS
1. Turn the computer ON.  The desktop should appear on the monitor. If it does not appear, ask
2. Make sure the BIOPAC MP3X unit is turned the laboratory instructor for assistance.
OFF. BIOPAC MP3X unit

3. Plug the equipment in as follows:


Respiratory Transducer* (SS5LB) — CH 1
Temperature Transducer [Thermistor] (SS6L)
— CH 2

Respiratory Temperature Transducer


*Note: The SS5LA respiratory transducer is Transducer (SS6L) plugs into
(SS5L/LA/LB) CHannel 2
shown in Fig. 8.2. You may have the
plugs into
SS5LB or SS5L, which both look a Channel 1
little different but should work the
Fig. 8.2
same way.
The Temperature Transducer is used to measure airflow. Each inhale brings
cooler air across the transducer, and each exhale blows warmer air across
the transducer. The transducer records these temperature changes, which
are proportional to the airflow output. This indirect method is efficient
when rate and relatively amplitude measurements are sufficient; a direct
airflow measurement requires a complex scaling procedure.
4. Turn the MP3X Data Acquisition Unit ON. 
5. Attach the respiratory transducer (SS5LB) to Attach the respiratory transducer around the chest below the armpits and
the Subject (Fig. 8.3). above the nipples (Fig. 8.3). The correct tension is critical. The respiratory
transducer must be slightly tight at the point of maximal expiration. The
transducer can be worn over a thin shirt, such as a T-shirt.
If using the SS5LB or SS5L,
simply attach the Velcro ends
together at the correct tension.

Setup continues… Fig. 8.3 SS5LB Placement


Lesson 8: Respiratory I Page 5
If using the SS5LA, attach the
IMPORTANT USE NOTE nylon belt by threading the nylon
If using the SS5LA transducer, you must strap through the corresponding
be very careful to not pull or yank on the slots on the rubber bow tie such
rubber bow tie portion that contains the that the strap clamps into place
sensor element. when tightened (Fig. 8.4)

Fig. 8.4

6. Attach the temperature transducer [thermistor] The thermistor should be firmly


(SS6L) to the Subject (Fig. 8.5). attached so it does not move
and should be positioned below
the nostril and not touching the
face. It’s usually best to make a Small loop
small loop in the cable about 2” made in Thermister tip
from the temperature probe (tip) directly under
Tap nostril
and tape the loop to the
Subject’s face (Fig 8.5).
Fig. 8.5

7. Start the Biopac Student Lab Program. 


8. Choose Lesson 8 (LO8-Respiratory Cycle I).
9. Type in your filename. Use a unique identifier.
10. Click OK. This ends default Setup.
END OF SETUP

B. CALIBRATION
The Calibration procedure establishes the hardware’s internal parameters (such as gain, offset, and scaling) and is critical for
optimum performance. Pay close attention to the Calibration procedure.
FAST TRACK Calibration DETAILED EXPLANATION OF CALIBRATION STEPS
1. Subject should sit in a relaxed state,
breathing normally.
2. Click Calibrate. The Calibrate button is in the upper left corner of the Setup window.
3. Wait for the Calibration to stop. The program needs a reading of volume and temperature to perform auto-
calibration. Calibration will run for 8 seconds and then stop automatically, so
let it run its course.
4. Check your calibration data. At the end of the 8-second calibration recording, your screen should resemble
Fig. 8.6. Both recording channels should show some fluctuation. If there is not
 If similar, proceed to the Data any fluctuation, then it is possible that a transducer is not connected properly
Recording section.
and you must redo calibration by clicking Redo Calibration and repeating the
 If different, Redo Calibration. entire calibration sequence.

Figure 8.6
Note The top channel displays data from the temperature transducer that is
positioned under the Subject’s nose. The channel is labeled “airflow”
because the temperature at the nostrils is inversely proportional to the
END OF CALIBRATION airflow in and out of the nostril (see Introduction).
Page 6 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

C. RECORDING LESSON DATA


FAST TRACK Recording DETAILED EXPLANATION OF RECORDING STEPS
1. Prepare for the recording and have the Subject You will record airflow on one channel and chest expansion on another
sit down and relax. channel with the Subject under four conditions: Normal breathing,
Hyperventilation and recovery, Hypoventilation and recovery, and
Coughing and then reading aloud.
In order to work efficiently, read this entire section so you will know what
to do for each recording segment.
Hints for obtaining optimal data:
a) Subject should stop hyperventilation or hypoventilation if dizziness
develops.
b) The respiration transducer should fit snugly around the chest prior to
inspiration.
c) The temperature transducer should be firmly attached so it does not
move. The transducer thermistor should be positioned below the nostril
and not touching the face.
d) The Subject should be sitting for all segments.
e) The recording should be suspended after each segment so that the
Subject can prepare for the next recording segment.
Segment 1
2. Click Record. When you click Record, the recording will begin and an append marker
labeled “Seated and relaxed” will automatically be inserted.
3. Record for 15 seconds. Subject should be sitting in a chair, breathing normally (seconds 0-15).
4. Click Suspend. The recording should halt, giving you time to review the data and prepare
for the next recording segment.
5. Review the data on the screen. If all went well, your data should look similar to Fig. 8.7 and you can
proceed to Step 6.
 If similar, go to Step 6.

Fig. 8.7 End of Segment 1, Normal breathing (eupnea)


 If different, click Redo. The data might be different if:
a) The pneumograph (respiration) data has “plateaus” instead of
waveforms. If there are plateaus, adjust the pneumograph and repeat
from Set Up Step 9.
b) The waveforms in the temperature (airflow) data are not offset from
the respiration data. If there is no offset, adjust the respiration
transducer and repeat from Set Up Step 9.
c) The temperature thermistor moved and is no longer directly under the
nostril.
d) The pneumograph slipped.
e) Suspend was pressed prematurely
f) Any of the channels have flat data, indicating no signal.
If incorrect, redo the recording by clicking Redo and repeating Steps 2-5.
Recording continues… Once you press Redo, the data you have just recorded will be erased.
Lesson 8: Respiratory I Page 7
Segment 2
6. Click Resume. When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append
marker labeled “hyper-ventilation and recovery” will be automatically
inserted.
7. Subject hyperventilates for 30 seconds and Subject should breathe rapidly and deeply through the mouth for a
then recovers from hyperventilation for 30 maximum of 30 seconds. Then, Subject should resume breathing nasally
seconds. until a normal breathing pattern is reestablished.
WARNING Seconds 15-45 is hyperventilation
The Director should watch the Subject Seconds 45-75 is recovery
and stop the procedure if the Subject
starts to feel sick or excessively dizzy. Recorder needs to record both hyperventilation and the initial recovery
period.
8. Click Suspend. The recording should halt, giving you time to review the data and prepare
for the next recording segment.
9. Review the data on the screen. If all went well, your data should look similar to Fig. 8.8 and you can
proceed to Step 10. Use the horizontal scroll bar to look at different
 If similar, and more segments are
portions of the waveform.
required, go to Step 10.

Fig 8.8 Hyperventilation and recovery


 If different, click Redo. The data might be different for the reasons in Step 5.
If incorrect, you should redo the recording by clicking Redo and repeating
Steps 6-9. Note that once you press Redo, the data you have just recorded
will be erased.
Segment 3
10. Click Resume. Important! Subject should NOT do the next section until breathing has
returned to normal.
When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append
marker labeled “hypoventilation and recovery” will be automatically
inserted.
11. Subject hypoventilates for 30 seconds, then To hypoventilate (insufficient ventilation), Subject should breathe slowly
recovers from hypoventilation for 30 seconds. and shallowly through the mouth for a maximum of 30 seconds. Then,
resume breathing nasally until a normal breathing pattern is reestablished.
WARNING
The Director should watch the Subject Recorder needs to record both hypoventilation and the initial recovery
and stop the procedure if the Subject period.
starts to feel sick or excessively dizzy. Seconds 75-105 is hypoventilation
Seconds 105-135 is recovery
12. Click Suspend. The recording should halt, giving you time to prepare for the next
recording segment.

Recording continues…
Page 8 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

13. Review the data on the screen. If all went well, data should look similar to the Fig. 8.9 and you can
proceed to Step 14. Use the horizontal scroll bar to view different portions
 If similar, go to Step 14.
of the data segment.

Fig. 8.9 Hypoventilation & recovery


 If different, click Redo. The data might be different for the reasons in Step 5.
If incorrect, you should redo the recording by clicking Redo and repeating
Steps 10-13. Note that once you press Redo, the data you have just
recorded will be erased.
Segment 4
14. Click Resume. When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append
marker labeled “Cough, then read aloud” will be automatically inserted.
15. Have Subject cough once and then begin Subject should continue to read aloud for about 60 seconds.
reading aloud.
16. Click Suspend. The recording should halt.
17. Review the data on the screen. If all went well, your data should look similar to Fig. 8.10 and you can
proceed to Step 18. Use the horizontal scroll bar to view different portions
 If similar, go to Step 18.
of the data segment.

Fig. 8.10 Cough once then read aloud


 If different, click Redo. The data might be different for the reasons in Step 5.
If incorrect, you should redo the recording by clicking Redo and repeating
Steps 14-17. Note that once you press Redo, the data you have just
recorded will be erased.
18. Click Done. A pop-up window with options will be generated. Make your choice, and
continue as directed.
If choosing the “Record from another Subject” option:
a) Attach the respiration transducer and temperature transducer per Set
Up Steps 5 and 6, and continue the entire lesson from Set Up Step 9.
b) Each person will need to use a unique file name.
19. Remove the respiration and temperature
transducers.
END OF RECORDING
Lesson 8: Respiratory I Page 9
V. DATA ANALYSIS
FAST TRACK Data Analysis DETAILED EXPLANATION OF DATA ANALYSIS STEPS
1. Enter the Review Saved Data mode.  Enter the Review Saved Data mode from the Lessons menu.
Note Channel Number (CH) designation: The data window should come up the same as Fig. 8.11.
Channel Displays
CH 2 Airflow
CH 40 Respiration

Fig 8.11
2. Set up the measurement boxes as follows: The measurement boxes are above the marker region in the data window.
Each measurement has three sections: channel number, measurement type
Channel Measurement
(tool), and measurement result. The first two sections are pull-down menus
CH 40 Delta T that are activated when you click them.
CH 40 BPM  Brief definition of measurements:
CH 40 p-p Delta T: The Delta Time measurement is the difference in time between
the end and beginning of the selected area.
CH 2 p-p
BPM: The Beats Per Minute measurement first calculates the difference in
time between the end and beginning of the area selected by the I-Beam
tool (same as Delta T), and divides this value into 60 seconds/minute.
Because the BPM only uses the time measurement of the selected area for
its calculation, the BPM value is not specific to a particular channel.
p-p: finds the maximum value in the selected area and subtracts the
minimum value found in the selected area.

Note: The “selected area” is the area selected by the I-Beam tool
(including the endpoints).
3. Zoom in on a small section of the Segment 1 Zoom in far enough so that you can easily measure the intervals between
data. peaks, approximately four cycles.

 The following tools help you adjust the data window:


Autoscale horizontal Horizontal (Time) Scroll Bar
Autoscale waveforms Vertical (Amplitude) Scroll Bar
Zoom Tool Zoom Previous
4. Use the I-Beam cursor to select the area of The respiration channel data [CH 40] in the following figure shows an
inspiration. example of selecting an inspiration segment. The T measurement gives the
duration of inspiration.
A

Fig. 8.12

Data Analysis continues…


Page 10 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

5. Select the area of expiration. The following figure shows an example of selecting an expiration segment.
The Delta T (T) measurement gives the duration of expiration.
A
6. Repeat the above inspiration and expiration
measurements for two additional cycles in data
Segment 1.

A

Fig. 8.13
7. Select an area within Segment 1 data from the The following figure shows an example of selecting the total duration of
beginning of one cycle to the end of the same one cycle. The Delta T (T) measurement displays the total duration and
cycle (this is the total duration). BPM indicates the breathing rate of the selected cycle.

A
8. Repeat Steps 5 through 8 on each of the three
remaining data Segments.

B

Fig. 8.14
9. Select three individual cycles in each of the The selected area should start at the middle of the descending wave and end
four data segments and determine the at the middle of the next descending wave to capture the min and max
respiration amplitude for each. amplitudes. The p-p measurement will display the amplitude.

C The following figure shows an example of selecting an area in the cycle


that captures the minimum and maximum amplitude values.
Note: Segment 4 (cough) only requires one measurement.

Fig 8.15
10. Using the I-Beam cursor, select the interval Select the interval in each of the four data segments.
between the maximal inspiration and max
Record the Delta T (time interval) between the two peaks and the p-p [CH
temperature change in each data segment.
2] (temperature amplitude).
D
11. Save or print the data file.  You may save the data to a drive, save notes that are in the journal, or
END OF DATA ANALYSIS print the data file.

END OF LESSON 8
Complete the Lesson 8 Data Report that follows.
Lesson 8: Respiratory I Page 11

RESPIRATORY CYCLE I

DATA REPORT
Student’s Name:

Lab Section:

Date:

I. Data and Calculations


Subject Profile

Name Height

Age Gender: Male / Female Weight

A. Eupnea (Normal Breathing - Segment I)


Complete Table 8.1 with values for each cycle and calculate the Means.

Table 8.1
Measurement Rate Cycle 1 Cycle 2 Cycle 3 Mean

Inspiration Duration

Expiration Duration

Total Duration

Breathing Rate

B. Comparison of Ventilation Rates (Segments 2-4)


Complete Table 8.2 with measurements from CH 40 for three cycles of each segment and calculate the Means where
indicated. Note: Delta T is cycle duration, BPM is breathing rate, and Cough has only one cycle
Table 8.2
Rate Calculated Calculated
Cycle 1 Cycle 2 Cycle 3 Mean Cycle 1 Cycle 2 Cycle 3 Mean

Hyperventilation
Segment 2

Hypoventilation
Segment 3

Cough
Segment 4

Read Aloud
Segment 4
Page 12 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

C. Relative Ventilation Depths (Segments 1-4)


Table 8.3
Mean
Depth
Cycle 1 Cycle 2 Cycle 3 Calculated
Eupnea
Segment 1

Hyperventilation
Segment 2

Hypoventilation
Segment 3

Cough
Segment 4

D. Association of Respiratory Depth and Temperature (Segments 1-3)


Table 8.4
Eupnea Hyperventilation Hypoventilation
Measurement
Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3

Peak DeltaTemp

Delta T between
Max inspiration and
Peak Delta Temp

II. Questions

E. If the subject had held their breath immediately after hyperventilation and hypoventilation, would the subject hold their
breath longer after hyperventilation or hypoventilation? Why?

F. After a brief period of hyperventilation, “apnea vera” occurs.


i. Define hyperventilation

ii. Define apnea vera.

iii. Describe the feedback loop causing apnea vera.

G. i. What changes occur in the body with hypoventilation?

ii. How does the body adjust rate and depth of ventilation to counteract the effects of hypoventilation?
Lesson 8: Respiratory I Page 13
H. In which part of the respiratory cycle is temperature:

Highest? Lowest?
Explain why temperature varies with the respiratory cycle.

I. Describe or define cough in terms of modification of the breathing cycle.

J. What modifications of the breathing cycle occur when reading aloud? Why?

K. Refer to Table 8.1 data: During eupnea, did the subject inspire immediately after the end of expiration or was there a pause?
Explain the stimulus and mechanism to initiate inspiration.

L. Referring to Table 8.3 data: Are there differences in the relative ventilation depths?

End of Lesson 8 Data Report


Physiology Lessons Lesson 9
for use with the
Biopac Student Lab ELECTRODERMAL ACTIVITY
&
THE POLYGRAPH

EDA/GSR

Richard Pflanzer, Ph.D.


Associate Professor
Indiana University School of Medicine
Purdue University School of Science

William McMullen
Vice President
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

BIOPAC® Systems, Inc.


42 Aero Camino, Goleta, CA 93117
(805) 685-0066, Fax (805) 685-0067
info@biopac.com
www.biopac.com

Manual Revision 3.7.6


09012009
 BIOPAC Systems, Inc.
Page 4 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

II. EXPERIMENTAL OBJECTIVES


1) To become familiar with procedures for recording electrodermal activity.
2) To observe and record changes in respiratory rate, heart rate, and skin resistance associated with somatic and special
sensory stimuli.
3) To observe and record changes in respiratory rate, heart rate, and skin resistance associated with cognitive behavior and
emotion.
4) To analyze a 3-channel polygram recorded under various experimental conditions to gain a better understanding of
polygraphy and its potential for use and misuse.

III. MATERIALS
 BIOPAC disposable vinyl electrodes (EL503) – 3 electrodes per Subject
 BIOPAC Electrode lead set (SS2LA/L)
 BIOPAC EDA setup
o Disposable setup: EDA/GSR Lead (SS57L) and EDA Gelled Electrodes (EL507 x 2)
o Reusable setup: EDA/GSR transducer (SS3LA/L), Electrode gel (GEL1), and flat blade screwdriver
 BIOPAC Respiration transducer (SS5LB or older SS5LA or SS5L)
 BIOPAC PAPER1
 Or nine sheets of different colored paper. Recommended: 8-1/2”x 11” sheets in white, black, green, red, blue, yellow,
orange, brown, purple
 Biopac Student Lab System: software BSL 3.7.3 or above
data acquisition unit MP36, MP35, or MP30 (Windows only)
 Computer System

IV. EXPERIMENTAL METHODS

 For further explanation, use the online support options under the Help Menu.
A. SET UP
FAST TRACK Set Up DETAILED EXPLANATION OF SET UP STEPS
1. Turn the computer ON.  The desktop should appear on the monitor. If not, ask the
2. Make sure the BIOPAC MP3X unit is turned laboratory instructor for assistance.
OFF.
3. Plug the transducers in as follows: BIOPAC MP3X unit
Respiration (SS5LB) — CH 1
Electrode lead set (SS2LA/L) — CH 2
EDA (SS3LA or SS57L) — CH 3
4. Turn the MP3X Data Acquisition Unit ON.

Respiratory Transducer
(SS5L/LA/LB) plugs
into CHannel 1

EDA (SS3LA–shown
or SS57L lead) plugs
Electrode lead set (SS2LA/L) into CHannel 3
plugs into Channel 2
Setup continues… Fig. 9.1 Equipment Connections
Lesson 9: EDA & Polygraph Page 5

5. Attach the respiratory transducer (SS5LB) to Attach the respiratory


the Subject (Fig. 9.2). transducer around the chest
below the armpits and
above the nipples (Fig. 9.2).
The correct tension is
IMPORTANT critical. The respiratory
If using the SS5LA transducer, you must transducer must be slightly
be very careful to not pull or yank on the tight at the point of maximal
rubber bow tie portion that contains the Fig. 9.2 SS5LB Placement
expiration. The respiration
sensor element. transducer can be applied If using the SS5LB or SS5L, simply
over thin clothing, such as a attach the Velcro ends together at the
t-shirt. correct tension.

6. Setup the EDA. HINT For a good signal to be picked up, it helps if the subjects
have a little sweat on their hands (not a lot, but enough so
that their hands are not completely smooth or cold). If
subjects wash their hands just prior to the recording or if
they have been sitting in a cold room, then they must do
something to activate the sweat glands before beginning
calibration or recording. If subjects begin with colder
hands, the scale will be diminished and the signal will be
easily saturated once they “warm up” during the lesson.

 SS57L and EL507 Attach two EL507 electrodes


to the subject’s fingertips and
connect the SS57L lead, as
shown in Fig. 9.3.

Fig. 9.3 SS57L and EL507 Setup

 SS3LA and GEL1 If using the SS3L/SS3LA reusable setup, you must clean and then fill
with electrode gel to obtain accurate recordings:
 Clean and fill both cavities of the EDA
transducer (SS3L/SS3LA) with gel and then  CLEAN: Each cavity of the EDA transducer should be carefully
attach to the Subject cleaned with a small flat blade screwdriver and then the interior
(Fig. 9.4). surface should be gently roughed with an abrasive pad.
 FILL: Fresh gel must be applied in order to obtain an accurate
EDA/GSR signal.
These steps are critical—data quality may suffer if the transducer
becomes gummed with dried gel from previous uses.
Sensors attach to
IMPORTANT bottom of fingertips
You must fill both sensor cavities
Velcro straps
with electrode gel (GEL1) before wrap around
attaching fingers
to the fingers.

Fig. 9.4 SS3L/SS3LA attachment and connection

The SS3L/SS3LA is typically placed on the index and middle finger of


the left hand. Position the transducer so that the sensor is on the bottom
of your fingertip (the part without the fingernail) and wrap the Velcro
tape around the finger so the transducer fits snugly but not so tight that
Setup continues… blood circulation is cut off.
Page 6 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

It’s a fine line between tight and too tight. The SS3L and SS3LA attach
to the fingertips in an identical manner (Fig. 9.4) and should be in place
for at least five minutes prior to the start of recording.
7. Set up the LEAD II recording. Place three electrodes at the positions shown (Fig. 9.5).
a) Place three disposable electrodes (EL503)
on the Subject (Fig. 9.5).
one on right forearm
(just above wrist)

one on inside right leg


(just above ankle bone)

one on inside left leg


(just above ankle bone)
Fig. 9.5

 medial surface of right leg, just above the ankle bone.


 medial surface of left leg, just above the ankle bone.
 right anterior forearm just above the wrist (same side of arm
as palm of hand).
 For optimal electrode adhesion, the electrodes should be placed on
the skin at least 5 minutes before the start of the Calibration procedure.
b) Attach the electrode lead set (SS2L) to the
electrodes (Fig. 9.6).
right forearm
WHITE lead

right leg left leg


BLACK lead RED lead
(ground)
Fig. 9.6

To establish a LEAD II electrode configuration, each of the pinch


connectors on the end of the electrode cable must be attached to a
specific electrode position. Follow Fig. 9.6 to ensure that you connect
each lead (color) to the proper electrode. The pinch connectors will only
latch onto the nipple of the electrode from one side of the connector.

8. Start the Biopac Student Lab program.  Use a unique identifier.


9. Choose Lesson 9 (L09-EDA & Polygraph).
10. Type in your filename.
11. Click OK. This ends default Set Up.
12. Optional: Set Preferences. This lesson has optional Preferences for data and display while
 Choose File > Preferences. recording. Per your Lab Instructor’s guidelines, you may set:
 Select an option. Journal Text: show minimum guiding text vs. detailed text
Recording Length: allow from 30 seconds to 30 minutes of data
 Select the desired setting and click OK.
Grids: show or hide gridlines
END OF SETUP Respiration Transducer: Specify the model as SS5LB, SS5LA, or SS5L.
Lesson 9: EDA & Polygraph Page 7
B. CALIBRATION
The Calibration procedure establishes the hardware’s internal parameters (such as gain, offset, and scaling) and is critical for
optimum performance. Pay close attention to the Calibration procedure.
FAST TRACK Calibration DETAILED EXPLANATION OF CALIBRATION STEPS
1. Seat the Subject facing the Director and
away from screen.

Fig. 9.7 Calibration Seating

Ideally, the Subject should sit in a chair facing the Director, with arms on
the armrest and be in a relaxed state, breathing normally. The Subject
should not be able to see the screen during recording.
2. Click Calibrate. The Calibrate button is in the upper left corner of the screen.
3. Three seconds into the recording, a beep will The program needs to see a change in the EDA recording during
sound and Subject should inhale and exhale calibration.
deeply for one cycle, then return to normal
breathing.
4. Wait for the Calibration to stop. The Calibration will run for 10 seconds and then stop automatically, so let
it run its course.
5. Check your calibration data. At the end of the 10-sec calibration recording, your screen should
resemble Fig. 9.8.
EDA/GSR

Figure 9.8 Sample Calibration Data

 If similar, proceed to the Data All three recording channels should show some fluctuation. There should
Recording section. be some variation 4-6 seconds into the EDA recording from the deep
inhale.
 If different, Redo Calibration. If a channel does not show fluctuation, the transducer may not be
connected properly or the Subject may not have inhaled deeply enough.
Click Redo Calibration and repeat the entire calibration sequence until
END OF CALIBRATION your data resembles the sample data.
Page 8 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
C. RECORDING LESSON DATA
FAST TRACK Recording DETAILED EXPLANATION OF RECORDING STEPS
1. Prepare for the recording. You will record three segments of data, 120 seconds each. In order to
work efficiently, read this entire section so you will know what to do for
each recording segment.

Hints for obtaining optimal data:


a) The Subject must not be able to see the record as it is being
recorded.
b) The environment must be quiet.
c) Sensory input to the Subject must be kept at a minimum since
almost any change in the environment may evoke a response.
d) The Subject should remain as still as possible during recording,
relaxed with arms resting on the armrests.
e) Subject should answer question in a quiet tone with minimal
movement of the mouth.
f) Subject should be at his/her resting heart rate in a relaxed mental
and physical state, and should not have performed any recent
physical or mental exertion.
Segment 1
2. Take position as follows: Subject should be in a chair in a relaxed state, with arms on the armrest,
breathing normally.
a) Subject faces Director.
b) Recorder faces screen and listens for Recorder will need to listen for Director’s instructions to Subject so s/he
Director’s instructions to Subject. knows when to place event markers.

3. Click Record. When you click Record, an append marker labeled “Count and touch”
will automatically be inserted.

4. Wait five seconds, then Director instructs The 5-second wait before each request establishes a baseline. This entire
Subject to perform the following, and pauses segment should be completed within 120 seconds.
between requests to reestablish a baseline.
 In this segment, Recorder needs to insert an event marker at the
precise moment that Subject answers each question. To insert Markers,
press F9 on Windows or Esc on Mac.

Markers and labels can be edited after the data is recorded.

It may be difficult to type in the marker label text while you are
recording. The important thing is to get the marker inserted during
recording, at the precise moment the event changes. Labels can be keyed
or edited after the recording is done.

Recorder inserts event markers to


indicate event change.
a) Quietly say his/her name.
 “name”
b) Quietly count backward from 10.
 “count from 10”

Recording continues….
Lesson 9: EDA & Polygraph Page 9
c) Count backward from 30 by Subtract 1 from 30, then 3 from 29, then 5 from 26 and so on, by
subtracting increasing odd numbers using increasing odd numbers as the subtracted factor.
(e.g., 30, 29, 26, 21).
 “count from 30”
d) Director touches Subject on the side
of the face.
 “face touched”
5. Click Suspend. The recording should halt, giving you time to review the data and
prepare for the next recording segment.
6. Review the data on the screen. If all went well, data should look similar to Fig. 9.9 and you can
proceed to Step 7.
 If similar, go to Step 7.

EDA/GSR

Fig. 9.9

 If different, click Redo. The data might be different if:


a) The Suspend button was pressed prematurely.
b) A transducer slipped off or an electrode peeled up, causing a
large baseline drift, spike, or loss of signal.
c) The markers were not inserted or were inserted at the wrong
time(s).
In this case, you should redo the recording by clicking Redo and repeating
Steps 2-6. Note that once you press Redo, the data you have just recorded
will be erased.
Segment 2
7. Click Resume. This segment should be completed within 120 seconds.
When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append marker
labeled “Concentration on colored squares” will be automatically inserted.
8. Director holds PAPER1 about two feet from
Subject’s face.
Director instructs Subject to look at and
concentrate on each square for about 10
seconds, and pauses between requests to
reestablish a baseline.
Recorder inserts event markers to indicate
To insert Markers, press F9 on Windows or Esc on Mac.
color change and records the time required for
a stimulus to generate a response. Markers and labels can be edited after the data is recorded.

Recording continues…
Page 10 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

Display the colors and insert event markers in It may be difficult to type in the marker label text while you are recording.
the following order: The important thing is to get the marker inserted during recording, at the
precise moment the event changes. Labels can be keyed or edited after the
a)  “white” recording is done.
b)  “black”
c)  “red”
d)  “blue”
e)  “green”
f)  “yellow”
g)  “orange”
h)  “brown”
i)  “purple”
9. Click Suspend. The recording should halt, giving you time to review the data and prepare
for the next recording segment.
10. Review the data on the screen. Your data should look similar to Fig. 9.10.
 If similar, and more segments are
required, go to Step 11.
 If different, click Redo.
EDA/GSR

Fig. 9.10 Sample Recording (4 colors used)

Variation in the data will completely depend on the Subject and recording
conditions. The data would be different for the reasons in Step 6. If
different, redo the recording by clicking Redo and repeating Steps 7-10.
Note that once you press Redo, the data you have just recorded will be
erased.
Segment 3
11. Click Resume. This segment should be completed within 120 seconds.
When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append marker
labeled “Series of ‘Yes/No’ questions” will be automatically inserted.
12. Director asks Subject the ten questions Each question-answer should take about 10 seconds.
below, and notes Subject’s response.
Subject’s replies should be limited to “yes” or “no.” Subject may answer
Subject responds “yes” or “no.” truthfully or dishonestly.
Recorder inserts an event marker when the To insert Markers, press F9 on Windows or Esc on Mac.
question is asked and another marker when
Markers and labels can be edited after the data is recorded.
Subject begins to answer.
 “Q” when question asked It may be difficult to type in the marker label text while you are recording.
The important thing is to get the marker inserted during recording, at the
 “A” when answer starts precise moment the event changes. Labels can be keyed or edited after the
recording is done.

Recording continues…
Lesson 9: EDA & Polygraph Page 11

a) Are you currently a student? Y N Director should note Subject’s responses here by circling “Y” for Yes and
“N” for No.
b) Are your eyes blue? Y N
c) Do you have any brothers? Y N
d) Did you earn an “A” on the last Y N
physiology exam?
e) Do you drive a motorcycle? Y N
f) Are you less than 25 years of age? Y N
g) Have you ever traveled to another Y N
planet?
h) Have aliens from another planet Y N
visited you?
i) Do you watch “Survivor”? Y N
j) Have you answered all of the Y N
preceding questions truthfully?
13. Click Suspend. The recording should halt, allowing you to review the data.
14. Review the data on the screen. If all went well, your data should look similar to Fig. 9.11 and you can
proceed to Step 15.
 If similar, go to Step 15.
EDA/GSR

Fig. 9.11

Variation in the data will completely depend on the Subject and recording
conditions.
 If different, click Redo. The data might be different for the reasons in Step 6.
If different, you should redo the recording by clicking Redo and repeating
Steps 11-14. Note that once you press Redo, the data you have just recorded
will be erased.
15. Ask the Subject to answer the questions Flip to Table 9.3 in your Data Report and record the Subject’s truthful
honestly and note the truthful answer in the answers to each question.
Data Report.

C
16. Click Done. A pop-up window with options will appear. Make your choice, and continue
as directed.
If choosing the “Record from another Subject” option:
a) Attach the sensors per Set Up Steps 5, 6, and 7 and continue the entire
lesson from Set Up Step 10.
b) Each person will need to use a unique file name.
17. Remove the sensors.
END OF RECORDING
Page 12 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
V. DATA ANALYSIS
FAST TRACK Data Analysis DETAILED EXPLANATION OF DATA ANALYSIS STEPS
1. Enter the Review Saved Data mode and Enter Review Saved Data from the Lessons menu. 
choose the correct file.
 Note Channel Number (CH) designations:
Channel Displays
CH 3 EDA/GSR

EDA/GSR
CH 40 Respiration
CH 41 Heart Rate

Fig 9.12

 Note measurement box settings: The measurement boxes are above the marker region in the data window.
Each measurement has three sections: channel number, measurement type,
Channel Measurement
and value. The first two sections are pull-down menus that are activated
CH 41 Value when you click them. The following is a brief description of these specific
measurements.
CH 40 BPM

CH 3 Value
Value: displays the amplitude value for the channel at the selected point.
If a single point is selected, the value is for that point, if an area is
selected, the value is the endpoint of the selected area.
BPM: In this lesson, the BPM measurement stands for Breaths Per
Minute and calculates the difference in time between the end and
beginning of the selected area (same as T), then divides this value into
60 seconds/minute.
The “selected area” is the area selected by the I-Beam tool (including the
endpoints).
2. Setup your display window for optimal The following tools help you adjust the data window: 
viewing of the first 5 seconds of the recording.
Display menu: Autoscale horizontal, Autoscale waveforms, Zoom
Previous
Scroll Bars: Time (Horizontal); Amplitude (Vertical)
Cursor Tools: Zoom Tool
Buttons: Overlap, Split, Show Grid, Hide Grid
3. Using the I-Beam cursor, choose a point at the
2-second mark and record the heart rate and
EDA values (Fig. 9.13).

A
EDA/GSR

4. Using the I-Beam cursor, select an area from


the start of one inhale to the start of the next
inhale (Fig. 9.14), and record the respiration
rate (BPM). Fig 9.13

A The respiration transducer records chest expansion (inhalation) as positive


values, and chest deflation (exhalation) as negative values. Therefore, the
start of inhalation is recorded as the beginning of the ascending positive
waveform.
Note This measurement may be difficult to perform, depending on your
data, because small dips in chest expansion can occur within the
normal cycle. You must be able to distinguish the small dips from
Data Analysis continues… the big dips.
Lesson 9: EDA & Polygraph Page 13

Fig 9.14

5. Scroll to view a 10-second interval beginning This 10-second interval should show the Subject’s response to the first
at the first event marker inserted in Data instruction of the segment.
Recording Step 4.
6. Find the point of maximal EDA within this 10-
second segment and record the heart rate and
EDA values at this point.

A

Fig 9.15

7. Using the I-Beam cursor, select an area from The respiration transducer records chest expansion (inhalation) as positive
the start of one inhale to the start of the next values, and chest deflation (exhalation) as negative values. Therefore, the
inhale, closest to the point used in Step 6, and start of inhalation is recorded as the beginning of the ascending positive
record the respiration rate (BPM). waveform.

A
8. Repeat Steps 6-7 for each condition in
Segment 1 of your data.
EDA/GSR

A

Fig 9.16

Each condition in the data record should be separated by an event marker


(“”).
9. Repeat Steps 5-8 for Segment 2 data. This is the segment beginning with the append marker labeled
“Concentration on colored squares.”
B
10. Repeat Steps 5-8 for Segment 3 data, using a This is the data beginning with the append marker labeled “Series of
5-second interval beginning at the “A” marker. ‘yes/no’ questions.”

C Measurements should be taken in the interval that begins when the Subject
started to answer.
11. Save or print the data file.
12. Exit the program.
 You may save the data to a drive, save notes that are in the journal, or
print the data file.
END OF DATA ANALYSIS

END OF LESSON 9
Complete the Lesson 9 Data Report that follows.
Page 14 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
Lesson 9: EDA & Polygraph Page 15

ELECTRODERMAL ACTIVITY & THE POLYGRAPH


DATA REPORT
Student’s Name:
Lab Section:
Date:

Subject Profile

Name Height
Age Gender: Male / Female Weight

I. Data and Calculations


A. Complete Table 9.1 with Segment 1 data.
Mark I for increase, D for decrease, and NC for no change relative to baseline.

Table 9.1 Segment 1 Data


Heart Rate Respiratory Rate EDA
Procedure

Resting (baseline)

Quietly say name

Count from 10

Count from 30

Face touched

B. Complete Table 9.2 with Segment 2 data.


Mark I for increase, D for decrease, and NC for no change relative to baseline.

Table 9.2 Segment 2 Data


Heart Rate Respiratory Rate EDA
Square Color

white

black

red

blue

green

yellow

orange

brown

purple
Page 16 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
C. Complete Table 9.3 with Segment 3 data.

Mark I for increase, D for decrease, and NC for no change relative to baseline.

Table 9.3 Segment 3 Data


Heart Rate Respiratory Rate EDA
Question Answer Truth

Student? Y N Y N

Blue eyes? Y N Y N

Brothers? Y N Y N

Earn “A”? Y N Y N

Motorcycle? Y N Y N

Less than 25? Y N Y N

Another planet? Y N Y N

Aliens visit? Y N Y N

“Fear Factor”? Y N Y N

Truthful? Y N Y N

II. Questions

D. Of what practical value is the EDA information obtained from the color experiment?

E. What major physiological changes account for the galvanic skin response?

F. Give three reasons why polygraph testing of a person’s sincerity and honesty may yield inconclusive results.

End of Lesson 9 Data Report


Physiology Lessons Lesson 10
for use with the
Biopac Student Lab ELECTROOCULOGRAM (EOG) I
Eye Movement
Saccades and Fixation during Reading

Richard Pflanzer, Ph.D.


Associate Professor Emeritus
Indiana University School of Medicine
Purdue University School of Science

William McMullen
Vice President
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

Vertical

Horizontal

BIOPAC® Systems, Inc.


42 Aero Camino, Goleta, CA 93117
(805) 685-0066, Fax (805) 685-0067
info@biopac.com
www.biopac.com

Manual Revision 3.7.6


09032009
 BIOPAC Systems, Inc.
Page 4 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

II. EXPERIMENTAL OBJECTIVES


1) Record EOG on the horizontal plane and compare eye movements under the following conditions: pendulum
tracking, pendulum simulation, reading silently, reading aloud, and reading challenging material.
2) Record EOG on the vertical plane and compare eye movements during real and during simulated tracking of an
object in the vertical plane.
3) Record the number and the duration of saccades that occur when reading a two-line passage silently, and then aloud,
and calculate the percentage of time used for saccadic eye movements.
4) Instructor’s option: Record spatial position of eye movements during visual examination of materials.

III. MATERIALS
 2 x BIOPAC electrode lead set (SS2LA/L)
 BIOPAC disposable vinyl electrodes (EL503), 6 electrodes per subject
 BIOPAC electrode gel (GEL1) and abrasive pad (ELPAD) or skin cleanser or alcohol prep
 Optional: Adhesive Tape (TAPE 2)—use to tape wires to reduce cable strain
 Pendulum for horizontal tracking (metronome may be used; signal pattern will be constant vs. diminishing)
 Pen or other real object for vertical tracking
 Passages for reading: Passage 1 – easily understandable (i.e., entertainment article)
Passage 2 – challenging material (i.e., scientific article)
 Biopac Student Lab System: software BSL 3.7.5 or above
data acquisition unit MP36, MP35, MP30 (Windows only), or MP45
 Computer System

IV. EXPERIMENTAL METHODS

 For further explanation, use the online support options under the Help Menu.
A. SETUP
FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION
1. Turn the computer ON.  The desktop should appear on the monitor. If it does not appear, ask the
laboratory instructor for assistance.

2. Make sure the BIOPAC MP3X unit is 


turned OFF.
3. Plug the electrode leads (SS2LA/L) in as
follows:
Horizontal lead — CH 1
Vertical lead — CH 2

4. Turn the MP3X Data Acquisition Unit ON.

Fig.10.4 MP3X (top) and MP45 (bottom) equipment connections


Setup continues…
Lesson 10: EOG I Page 5

5. Place 6 electrodes on Subject as shown in Attach one electrode above the right
Fig. 10.5. eye and one below, such that they
Right side Left side
are aligned vertically.
IMPORTANT
For accurate recordings, attach the Attach one electrode to the right of
electrodes so they are horizontally the right eye and one to the left of
and vertically aligned. the left eye, such that they are
aligned horizontally.

The other two electrodes are for


ground, and it is not critical that
Fig. 10.5 Proper electrode placement
they are aligned.
 For optimal electrode adhesion, the electrodes should be placed on the
skin at least five minutes before the start of Calibration.
Note: If using alcohol to clean the skin, be very careful near the eyes and add
a drop of GEL1 if alcohol was used.
BLACK lead
6. Attach the horizontal electrode lead set (Ground)
Follow Fig. 10.6 to ensure
(SS2LA/L) from CH 1 to the electrodes, that each colored cable is
following Fig. 10.6. connected to the proper
electrode.
RED lead WHITE lead
 Drape the electrode lead
Horizontal
cables behind the ears, as
shown, to give proper cable
strain relief.
Right side Left side

Fig. 10.6 Horizontal (CH 1) Lead Placement


Vertical

BLACK lead
7. Attach the vertical electrode lead set (Ground) Follow Fig. 10.7 to ensure
(SS2LA/L) from CH 2 to the electrodes, that each colored cable is
following Fig. 10.7. connected to the proper
RED lead electrode.
8. Relieve cable strain.
 Connect the electrode cable clip (where  Drape the electrode lead
the cable meets the three individual cables behind the ears, as
colored wires) to a convenient location WHITE lead shown, to give proper
(can be on Subject’s clothes). cable strain relief.
Right side Left side

Fig. 10.7 Vertical (CH 2) Lead Placement

9. Start the Biopac Student Lab Program. 


10. Choose Lesson L10-EOG-I and click Use a unique identifier. You can record up to 10 recordings of this Lesson
OK. with the same name.
11. Type in your filename and click OK. This ends Set Up.
12. Optional: Set Preferences. This lesson has optional Preferences for data and display while recording. Per
 Choose File > Preferences. your Lab Instructor’s guidelines, you may set:
Journal Text: show minimum guiding text vs. detailed text
 Select an option.
Grids: show or hide gridlines
 Select the desired setting and click Recording Length: allow from 30 seconds to 30 minutes of data
OK.
Setup continues…
Page 6 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

13. Position Subject approx. 25-50 cm from


screen with eyes aligned with center of Subject should be positioned to see the computer screen easily without moving
screen. his/her head. Have Subject adjust seating position such that his/her eyes are in
line with the center of the computer screen. Supporting the head to minimize
 Note distance (cm) from eyes to movement is recommended.
screen so you can use the same
position later. Note the distance from the eyes to the computer screen, as it will be needed
later in the recording to position Subject the same distance from the computer.
 Subject should not be in contact
with any metal objects. Subject should not be in contact with any metal objects (faucets, pipes, etc.)
and should remove any wrist or ankle bracelets.
END OF SETUP

B. CALIBRATION
Calibration establishes the hardware’s internal parameters (such as gain, offset, and scaling) and is critical for optimum
performance. Pay close attention to Calibration.
FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION
1. Click Calibrate. After Calibrate is pressed, a prompt will be generated (Fig.10.8) to emphasize
that Subject does not move his/her head during calibration.

Fig. 10.8

After OK is pressed, a dot will begin a counterclockwise rotation around the


screen. Subject should follow the dot with eyes only and should not move
head.
2. Click OK. This will begin Calibration. The journal will be hidden from view during
calibration.
3. Subject should follow the dot on the Subject should follow the dot around the screen with eyes only and should not
screen with eyes only. move his /her head.
This procedure will continue for about 10 seconds and will stop automatically.
4. Check calibration data: At the end of Calibration, the screen should resemble Fig. 10.9.

 If similar, proceed to Data


Recording.
 If different, Redo Calibration.

Fig. 10.9

There should be fluctuation in the data for each channel. If data resembles Fig.
10.9, proceed to the Data Recording section.
If Subject did not follow the dot on the screen or blinked, giving large data
spikes or jitter, or if an electrode “peeled up,” giving large baseline drift, click
END OF CALIBRATION Redo Calibration and repeat the entire calibration sequence.
Lesson 10: EOG I Page 7

C. RECORDING LESSON DATA


FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION
1. Prepare for the recording. There are eight lesson segments:
Seg. 1-2: real and simulated pendulum Seg. 7: read aloud
Seg. 3-4: real and simulated vertical tracking Seg. 8: optional dot plot
Seg. 5-6: read silently (easy and hard)
In order to work efficiently, read this entire section so you will know what to
do before recording.
Hints for obtaining optimal data:
a) Always track the object with your eyes and not your head.
b) Subject should focus on one point of the object, and maintain that focus
while following it around.
c) Subject needs to sit so that head movement is minimized during
recording.
d) There should be enough space near Subject so that an object can be
moved around the head at a distance of about 25 cm (10").
e) When moving the object, the Director should try to keep it at the same
distance from Subject’s head.
f) During recording, Subject should not blink. If unavoidable, the
Recorder should mark the data.
g) Make sure electrodes do not “peel up.”
h) The larger the monitor, the better the data results from the eye tracking
portion of this lesson.
2. Subject and Director should get in Position Subject facing away from computer screen. Director should hold a
position. pendulum in front of Subject’s head such that pendulum is centered with
 Director should hold pendulum in front Subject’s head and Subject’s eyes are looking straight ahead.
of Subject.
 Subject should pick a focal point on the
pendulum so that the eyes remain
horizontal.
SEGMENT 1 — Pendulum
3. Click Record. When you click Record, the recording will begin and an append marker
labeled “Pendulum” will automatically be inserted. You may edit the marker
label after acquisition.
TIP In this lesson, Display > Autoscale
Waveforms and Autoscale
Horizontal
are enabled DURING recording.

4. Set pendulum in motion. When Record is clicked, the recording will begin and an append marker
labeled Pendulum will automatically be inserted.
5. Subject tracks movement until pendulum
stops. Subject should be seated and relaxed and should track movement with eyes
only, trying not to move head or blink. Ideally, eyes will only move laterally to
6. Click Suspend.
follow the object.
When Suspend is clicked, the recording will halt so you can review the data.
Data should resemble Fig. 10.10.
Recording continues…
Page 8 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

7. Review the data.


 If similar, go to Step 8.

Fig. 10.10 Pendulum movement

 If different, click Redo. Data would be different if it did not show decreasing amplitude. If different,
click Redo and repeat Steps 2-7; the last recorded data segment will be
erased.
Note If a metronome was used instead of a pendulum, the signal pattern
will have a constant instead of diminishing amplitude.
SEGMENT 2 — Simulate Pendulum
8. Click Resume. When Resume is clicked, the recording will continue and an append marker
labeled Simulate Pendulum will be automatically inserted.
9. Subject simulates pendulum movement. Subject simulates pendulum movement (decreasing swing cycles) with eyes
only until the display shows no swing cycles. Subject should remain relaxed
10. After the display shows no swing cycles
and seated and should try not to move or blink during the recording.
(no movement), Recorder clicks
Suspend.
11. Review the data. When Suspend is clicked, the recording will halt so you can review the data.
Data should resemble Fig. 10.11.
 If similar, go to Step 12.

Fig. 10.11 Simulated pendulum movement

 If different, click Redo. The data would be different if it did not show decreasing amplitude. If data is
different, click Redo and repeat Steps 8-11; the last data segment you recorded
will be erased.
SEGMENT 3 — Vertical Tracking
12. Subject and Director should get in Position Subject such that the eyes are in line with the center of the computer
position. screen, using the same distance from the Signal Check.
 Director holds pen in front of Subject. Director should hold a pen (or other real object) in front of Subject’s head at a
 Subject picks a focal point on the pen distance of about 25 cm (10″). The pen should be centered with Subject’s
so that the eyes remain horizontal. head, so that Subject’s eyes are looking straight ahead.
Subject’s eyes should not move laterally (left or right).

Recording continues…
Lesson 10: EOG I Page 9

13. Click Record. When Record is clicked, the recording will begin and an append marker
labeled Vertical Tracking will automatically be inserted.
14. Subject tracks pen vertically as Director
moves it through Subject’s visual field Subject should be seated and relaxed and should track movement with eyes
(from center to upper and lower edges of only, trying not to move head or blink. Ideally, eyes will only move vertically
visual field and then return to center). to follow the object.
15. Click Suspend. When Suspend is clicked, the recording will halt so you can review the data.
Data should resemble Fig. 10.12.
16. Review the data.
 If similar, go to Step 17.

Fig. 10.12 Vertical tracking movement

 If different, click Redo. Data would be different if it did not show decreasing amplitude. If different,
click Redo and repeat Steps 12-16; the last recorded data segment will be
erased.
Note If a metronome was used instead of a pendulum, the signal pattern
will have a constant instead of diminishing amplitude.

SEGMENT 4 — Simulate Vertical Tracking


17. Click Resume. When Resume is clicked, the recording will continue and an append marker
labeled Vertical Simulation will be automatically inserted.
18. Subject simulates vertical tracking Subject simulates vertical tracking movement (from center to upper and lower
movement (from center to upper and edges of visual field and then return to center) with eyes only until the display
lower edges of visual field and then shows no swing cycles. Subject should remain relaxed and seated and should
return to center). try not to move or blink during the recording.
19. After the display shows no swing cycles When Suspend is clicked, the recording will halt so you can review the data.
(no movement), Recorder clicks
Suspend.
20. Review the data. Data should resemble Fig. 10.13.
 If similar, go to Step 21.

Fig. 10.13 Simulated vertical tracking movement

 If different, click Redo. The data would be different if it did not show decreasing amplitude. If data is
different, click Redo and repeat Steps 17-20; the last data segment you
recorded will be erased.
Recording continues…
Page 10 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

SEGMENT 5 — Read Silently - easy


21. Subject and Director should get in
position.
 Director should hold reading material
in front of Subject.
 Subject should be able to read full
passage without moving head.
22. Click Resume. When Resume is clicked, the recording will begin and an append marker
labeled Read silently 1 will automatically be inserted.
23. Subject reads Passage 1 silently (to self) Subject should read silently (to self) for 20 seconds. Subject should remain
for 20 seconds. seated, in a relaxed state and should try not to move or blink during the
recording.
24. Recorder clicks Suspend after 20 sec. When Suspend is clicked, the recording will halt so you can review the data.
25. Review the data. Data should resemble Fig. 10.14.
 If similar, go to Step 26.

Fig. 10.14 Reading silently 1 (easy)

 If different, click Redo. Data would be different if it did not show saccades. If data is different, click
Redo and repeat Steps 21-25; the last recorded data segment will be erased.
SEGMENT 6 — Read Silently - hard
26. Subject and Director should get in
position.
 Director should hold reading material
in front of Subject.
 Subject should be able to read full
passage without moving head.
27. Click Resume. When Resume is clicked, the recording will begin and an append marker
labeled Read silently 2 will automatically be inserted.
28. Subject read Passage 2 silently (to self) Subject should read silently (to self) for 20 seconds. Subject should remain
for 20 seconds. seated, in a relaxed state and should try not to move or blink during the
recording.
29. Recorder clicks Suspend after 20 sec. When Suspend is clicked, the recording will halt so you can review the data.
30. Review the data. Data should resemble Fig. 10.15.
 If similar, go to Step 31.

Recording continues…
Lesson 10: EOG I Page 11

Fig. 10.15 Reading silently 2 (challenging)

 If different, click Redo. Data would be different if it did not show saccades. If data is different, click
Redo and repeat Steps 26-30; the last recorded data segment will be erased.
SEGMENT 7 — Read Aloud
31. Subject and Director should get in
position.
 Director should hold reading material
in front of Subject.
 Subject should be able to read full
passage without moving head.
32. Click Resume. When Resume is clicked, the recording will begin and an append marker
labeled Read aloud will automatically be inserted.
33. Subject reads Passage 2 aloud for 20 Subject should Passage 2 aloud until the recording stops. Subject should
seconds. remain relaxed and seated and should try not to move or blink during the
recording.
34. Recorder clicks Suspend after 20 sec.
When Suspend is clicked, the recording will halt so you can review the data.
35. Review the data. Data should resemble Fig. 10.16. Saccades should be slower (wider jerks) than
in the Read Silently segments.
 If similar, go to Step 36.

Fig. 10.16 Reading Passage 2 aloud

 If different, click Redo. Data would be different if it did not show saccades. If data is different, click
Redo and repeat Steps 31-35; the last recorded data segment will be erased.
36. Optional: Click Resume to record Optional: You can record additional segments by clicking Resume instead of
additional segments. Stop. A time marker will be inserted at the start of each added segment.
37. Click Stop.
38. Click Yes.

Recording continues…
Page 12 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

Optional: Segment 8 – Dot Plot


39. Click Dot Plot. To explore microsaccadic eye movement, click Dot Plot and then click OK.
Subject should focus on the center of the black cross. After three seconds, a
40. Click OK. dot will appear. Continue to focus on the center of the cross.
41. Click Stop.  Subject should try to maintain fixed focus on
center of display.
 Colored dot position represents point of
focus.
 Fixed focus would hold the colored dot in
center of cross.
 Dot movement indicates microsaccadic
eye movement (proportional to the number
Fig. 10.17 Optional Dot Plot
of degrees Subject's eyes moved from
center).
Note that data for this segment will NOT be saved.
42. Click Done. When Done is clicked a dialog will be generated. Make your choice, and
continue as directed.
43. Choose an option and click OK.
44. Remove the electrodes. Remove the electrode cable pinch connectors. Peel off and discard the
electrodes; BIOPAC electrodes are not reusable. Wash the electrode gel
residue from the skin, using soap and water. The electrodes may leave a slight
END OF RECORDING ring on the skin for a few hours, which is quite normal.

V. DATA ANALYSIS
FAST TRACK Details
1. Enter the Review Saved Data mode. To review saved data, choose Analyze current data file from the Done
dialog after recording data, or choose Review Saved Data from the Lessons
menu and browse to the required file.
 Note Channel Number (CH) The data window should come up the same as Fig. 10.18.
designation:
Channel Displays
CH40 Horizontal
CH 41 Vertical
 Note measurement box settings:
Channel Measurement
CH 40 Delta T
CH 40 P-P
CH 40 Slope

Fig. 10.18

The measurement boxes are above the marker region in the data window.
Each measurement has three sections: channel number, measurement type,
and result. The first two sections are pull-down menus that are activated when
you click them.
Brief definition of measurements:
Delta T: The Delta Time measurement is the difference in time between
the end and beginning of the selected area, which is the duration of the
Data Analysis continues… selected area.
Lesson 10: EOG I Page 13

P-P. The p-p (peak-to-peak) measurement shows the difference between


the maximum amplitude value in the selected range and the minimum
amplitude value in the selected range.
Slope: uses the endpoints of the selected area to determine the difference
in magnitude divided by the time interval; slope indicates the relative
speed of eye movement.
The “selected area” is the area selected by the I-beam tool (including
endpoints).
2. Set up your display window for optimal Segment 1 data begins at the append marker labeled “Pendulum” at Time 0
viewing of the Pendulum tracking data. and continues to the next append marker.
The following tools help you adjust the data window:
Display menu: Autoscale horizontal Autoscale waveforms, Zoom Previous
Scroll Bars: Time (Horizontal); Amplitude (Vertical)
Cursor Tools: Zoom Tool
Buttons: Overlap, Split, Show Grid, Hide Grid
3. Measure the amplitude change for each
pendulum tracking cycle (diminishing
cycle).

 A Table 10.1

10.19—Note: The time interval will vary across subjects


4. Scroll to Simulate pendulum data and Segment 2 data begins at the append marker labeled “Simulate pendulum” and
measure the amplitude change for each continues to the next append marker.
simulation cycle.

A
5. Scroll to Vertical Tracking data. Segment 3 data begins at the append marker labeled “Vertical Tracking” and
continues to the next append marker.
The following tools help you adjust the data window:
Display menu: Autoscale horizontal Autoscale waveforms, Zoom Previous
Scroll Bars: Time (Horizontal); Amplitude (Vertical)
Cursor Tools: Zoom Tool
Buttons: Overlap, Split, Show Grid, Hide Grid
6. Measure the amplitude change for each
object tracking cycle (diminishing
cycle).

 B Table 10.2
7. Scroll to Simulate vertical tracking Segment 4 data begins at the append marker labeled “Simulate vertical
data and measure the amplitude change tracking” and continues to the next append marker.
for each simulation cycle.

B
Data Analysis continues…
Page 14 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

8. Scroll to the Read Silently - easy data. Segment 5 data begins at the append marker labeled “Read Silently - Easy”
and continues to the next append marker.
9. Find the saccades in the data You can paste measurements into the Journal to record the results of each
(Fig. 10.20). saccade per line of reading.

 C Table 10.3

Fig. 10.20

10. Scroll to Read Silently - Hard data and Segment 6 data begins at the append marker labeled “Read Silently - Easy”
repeat Steps 9-11. and continues to the next append marker.

C
11. Scroll to Read Aloud data and repeat Segment 7 data begins at the append marker labeled “Read aloud” and
Steps 9-11. continues until the end of the recording.

C
12. Zoom in on a small section of data to Use the horizontal scroll bar if needed to find a segment similar to Fig. 10.21.
find a part of the data segment with a
small spike or bump, indicating flicking
movement (Fig. 10.21) and measure the
duration and slope.

 D Table 10.4

Fig. 10.21 Flicking (small bump in data)


13. Count the number of flicking movements Use the horizontal scroll bar to move through the data.
in one-second intervals from 1-4
The slow drifting movements and flicking movements are small movements,
seconds.
so you will need to Zoom and Autoscale waveforms. The flicking
D movements will occur as abrupt directional changes (steep slopes) and for
shorter durations than the drifting movements.
The flicking movements are difficult to measure. If it is too difficult to note
them in your data, state that in the Data Report.
14. Save or print the data file.  You may save the data to another location, save notes that are in the
15. Quit the program. journal, or print the data file.
END OF DATA ANALYSIS

END OF LESSON 10
Complete the Lesson 10 Data Report that follows.
Lesson 10: EOG I Page 15

ELECTROOCULOGRAM
EOG
DATA REPORT
Student’s Name:
Lab Section:
Date:

I. Data and Calculations


Subject Profile
Name Height

Age Gender: Male / Female Weight

A. Horizontal Tracking—Complete Table 10.1. Be careful to be consistent with units (msec vs secs).
Table 10.1 Horizontal Tracking vs. Simulation
Pendulum (Segment 1) Simulation (Segment 2)
Cycle

B. Vertical Tracking—Complete Table 10.2. Be careful to be consistent with units (msec vs secs).
Table 10.2 Vertical Tracking vs. Simulation
Real Object (Segment 3) Simulation (Segment 4)
Cycle

7
Page 16 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

C. Saccades—Complete Table 10.3.


Table 10.3 Saccades
Read Silently - Easy Read Silently - Hard Read Aloud
Measurement st nd st nd st
1 line 2 line 1 line 2 line 1 line 2nd line
Number of saccades

Duration of saccade
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
Total duration of
saccades/line

Total reading time/line

Saccade % of reading time


total

D. Optional: Flicking—Complete Table 10.4 if your instructor asked you to record this data.
Note: You only need to select one example of a flicking movement.
Table 10.4 Segment 2 Data of Eye Orientation with Object Movement
Eye Orientation  Stationary Object Moving Object—Tracking
Measurement Flicking Up Down Up

II. Questions

E. Focusing a camera changes the distance between the lens and the film. Does the eye focus by changing the distance
between the lens and the retina? Explain your answer.

F. Define the following terms:


Cone

Rod

Fovea

Visual Field

Visual Fixation
Lesson 10: EOG I Page 17

Saccade / Microsaccade

G. Why is vision in darkness more effective when focusing away from the fovea rather than focusing directly on the fovea?

H. Explain the difference between “voluntary fixation” and “involuntary fixation”:

I. Examine the data in Table 10.1 and answer the following questions
a.) Did the amplitude increase, decrease, or remain constant during pendulum movement? Explain

b.) Did the amplitude increase, decrease, or remain constant during simulated movement? Explain

c.) Did the period frequency increase, decrease, or remain constant during pendulum movement? Explain

d.) Did the period frequency increase, decrease, or remain constant during simulated movement? Explain

e.) Did the relative speed of the eye movements (slope) increase, decrease, or remain constant during pendulum movement?
Explain

J. Examine the data in Table 10.2 and answer the following questions:
a.) Did the amplitude increase, decrease, or remain constant during object movement? Explain
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

b.) Did the amplitude increase, decrease, or remain constant during simulated movement? Explain
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

c.) Did the period frequency increase, decrease, or remain constant during object movement? Explain
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

d.) Did the period frequency increase, decrease, or remain constant during simulated movement? Explain
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

e.) Did the relative speed of the eye movements (slope) increase, decrease, or remain constant during object movement?
Explain
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

K. Examine the data in Table 10.3 and answer the following questions:
a.) Is eye movement slower or faster when you read a challenging passage? Explain
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

b.) Is eye movement slower or faster when you read aloud? Explain
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 18 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
L. Compare your saccade results with at least three students. What is the range of variation in % time of saccades per line?
What factors might explain the variation?
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________
M. Name the cranial nerves tested and the extraocular muscles tested when the subject is asked to follow the eraser on a pencil as
you move it in a one foot circle, two feet from their face.

Cranial Nerves Extraocular Muscles

N. Define corneal–retinal potential (CRP) and explain its relation to electrooculography and the electrooculogram.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________

End of Lesson 10 Data Report


Lesson 10: EOG I Page 19

Sample Reading

Saccadic movements jump from place to place.

Alas, poor Yorick, I knew him well.

What do these three things have in common?


Two young lovers whose eyes meet across a crowded
room.
A Michael Crichton novel.
The final scene of Casablanca.
Physiology Lessons Lesson 11
for use with the
Biopac Student Lab
REACTION TIME I

Richard Pflanzer, Ph.D.


Associate Professor
Indiana University School of Medicine
Purdue University School of Science

J.C. Uyehara, Ph.D.


Biologist
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

William McMullen
Vice President
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

BIOPAC® Systems, Inc.


42 Aero Camino, Goleta, CA 93117
(805) 685-0066, Fax (805) 685-0067
info@biopac.com
www.biopac.com

Manual Revision 3.7.6


09092009
 BIOPAC Systems, Inc.
Page 4 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
II. EXPERIMENTAL OBJECTIVES
1) Observe the effects of learning and physiological processes on reaction times.
2) Compare reaction times with two presentation schedules: fixed intervals and pseudo-random intervals.
3) Calculate statistics of group mean, variance, and standard deviation.

III. MATERIALS
 BIOPAC hand switch (SS10L)
 BIOPAC headphones (OUT1)
 Biopac Student Lab System: software BSL 3.7.3 or above
data acquisition unit MP36, MP35, or MP30 (Windows only)
 Computer System

IV. EXPERIMENTAL METHODS

 For further explanation, use the online support options under the Help Menu.
A. SET UP
FAST TRACK Set Up DETAILED EXPLANATION OF SET UP STEPS
1. Turn your computer ON.  The desktop should appear on the monitor. If it does not appear, ask
the laboratory instructor for assistance.
2. Make sure the BIOPAC MP3X unit is OFF. 
3. Plug the equipment in as follows:
Hand switch (SS10L) — CH 1
Headphone (OUT1) — back of unit
4. Turn ON the BIOPAC MP3X unit.
5. Start the BIOPAC Student Lab Program.

Fig. 11.1 Equipment Connections

6. Choose lesson “L11” and click OK. Lesson L11 is Reaction Time I.

7. Type in a unique filename. No two people can have the same filename, so use a unique identifier, such
as the Subject’s nickname or student ID#. 
8. Click OK. This ends default Setup.

9. Optional: Set Preferences. This lesson has an optional Preferences setting for headphone volume:
Headphone Volume: increase or decrease volume as desired
 Choose File > Preferences.
 Select Headphone Volume.
 Set the desired volume and click Apply.

END OF SETUP
Lesson 11: Reaction Time I Page 5
B. CALIBRATION

This calibration procedure will check that the headphones and SS10L are properly connected. Otherwise, there are no settings to
adjust or change.

FAST TRACK Calibration DETAILED EXPLANATION OF CALIBRATION STEPS


1. Prepare the Subject for the calibration Subject should be seated in a
recording. relaxed state, with headphones on,
eyes closed. Eyes closed

Subject should hold the hand switch


with his/her dominant hand, such
that the thumb is ready to press the
ready to
button. push button

Fig. 11.2
Note When Calibrate is clicked in the next step, the volume through the
headphones may be very loud due to system feedback. You may
position the headphones slightly off the ear to reduce the sound or if
using an MP3X unit, click Redo Calibration and then set File >
Preferences > Headphone Volume before clicking Calibrate.
2. Click Calibrate and then click OK. Before the calibration begins, a prompt will be generated reminding you to
press the button when you hear a click. Click OK to begin the calibration
recording.
3. Press the SS10L hand switch when you hear When pressing the hand switch, Subject should briefly depress the button,
a click. then release; Subject should not hold the button down or press it more
than once.
You should hear the click approximately four seconds into the recording.
4. Wait for the calibration to end. The calibration will run for 8 seconds and will automatically stop, so let it
run its course.
5. Review the data on the screen. Your screen should be similar to Fig. 11.3.
 If similar, proceed to the Data Recording
Section.

Fig. 11.3 Sample calibration data

 If the Calibrate button reappears in the If there was no signal detected from the hand switch (flat line at 0
window, check connections and repeat the millivolts), the program will automatically return you to the beginning of
calibration procedure, making sure to press the calibration procedure.
button firmly.
If this happens: Check the connections to the hand switch, make sure
you’re pressing the button firmly, and redo the calibration procedure.
 If different, Redo Calibration. If your calibration screen does not resemble Fig. 11.3, you need to repeat
calibration to obtain a similar screen.
Data might be different if:
a) The baseline is not 0 millivolts.
b) The data is excessively noisy, meaning more than approximately
1 mV peak-to-peak.
END OF CALIBRATION Note: Your data may be a little more or less noisy than the example above.
Page 6 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
C. RECORDING LESSON DATA
FAST TRACK Recording DETAILED EXPLANATION OF RECORDING STEPS
1. Prepare for the recording. You will record four segments, each requiring you to press a button
(response) as soon as possible after hearing a click (stimulus):
a. Segments 1 and 2 present the stimuli at pseudo-random (1-10
IMPORTANT second) intervals.
DO NOT manually insert a marker in any b. Segments 3 and 4 present the stimuli at fixed intervals (every 4
recording segment of this lesson. The seconds).
software will insert markers as needed. In order to work efficiently, read this entire section so you will know what
to do before recording.
Note It is hard to cheat on this lesson. The BIOPAC Student Lab
software only looks for one response per stimulus, and it ignores
responses that occur before the first stimulus, so it doesn’t help to
press the push-button switch on the SS10L 10 times before you
hear the first stimulus. If a button press occurs before the stimulus
or more than one second after the stimulus, it will not be used in
the reaction time summary.
2. Prepare the Subject and Director for the Subject should be seated in a relaxed state, with headphones on, eyes
recording. closed. The Subject should hold the hand switch with his/her dominant
hand, such that the thumb is ready to press the button.
The Director needs to watch the screen and invoke the Record and
Resume button as required.
Segment 1: Pseudo-random Trial 1
3. Click Record. When you click Record, a pseudo-random presentation trial will begin and
an append marker labeled “pseudo-random” will automatically be inserted.
4. Subject should press and release the push- Pseudo-random presentation: The stimulus clicks will come at pseudo-
button switch on the SS10L at the sound of random intervals, in this case at least one second apart but no more than ten
each stimulus. seconds apart.
As soon as you hear each click through the headphone, press and release
the push-button switch on the SS10L.
An event marker will automatically be inserted each time a stimulus click
is output. Also, each time you press the push-button switch on the SS10L,
an upward pointing “pulse” will be displayed on the screen.
The recording will suspend automatically after ten clicks.
5. Review the data on the screen. After ten 10 clicks, the resulting graph should resemble Fig. 11.4. A pulse
should be displayed after each event marker if the SS10L push-button
 If similar, go to Step 6. switch was pressed correctly.

Fig. 11.4 Clicks indicated by pulse and marker

Recording continues…
Lesson 11: Reaction Time I Page 7

 If different, click Redo. The data might be different if:


a) The recording did not capture a response pulse for each click. Note: You
are allowed to miss some responses, but if you miss more than two, you
should consider redoing the recording.
b) The response pulse occurs before the event marker, indicating the
Subject responded prematurely.
c) The duration of the response pulse extends into the next marker,
indicating the Subject held the SS10L push-button switch down too long.
Segment 2: Pseudo-random Trial 2
6. Click Resume. When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append marker
labeled “repeat pseudo-random” will be automatically inserted. You will
record a second pseudo-random presentation trial.
7. Subject should press and release the As soon as you hear each click through the headphone, press and release the
push-button switch on the SS10L at the push-button switch on the SS10L.
sound of each click.
An event marker will automatically be inserted each time a stimulus click is
output. Also, each time you press the push-button switch on the SS10L, an
upward pointing “pulse” will be displayed on the screen.
The recording will suspend automatically after ten clicks.
8. Review the data on the screen. After ten 10 clicks, the resulting graph should resemble Fig. 11.4 above.
 If similar, go to Step 9. Data might be different for the same reasons as in Step 5.
 If different, click Redo. To redo recording, click Redo and repeat Steps 6-8.

Segment 3: Fixed Interval Trial 1


9. Click Resume. When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append marker
labeled “fixed-interval” will be automatically inserted.
You will record a fixed-interval presentation trial.
10. Subject should press and release the Fixed interval presentation: The clicks will come at fixed intervals, every four
push-button switch on the SS10L at the seconds.
sound of each click.
As soon as you hear each click through the headphone, press and release the
push-button switch on the SS10L.
The recording will suspend automatically after ten clicks.
11. Review the data on the screen. After 10 clicks have been output, the resulting graph should resemble Fig.
11.4 above.
 If similar, go to Step 12.
Data might be different for the same reasons as with Fig. 11.4.
 If different, click Redo.
To redo, click Redo and repeat Steps 9-11.
Segment 4: Fixed Interval Trial 2
12. Click Resume. When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append marker
labeled “repeat fixed-interval” will be automatically inserted. You will record
a second fixed-interval presentation trial.
13. Subject should press and release the As soon as you hear each click through the headphone, press and release the
push-button switch on the SS10L at the push-button switch on the SS10L.
sound of each click.
The recording will suspend automatically after ten clicks.
14. Review the data on the screen. After 10 clicks, the resulting graph should resemble Fig. 11.4 above.
 If similar, go to Step 15. Data might be different for the same reasons as with Fig. 11.4. To redo, click
Redo and repeat Steps 12-14.
 If different, click Redo.

Recording continues…
Page 8 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

15. Click Done. When you click Done, a pop-up window with options will appear. Make your
choice, and continue as directed.
If choosing the “Record from another Subject” option, remember that each
Subject will need to use a unique file name.
16. Unplug the hand switch and headphones.
END OF RECORDING

V. DATA ANALYSIS
FAST TRACK Data Analysis DETAILED EXPLANATION OF DATA ANALYSIS STEPS

1. Enter the Review Saved Data mode.  Enter Review Saved Data from the Lessons menu.
 Note channel designation:
Channel Displays
CH 1 Hand Switch
 Note measurement box settings:
Channel Measurement
CH 1 Delta T

Fig. 11.5 Reaction times for pseudo-random trial

The measurement boxes are above the marker region in the data window.
Each measurement has three sections: channel number, measurement type,
and result. The first two sections are pull-down menus that are activated
when you click them.

 A brief description of these measurements follows.


Delta T: The Delta Time measurement is the difference in time between
the end and beginning if the selected area, which is the duration of the
selected area.
Note When Done was pressed in the final recording segment, the program
automatically calculated all 10 reaction times and averaged reaction
times for each trial and placed them in the journal (Fig. 11.5). Use this
journal information to fill in your data report.

Data Analysis continues…


Lesson 11: Reaction Time I Page 9

2. Setup your display window for optimal The “selected area” is the area selected by the I-Beam tool (including the
viewing of the first event marker and pulse endpoints).
of the first data segment
(Fig. 11.6).

Fig. 11.6 First event marker and pulse segment

 The following tools help you adjust the data window.


Display menu: Autoscale horizontal, Autoscale waveforms, Zoom Previous
Scroll Bars: Time (Horizontal); Amplitude (Vertical)
Cursor Tools: Zoom Tool
Buttons: Overlap, Split, Show Grid, Hide Grid
3. Select an area from the first event marker to The first event marker indicates the start of the stimulus click. The leading
the leading edge of the first pulse (Fig. 11.7) edge of the pulse indicates when the button was first pressed. Leading edge
and note the Delta T measurement. is defined as the point where the pulse first reaches its peak (Fig. 11.7). The
threshold that the program uses to calculate reaction time is 1.5 mV.
A

Fig. 11.7 Zooming in on a single stimulus-response pass. The reaction time


for this event is 0.218 seconds—see the Delta T result.

4. Look at the first reaction time result in the The two measurements should be approximately the same.
Journal and compare this to the Delta T
measurement found above.
5. Repeat the steps above on other pulses
until you are convinced that the Journal
 Note: You can move around using the marker tools.
readings are accurate.
6. Transfer your data from the Journal to the This step may not be necessary if your Instructor allows you to print out your
Data Report. Journal and staple it to the Data Report.

B

Data Analysis continues…


Page 10 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

7. Collect data from at least five other


students in your class as needed to
complete the Data Report.

 C, D, E

8. Save or print the data file.  You may save the data to a drive, save notes that are in the journal, or
9. Exit the program. print the data file.
END OF DATA ANALYSIS

END OF LESSON 11
Complete the Lesson 11 Report that follows.
Lesson 11: Reaction Time I Page 11

REACTION TIME

DATA REPORT
Student’s Name:

Lab Section:

Date:

I. Data and Calculations


Subject Profile

Name Height

Age Gender: Male / Female Weight

A. Manual calculation of reaction time

Calculate the reaction time for the first click in Segment 1: Delta T =

B. Summary of Subject’s Results (copy from the software Journal)


Table 11.1
REACTION TIMES (ms)
STIMULUS Pseudo Random Fixed Interval
NUMBER Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 Segment 4
(1st trial) (2nd trial) (1st trial) (2nd trial)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Mean
Page 12 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

C. Comparison of reaction time to number of presentations


Complete Table 11.2 with data from the first fixed-interval trial (data Segment 3) and calculate the mean for each
presentation to determine if reaction times vary as each Subject progresses through the series of stimulus events.
Table 11.2 Comparison of Reaction Times
Pseudo-random Trial 1 Data Fixed Interval Trial 1 Data
Student’s (Segment 1) (Segment 3)
Name Stimulus Stimulus Stimulus Stimulus Stimulus Stimulus
1 5 10 1 5 10
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Calculate the Means:

D. Group Summary
Complete Table 11.3 with the mean for 5 students and calculate the group mean.
Table 11.3
Class Data Pseudo-random trials Fixed-interval trials
Student Means First Second First Second
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Calculate the
Group Means:
E. Variance and Standard Deviation

Where
n  number of students
Xj  mean reaction time for each student
X  Group mean (constant for all students)
n

  Sum of all student data


j1

Calculate the variance and standard deviation for 5 students with data from Segment 2: Pseudo-random Trial 2 (Table
11.4) and from Segment 4: Fixed Interval Trial 2 (Table 11.5).
Lesson 11: Reaction Time I Page 13

Table 11.4 Segment 2: Pseudo-random Trial 2 Data

ENTER ENTER CALCULATE CALCULATE


Mean Reaction
time for Student Group Mean Deviation Deviation2
2
Student (X j ) (X) (X j - X) (X j - X)
1
2
3
4
5
Sum the data for all students = =

Variance (2) = Multiply by 0.25 = =

Standard Deviation = Take the square root of the variance =


=

Table 11.5 Segment 4: Fixed Interval Trial 2 Data

ENTER ENTER CALCULATE CALCULATE


Mean Reaction
time for Student Group Mean Deviation Deviation2
2
Student (X j ) (X) (X j - X) (X j - X)
1
2
3
4
5
Sum the data for all students = =

Variance (2) = Multiply by 0.25 = =

Standard Deviation = Square root of Variance = =

II. Questions
F. Describe the changes that occurred in the mean reaction time between the 1st and 10th stimuli presentation:
For Segment 1:

For Segment 2:

Which segment showed the greatest change in mean reaction time? Segment 1 Segment 2

G. Refer to Table 11.2 and Table 11.3:

Estimate the minimal reaction time when reaction time becomes constant: sec
What physiological processes occur between stimuli presentation and pressing the hand switch?
Page 14 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

H. Refer to Table 11.2:

Which presentation schedule had a lower group mean? Pseudo-random Fixed-interval

I. Refer to Table 11.2 and Table 11.3:

Which of the presentation schedules seems to have less variation (lower variance and lower standard
deviation)? Pseudo-random Fixed-interval

J. Refer to Table 11.2 and Table 11.3:

State a plausible relationship between the difficulty of a task and the reaction time statistics: mean, variance,
and standard deviation.

K. What differences would you predict in reaction times and learning between your right and left hands?

End of Lesson 11 Data Report


Physiology Lessons Lesson 12
for use with the PULMONARY FUNCTION I
Biopac Student Lab Volumes and Capacities

Richard Pflanzer, Ph.D.


Associate Professor Emeritus
Indiana University School of Medicine
Purdue University School of Science

J.C. Uyehara, Ph.D.


Biologist
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

William McMullen
Vice President
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

BIOPAC® Systems, Inc.


42 Aero Camino, Goleta, CA 93117
(805) 685-0066, Fax (805) 685-0067
info@biopac.com
www.biopac.com

Manual Revision L3.7.6


09032009
 BIOPAC Systems, Inc.
Page 6 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

II. EXPERIMENTAL OBJECTIVES


1.) To observe experimentally, record and/or calculate selected pulmonary volumes and capacities.
2.) To compare the observed values of volume and capacity with average values.
3.) To compare the normal values of pulmonary volumes and capacities of subjects differing in sex, age, weight, and
height.

III. MATERIALS
 BIOPAC Airflow Transducer with removable, cleanable head (SS11LA)
o If using older SS11L transducers with non-removable head, insert into the larger diameter port.
 BIOPAC Bacteriological Filter (AFT1): one per subject; plus, if using calibration syringe, one dedicated to syringe
 BIOPAC Disposable Mouthpiece (AFT2)
 BIOPAC Nose Clip (AFT3)
 BIOPAC Calibration Syringe: 0.6-Liter (AFT6 or AFT6A+AFT11A) or 2-Liter (AFT26)
 optional—BIOPAC Autoclavable Mouthpiece (AFT8)
 Biopac Student Lab System: software BSL 3.7.5 or above
data acquisition unit MP36, MP35, MP30 (Windows only), or MP45
 Computer System

IV. EXPERIMENTAL METHODS

 For further explanation, use the online support options under the Help Menu.
A. SETUP
FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION
1. Turn your computer ON.  The desktop should appear on the monitor. If it does not appear, ask the
2. Make sure the BIOPAC MP3X unit is OFF. laboratory instructor for assistance.
3. Plug the airflow transducer (SS11LA) into BIOPAC MP3X unit
Channel 1.
4. Turn ON the MP3X Unit.
5. Place a filter onto the end of the calibration
syringe.
Plugs into CH1

SS11LA
Airflow Transducer

Fig. 12.8 MP3X (top) and MP45 (bottom) equipment connections

 SS11LA needs 5-10 minutes to warm up; during this time, the baseline
Setup continues… offset is changing slightly.
Lesson 12: Pulmonary Function I Page 7

6. Insert the Calibration Syringe/Filter The bacteriological filter must be used between the transducer and calibration
Assembly into the airflow transducer (Fig. syringe in order for the data to be accurate. The filter is required for calibration
12.9). and recording because it forces the air to move smoothly through the transducer.
This assembly can be left connected for future use. You only need to replace the
filter if the paper inside the filter tears.
IMPORTANT!
Always insert on the
side labeled “Inlet”

Fig. 12.9
Always insert syringe assembly on the transducer side labeled “Inlet” so that
the transducer cable exits on the left, as shown in Fig. 12.9.
IMPORTANT: If your lab sterilizes the airflow heads after each use, make
sure a clean head is installed now.
7. Start the Biopac Student Lab program. 
8. Choose Lesson 12 (L12-Pulmonary
Function I) and click OK.
Use a unique identifier. Click OK to end default Setup.
9. Type in your filename and click OK.
10. Optional: Set Preferences. This lesson has optional Preferences for data and display while recording. Per
your Lab Instructor’s guidelines, you may set:
 Choose File > Preferences. Calibration Syringe Size: 0.61 L (AFT6A/6), 1 L, 2 L (AFT26), 3 L, 4 L, or 5 L
 Select an option. Calibration Syringe Values: set each time or set once and use stored values for
 Select the desired setting and click the same SS11LA/L with the same MP45
OK. Residual Volume: RV cannot be determined using a normal spirometer or
airflow transducer, so the BSL software sets a value
between 0 and 5 liters (default is 1 L)
Journal Text: show minimum guiding text vs. detailed text
Grids: show or hide gridlines
Recording Length: allow from 30 seconds to 30 minutes of data
END OF SETUP
Page 8 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
B. CALIBRATION
Calibration establishes the hardware’s internal parameters (such as gain, offset, and scaling) and is critical for optimum
performance. Calibration will vary based on the Preference set by your lab instructor.
Pay close attention to the journal instructions for the entire calibration.
FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION

1. Hold the Airflow transducer upright Calibration Stage 1 zeroes the baseline, which is
and still (Fig. 12.10). critical for Airflow to Volume
calculation. For this stage, there must be no
airflow through the transducer and the
Stage 1 – ALWAYS REQUIRED

transducer must be upright and still as the


baseline can shift slightly with orientation
changes due to gravity effects.

Fig. 12.10
2. Click Calibrate. The first calibration stage will run for 4 seconds.

Figure 12.11 Calibration stage 1 – always required

3. IF PROMPTED—Complete the If prompted, read the Stage 2 procedure BEFORE clicking OK.
calibration syringe assembly BEFORE
clicking OK.
a.) Place a filter onto the end of the
calibration syringe.
b.) Insert the Calibration Syringe/Filter
 Do not click OK until you are completely ready to proceed.
Assembly into the airflow transducer
(Fig. 12.12). Based on lesson Preference settings, the calibration syringe may not be required.
If prompted, complete the assembly BEFORE clicking OK.
c.) Pull the Calibration Syringe Plunger The bacteriological filter must be used between the transducer and calibration
all the way out. syringe in order for the data to be accurate. The filter is required for calibration
d.) Read the Stage 2 procedure to prepare and recording because it forces the air to move smoothly through the transducer.
for it. This assembly can be left connected for future use. You only need to replace the
filter if the paper inside the filter tears.
e.) Hold the syringe horizontally and let
IMPORTANT
the transducer hang upright off the
end with no support. If your lab sterilizes the
airflow heads after each
use, make sure a clean
IMPORTANT! head is installed now.
Always insert on the
side labeled “Inlet.” IMPORTANT
Never hold onto the
airflow transducer
handle when using the
calibration syringe or the
syringe tip may break.

Calibration continues… Fig. 12.12


Lesson 12: Pulmonary Function I Page 9

4. Click OK. When you click OK, the second stage of calibration will begin, and will run
until you click End Calibration after cycling the syringe.
Calibration Stage 2 corrects the transducer amplitude and compensates for
Stage 2 – If “Use stored values” Preference set, complete if prompted.

Standard Temperature and Pressure (STP). After a known volume of air is


passed through the transducer (such as 5 syringe cycles, which provides for
some airflow variations), the software will determine a set of “correction
factors” to be applied on the airflow data during the Subject recordings.
5. Starting with the syringe plunger all Hold the syringe assembly as shown in Fig. 12.12 above.
the way out, cycle the plunger in and Use a rhythm of about 1 second per stroke with 2 seconds rest between strokes,
out completely 5 times (10 strokes). i.e., push the plunger in for approximately 1 second, wait 2 seconds, pull the
6. Click End Calibration. plunger out, wait 2 seconds, and repeat 4 more times. Click End Calibration
when done.
7. Check calibration data. At the end of calibration, your screen should resemble Fig. 12.13.
 If similar, validate the data
(optional Step 8) or proceed to
the Data Recording section.

Figure 12.13

The first push of the syringe plunger should have resulted in a downward
deflection of the data. If your data shows 5 downward deflections and 5 upward
deflections, you may proceed to the Data Recording section.
 If different, Redo Calibration. If the first stroke resulted in an upward deflection, you will need to change the
calibration assembly (insert the assembly into the other port of the airflow
transducer) and repeat calibration. If the data shows any large spikes, you must
repeat calibration. Click Redo Calibration to repeat the calibration sequence.
8. Optional Validate Calibration.
a) Click Record.
b) Cycle the AFT6 syringe plunger
in and out completely 3 times (6
strokes).
c) Click Stop.
OPTIONAL

d) Measure P-P on CH2 Volume


(Fig. 12.14) to confirm the result
matches the syringe volume:
AFT6=0.6 L
AFT26 = 2 L
e) Click Redo to proceed with
Subject recording (or click Done
and repeat calibration if Figure 12.14 Calibration Validation shows P-P result 0.6 liters
necessary).
END OF CALIBRATION
Page 10 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
C. RECORDING LESSON DATA
FAST TRACK Recording DETAILED EXPLANATION OF RECORDING STEPS
1. Prepare for the recording. In order to work efficiently, read this entire section so you will know what to do
for each recording segment.
IMPORTANT! Following the procedure precisely is very important, as the calculation from
Subject must be relaxed to airflow to volume is very sensitive.
obtain accurate measures.
Subject should be seated, facing away from the computer monitor, relaxed,
with eyes closed while you review the lesson.
Hints for obtaining optimal data:
a) Subject should be seated, facing away from the computer monitor,
relaxed, with eyes closed.
b) Subject should insert mouthpiece and begin breathing normally BEFORE
the recording is started since the mouthpiece may influence normal
values.
c) Always insert on and breathe through the transducer side labeled “Inlet.”
d) Keep the Airflow Transducer upright at all times (Fig. 12.17).
e) A breath is considered a complete inhale-exhale cycle. If you start the
recording on an inhale, try to end on an exhale, and vice-versa. This is not
absolutely critical, but does increase the accuracy of the Airflow to
Volume calculation.
2. Prepare the transducer-filter (if IMPORTANT: If your lab sterilizes the airflow heads after each use, make
applicable)-mouthpiece assembly: sure a clean head is installed now.
Have Subject personally remove the filter and mouthpiece from the plastic
To be safe, follow this procedure packaging. This mouthpiece will become Subject’s personal mouthpiece. It is
precisely to make sure the airflow
advisable to write Subject’s name on the mouthpiece and filter with a
transducer is sterile.
permanent marker so they can be reused later.

 If using the SS11LA transducer and If using SS11LA


not sterilizing the head after each use: transducer and not
Insert a filter and mouthpiece into the sterilizing the head after
airflow transducer on the side labeled each use: insert a filter and
“Inlet.” mouthpiece into the
airflow transducer on the
IMPORTANT!
side labeled “Inlet.”
Always insert on the
side labeled “Inlet” Fig. 12.15 SS11LA with unsterilized head

 If using the SS11LA transducer and If using SS11LA


sterilizing the head after each use: transducer and sterilizing
Insert a disposable mouthpiece the head after each use:
(BIOPAC AFT2) or an autoclavable insert a mouthpiece into
mouthpiece (BIOPAC AFT8) into the the airflow transducer on
airflow transducer on the side labeled the side labeled “Inlet.”
“Inlet.”

Fig. 12.16 SS11LA with sterilized head

Recording continues…
Lesson 12: Pulmonary Function I Page 11

3. Prepare the Subject:

a.) Subject should place his/her personal


nose clip on nose.

b.) Subject should breathe normally for A breath is considered a


20 seconds through the Airflow complete inhale-exhale
Transducer BEFORE Record is cycle.
clicked.
Subject should be relaxed
IMPORTANT! with eyes closed for “normal
Subject must remain relaxed and breathing.”
always breathe through
the side labeled “Inlet” Allow time for Subject to Fig. 12.17 Keep Airflow Transducer upright at all times
acclimate to the mouthpiece
BEFORE clicking Record.
4. Click Record. For accurate measures, Subject must be completely relaxed, with eyes closed,
and breathing normally. The mouthpiece will influence Subject’s breathing, so
a) Breathe normally for 5 breaths. allow time for Subject to acclimate to the mouthpiece BEFORE clicking
b) Inhale as deeply as you can. Record.
 A breath is considered a complete inhale-exhale cycle. Subject
c) Exhale as deeply as you can.
should be relaxed with eyes closed and not facing the computer.
d) Breathe normally for 5 breaths.  If you start the recording on an inhale, try to end on an exhale, and
vice-versa.
5. Click Stop. As soon as Stop is clicked, the Biopac Student Lab software will automatically
calculate volume data based on the recorded airflow data. At the end of the
calculation, both waveforms will be displayed on the screen (Fig. 12.18).
6. Review the data on the screen. Data should resemble
Fig.12.18, showing a
 If similar, go to Step 9. positive spike for
inhalation and a
negative spike for
exhalation.

Fig. 12.18

 If different, click Redo. Data might be different if the procedure wasn’t followed precisely, i.e. Subject
coughed or air escaped, or if the wrong Residual Volume was used (see Journal
for value used and change via File > Preferences if necessary).
If different, click Redo and redo the recording by repeating Steps 5-8. Note that
once you press Redo, the data you have just recorded will be erased.
7. Click Done. After Done is pressed, data will automatically be saved in the specified “Data
Files” folder and a dialog with options will be generated. Make your choice and
8. Click Yes. continue as directed.
If choosing the “Record from another Subject” option:
a) You will not need to recalibrate the airflow transducer with the syringe
(Calibration Stage 2).
b) Remember to have each person use his/her own mouthpiece, bacterial
filter and nose clip.
c) Repeat Recording Steps 2-8 for each new Subject.
d) Each person will need to use a unique file name.
END OF RECORDING
Page 12 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
V. DATA ANALYSIS
FAST TRACK Data Analysis DETAILED EXPLANATION OF DATA ANALYSIS STEPS
1. Enter the Review Saved Data mode and
choose the correct file.
 Enter the Review Saved Data mode.
 Note channel number (CH) designations:
Channel Displays
CH 1 Airflow (hidden)
CH 2 Volume

Optional: To review Airflow data,


“Ctrl+Click” (Windows) or
“Option+click” ( Mac) the channel
number box.
 Note the measurement box settings: Fig. 12.19

Channel Measurement The Airflow data does not have a lot of meaning for this lesson and may
CH 2 P-P confusing at first glance, but it contains an interesting perspective on the
CH 2 Max recording. Note that the vertical scale of the airflow waveform is in Liters per
CH 2 Min second (Liters/sec.), and that the data is centered on zero. Looking at the CH 1
CH 2 Delta graph, you can see that with each exhale, a downward pointing curve appears.
The deeper an inhale, the larger the positive peak; the more forceful an exhale,
the larger the negative peak.
The measurement boxes are above the marker region in the data window. Each
measurement has three sections: channel number, measurement type, and
result. The first two sections are pull-down menus that are activated when you
click them. The following is a brief description of these specific measurements.

P-P: finds the maximum value in the selected area and subtracts the
minimum value found in the selected area.
Max: displays the maximum value in the selected area.
Min: displays the minimum value in the selected area.
Delta: computes the difference in amplitude between the last point and the
first point of the selected area.
The “selected area” is the area selected by the I-Beam tool (including
endpoints).
2. Review the measurements described in the
Introduction to identify the appropriate
selected area for each:
 Total Lung Capacity
 Tidal Volume
 Inspiratory Reserve Volume
 Expiratory Reserve Volume
 Vital Capacity
 Expiratory Capacity
 Inspiratory Capacity
 Functional residual Capacity
 Residual Volume

Fig. 12.20 Measurement areas for respiratory volumes and capacities

Data Analysis continues…


Lesson 12: Pulmonary Function I Page 13

3. Measure observed VC (P-P). The P-P measurement can be used to obtain VC (Fig. 12.21).

A

Figure 12.21 Example of VC from P-P measure

4. Take two measures for an averaged TV The P-P measurement in Fig. 12.22 represents the first value required for the
calculation: averaged TV calculation.
a) Use the I-beam cursor to select the
inhalation of cycle 3 and note the P-P
result (Fig. 12.22). The selected area
should be from the valley to the peak
of the third cycle.

B

Fig. 12.22 Inhalation of third breath cycle selected to measure P-P

b) Use the I-beam cursor to select the The P-P measurement in Fig. 12.23 represents the second value required for
exhalation of cycle 3 and note the P- the averaged TV calculation.
P result (Fig. 12.23). The selected
area should be from the peak to the
valley of the third cycle.

B

Fig. 12.23 Exhalation of third breath cycle selected to measure P-P

5. Use the I-beam cursor and measurement The Delta measurement can be used to obtain IRV, ERV, and other
tools to observe the following volumes and measurements (Fig. 12.24).
capacities (defined in Fig. 12.24):
a) IRV (Delta) d) IC (Delta)
b) ERV (Delta) e) EC (Delta)
c) RV (Min) f) TLC (Max)

B
6. Save or Print the data file.
7. Quit the program.
Fig. 12.24 Example of measurements for TLC (Max), RV (Min), and IRV (Delta)

 You may save the data to another location, save notes that are in the
END OF DATA ANALYSIS journal, or print the data file.

END OF LESSON 12
Complete the Lesson 12 Data Report that follows.
Page 14 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
Lesson 12: Pulmonary Function I Page 15

PULMONARY FUNCTION I
Volumes and Capacities

DATA REPORT
Student’s Name:
Lab Section:
Date:

Subject Profile

Name Height Gender: Male / Female

Age Weight

I. Data and Calculations


A. Vital Capacity
i ) Predicted: Use the equation below to calculate your Predicted Vital Capacity: liters
A1

Equations for Predicted Vital Capacity Where


Male V.C. = 0.052H - 0.022A – 3.60 V.C. Vital Capacity in liters
H Height in centimeters
Female V.C. = 0.041H - 0.018A – 2.69 A Age in years

ii) Observed: Use the P-P result to note Observed Vital Capacity: liters
A2 =
iii) Observed vs. Predicted
What is Subject’s observed Vital Capacity to predicted Vital Capacity as a percentage?

Observed VC /Predicted VC = A1/A2 = _________ liters x 100= __________ %

Note: Vital capacities are dependent on other factors besides age and height. Therefore, 80% of predicted
values are still considered “normal.”
Page 16 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

B. Volume & Capacity Measurements

Complete Table 12.2 with the requested measurement results and calculate results per the formulas provided.
Table 12.2 Measurements
Title Measurement Result Calculation
Tidal Volume TV (a + b) / 2 =
a= Cycle 3 inhale:
b= Cycle 3 exhale:

Inspiratory Reserve Volume IRV

Expiratory Reserve Volume ERV

Residual Volume RV Default = 1


(Preference setting)

Inspiratory Capacity IC TV + IRV =

Expiratory Capacity EC TV + ERV =

Functional Residual Capacity FRC ERV + RV =

Total Lung Capacity TLC IRV + TV + ERV + RV =

C. Observed vs. Predicted Volumes

Using data obtained for Table 12.2, compare Subject’s lung volumes with the average volumes presented in the Introduction.

Table 12.3 Average Volumes vs. Measured Volumes


Measured
Volume Title Average Volume
Volume
Tidal Volume TV Resting subject, normal breathing: greater than
TV is approximately 500 ml. equal to
During exercise:
TV can be more than 3 liters less than

Inspiratory Reserve Volume IRV Resting IRV for young adults is greater than
males = approximately 3,300 ml equal to
females = approximately 1,900 ml
less than

Expiratory Reserve Volume ERV Resting ERV for young adults is greater than
males = approximately 1,000 ml equal to
females = approximately 700 ml
less than
Lesson 12: Pulmonary Function I Page 17

II. QUESTIONS
D. Why does predicted vital capacity vary with height?

E. Explain how factors other than height might affect lung capacity.

F. How would the volume measurements change if data were collected after vigorous exercise?

G. What is the difference between volume measurements and capacities?

H. Define Tidal Volume.

I. Define Inspiratory Reserve Volume.

J. Define Expiratory Reserve Volume.

K. Define Respiratory Volume.

L. Define Pulmonary Capacity.

M. Name the Pulmonary Capacities.

End of Lesson 12 Data Report


Physiology Lessons Lesson 13
for use with the PULMONARY FUNCTION II
Biopac Student Lab Pulmonary Flow Rates
 Forced Expiratory Volume (FEV1,2,3)
 Maximal Voluntary Ventilation (MVV)

Richard Pflanzer, Ph.D.


Associate Professor Emeritus
Indiana University School of Medicine
Purdue University School of Science

J.C. Uyehara, Ph.D.


Biologist
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.
Number of cycles in 12 second interval
William McMullen Average Volume
Vice President per cycle

BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

Number of cycles/minute = Number of cycles in 12 second interval X 5

MVV = (Average volume per cycle) X (Number of cycles per minute)

BIOPAC® Systems, Inc.


42 Aero Camino, Goleta, CA 93117
(805) 685-0066, Fax (805) 685-0067
info@biopac.com
www.biopac.com

Manual Revision 3.7.6


09032009
 BIOPAC Systems, Inc.
Lesson 13: Pulmonary Function II Page 5
II. EXPERIMENTAL OBJECTIVES
1.) To observe experimentally, record, and/or calculate forced expiratory volume (FEV) and maximal voluntary ventilation
(MVV).
2.) To compare observed values of FEV with predicted normals.
3.) Compare MVV values with others in your class.

III. MATERIALS
 BIOPAC airflow transducer with removable, cleanable head (SS11LA)
o If using older SS11L transducers with non-removable head, insert into the larger diameter port.
 BIOPAC disposable mouthpiece (AFT2)
o Optional: BIOPAC Autoclavable Reusable Mouthpiece (AFT8)
 BIOPAC bacteriological filter (AFT1): one per subject plus, if calibration syringe used, one dedicated to syringe
 BIOPAC nose clip (AFT3)
 BIOPAC Calibration Syringe: 0.6-Liter (AFT6 or AFT6A+AFT11A) or 2-Liter (AFT26)
 Clinical Laboratory Scale
 Biopac Student Lab System: software BSL 3.7.5 or above
data acquisition unit MP36, MP35, MP30 (Windows only), or MP45
 Computer System

IV. EXPERIMENTAL METHODS


 For further explanation, use the online support options under the Help Menu.
A. SET UP

FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION


1. Turn your computer ON.  The desktop should appear on the monitor. If it does not appear, ask the
2. Ensure the MP3X unit is OFF. laboratory instructor for assistance.
3. Plug the airflow transducer (SS11LA) into BIOPAC MP3X unit
Channel 1.
4. Turn ON the MP3X Data Acquisition Unit.
5. Place a filter onto the end of the calibration
syringe.
Plugs into CH1

SS11LA
Airflow Transducer

Fig. 13.4 MP3X (top) and MP45 (bottom) equipment connections

 SS11LA needs 5-10 minutes to warm up; during this time, the baseline
Set Up continues… offset is changing slightly.
Page 6 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

6. Insert the Calibration Syringe/Filter The bacteriological filter must be used between the transducer and calibration
Assembly into the airflow transducer (Fig. syringe in order for the data to be accurate. The filter is required for calibration
13.5). and recording because it forces the air to move smoothly through the transducer.
This assembly can be left connected for future use. You only need to replace the
filter if the paper inside the filter tears.
IMPORTANT!
Always insert on the
side labeled “Inlet”

Fig. 13.5
Always insert syringe assembly on the transducer side labeled “Inlet” so that
the transducer cable exits on the left, as shown in Fig. 12.4.
IMPORTANT: If your lab sterilizes the airflow heads after each use, make
sure a clean head is installed now.
7. Start the Biopac Student Lab program. 
8. Choose Lesson 13 (L13-Pulmonary
Function II) and click OK.
Use a unique identifier. Click OK to end default Setup.
9. Type in your filename and click OK.
10. Optional: Set Preferences. This lesson has optional Preferences for data and display while recording. Per
your Lab Instructor’s guidelines, you may set:
 Choose File > Preferences. Calibration Syringe Size: 0.61 L (AFT6A/6), 1 L, 2 L (AFT26), 3 L, 4 L, or 5 L
 Select an option. Calibration Syringe Values: set each time or set once and use stored values for
 Select the desired setting and click the same SS11LA/L with the same MP45
OK. Residual Volume: RV cannot be determined using a normal spirometer or
airflow transducer, so the BSL software sets a value
between 0 and 5 liters (default is 1 L)
Journal Text: show minimum guiding text vs. detailed text
Grids: show or hide gridlines
Recording Length: allow from 30 seconds to 30 minutes of data
END OF SETUP
Lesson 13: Pulmonary Function II Page 7
B. CALIBRATION
Calibration establishes the hardware’s internal parameters (such as gain, offset, and scaling) and is critical for optimum performance.
Calibration will vary based on the Preference set by your lab instructor.
Pay close attention to the journal instructions for the entire calibration.
FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION

1. Hold the Airflow transducer upright Calibration Stage 1 zeroes the baseline, which is
and still (Fig. 13.6). critical for Airflow to Volume
calculation. For this stage, there must be no
Stage 1 – ALWAYS REQUIRED

airflow through the transducer and the


transducer must be upright and still as the
baseline can shift slightly with orientation
changes due to gravity effects.
Fig. 13.6
2. Click Calibrate. The first calibration stage will run for 4 seconds.

Figure 13.7 Calibration stage 1 – always required

3. IF PROMPTED—Complete the If prompted, read the Stage 2 procedure BEFORE clicking OK.
calibration syringe assembly BEFORE
clicking OK.
a.) Place a filter onto the end of the
calibration syringe.
b.) Insert the Calibration Syringe/Filter
Assembly into the airflow transducer  Do not click OK until you are completely ready to proceed.
(Fig. 13.8). Based on lesson Preference settings, the calibration syringe may not be required.
If prompted, complete the assembly BEFORE clicking OK.
c.) Pull the Calibration Syringe Plunger
The bacteriological filter must be used between the transducer and calibration
all the way out.
syringe in order for the data to be accurate. The filter is required for calibration
d.) Read the Stage 2 procedure to prepare and recording because it forces the air to move smoothly through the transducer.
for it. This assembly can be left connected for future use. You only need to replace the
filter if the paper inside the filter tears.
e.) Hold the syringe horizontally and let
the transducer hang upright off the IMPORTANT
end with no support. If your lab sterilizes the
airflow heads after each
use, make sure a clean
IMPORTANT!
Always insert on the
head is installed now.
side labeled “Inlet.” IMPORTANT
Never hold onto the
airflow transducer
handle when using the
calibration syringe or the
syringe tip may break.

Fig. 13.8

Calibration continues…
Page 8 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

4. Click OK. When you click OK, the second stage of calibration will begin, and will run
until you click End Calibration after cycling the syringe.
Calibration Stage 2 corrects the transducer amplitude and compensates for
Stage 2 – If “Use stored values” Preference set, complete if prompted.

Standard Temperature and Pressure (STP). After a known volume of air is


passed through the transducer (such as 5 syringe cycles, which provides for
some airflow variations), the software will determine a set of “correction
factors” to be applied on the airflow data during the Subject recordings.
5. Starting with the syringe plunger all Use a rhythm of about 1 second per stroke with 2 seconds rest between strokes,
the way out, cycle the plunger in and i.e., push the plunger in for approximately 1 second, wait 2 seconds, pull the
out completely 5 times (10 strokes). plunger out, wait 2 seconds, and repeat 4 more times. Click End Calibration
when done.
6. Click End Calibration.
7. Check calibration data. At the end of calibration, your screen should resemble Fig. 13.9.
 If similar, validate the data
(optional Step 8) or proceed to
the Data Recording section.

Figure 13.9

The first push of the syringe plunger should have resulted in a downward
deflection of the data. If your data shows 5 downward deflections and 5 upward
deflections, you may proceed to the Data Recording section.
 If different, Redo Calibration. If the first stroke resulted in an upward deflection, you will need to change the
calibration assembly (insert the assembly into the other port of the airflow
transducer) and repeat calibration. If the data shows any large spikes, you must
repeat calibration. Click Redo Calibration to repeat the calibration sequence.
8. Optional Validate Calibration.
a) Click Record.
b) Cycle the AFT6 syringe plunger
in and out completely 3 times (6
strokes).
c) Click Stop.
OPTIONAL

d) Measure P-P on CH2 Volume


(Fig. 13.9) to confirm the result
matches the syringe volume:
AFT6=0.6 L
AFT26 = 2 L
e) Click Redo to proceed with
Subject recording (or click Done
and repeat calibration if Figure 13.10 Calibration Validation shows P-P result 0.6 liters
necessary).
END OF CALIBRATION
Lesson 13: Pulmonary Function II Page 9
C. RECORDING LESSON DATA

FAST TRACK Recording DETAILED EXPLANATION OF RECORDING STEPS


1. Prepare for the recording. In this lesson, you will perform two tests to measure pulmonary flow rates:
. Forced Expiratory Volume (FEV)
. Maximal Voluntary Ventilation (MVV)
In order to work efficiently, read this entire section so you will know what to do
for each recording segment. Subject should continue to relax while you review
the lesson.
Following the procedure precisely is very important, as the calculation
from airflow to volume is very sensitive.
Hints for obtaining optimal data:
a) Subject should wear loose clothing so clothing does not inhibit chest
expansion.
b) Always use the noseclip to ensure that there is no loss of air through the
nose during recording.
c) Subject must try to expand the thoracic cavity to its largest volume during
maximal inspiratory efforts.
d) During recording of FEV, Subject should attempt to exhale as quickly as
possible into the mouthpiece.
e) During recording of MVV, Subject should attempt to exhale and inhale as
quickly and deeply as possible. Breathing rates should be faster than 60
breaths/minute or greater than 1 breath/second for the best results. The
breathing needs to be maintained for 12-15 seconds.
f) Always begin breathing into the airflow transducer before the recording
begins and continue breathing into the airflow transducer until after the
recording ends.
g) If you start the recording on an inhale, try to end on an exhale, and vice-
versa. This is not absolutely critical, but will increase the accuracy of the
Airflow to Volume calculation.
h) Always insert on and breathe through the side of the SS11LA airflow
transducer labeled “Inlet.”
2. Prepare the transducer-filter (if IMPORTANT: If your lab sterilizes the airflow heads after each use, make
applicable)-mouthpiece assembly and sure a clean head is installed now.
insert into the airflow transducer on the Have Subject personally remove the filter and mouthpiece from the plastic
side labeled “Inlet”: packaging. This mouthpiece will become Subject’s personal mouthpiece. It is
advisable to write Subject’s name on the mouthpiece and filter with a
To be safe, follow this procedure permanent marker so they can be reused later.
precisely to make sure the airflow
transducer is sterile.
If using SS11LA transducer and not sterilizing the head after each use: insert
a filter and mouthpiece into the airflow transducer on the side labeled “Inlet.”
 If using the SS11LA transducer and
not sterilizing the head after each use:

Insert a filter and mouthpiece.

IMPORTANT!
Always insert on the
side labeled “Inlet”

Fig. 13.11 SS11LA with unsterilized head


Recording continues…
Page 10 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

 If using the SS11LA transducer and If using SS11LA transducer and sterilizing the head after each use: insert a
sterilizing the head after each use: mouthpiece into the airflow transducer on the side labeled “Inlet

Insert a disposable mouthpiece


(AFT2) or an autoclavable mouthpiece
(AFT8).

Fig. 13.12 SS11LA with sterilized head


3. Prepare the Subject:
a.) Subject should place his/her personal
nose clip on nose.

b.) Subject should breathe normally for A breath is considered a


20 seconds through the Airflow complete inhale-exhale
Transducer BEFORE Record is cycle.
clicked.
Subject should be relaxed
IMPORTANT! with eyes closed for “normal
Subject must remain relaxed and
breathing.”
always breathe through
the side labeled “Inlet” Allow time for Subject to Fig. 13.13 Keep Airflow Transducer upright at all times
acclimate to the mouthpiece
BEFORE clicking Record.
Segment 1 — FEV
4. Click Record FEV.
5. Perform the following procedure: Director should guide Subject through this procedure.
a) Breathe normally for 3 cycles a) One complete cycle is one inhale and one exhale.
b) Inhale as deeply as you can, then
hold your breath for just an instant. b) You hold your breath for an instant so that when you are analyzing the
data you can see clearly where the exhale began.
c) Exhale forcefully and completely, as
quickly as possible. c) Squeeze out all the air you can. You may want to bend over to
physically force air out.
d) Breathe normally for 3 more cycles.
d) ---
6. Click Stop. As soon as the Stop button is pressed, the Biopac Student Lab software will
automatically convert the air flow data to volume data. At the end of the
calculation, just the volume data will be shown on the screen, as shown in Fig.
13.14.
7. Review the data on the screen. If data looks similar to the figure below, proceed to Step 8.
 If similar, go to Step 8.

Recording continues… Fig. 13.14


Lesson 13: Pulmonary Function II Page 11

 If different, click Redo. Data might be different if procedure wasn’t followed precisely. If you can not
clearly define the start of maximal exhale, you will need to repeat the
recording.
Click “Redo” to redo the recording and repeat Steps 4-7. Note that once you
press Redo, the data you have just recorded will be erased.
8. Use the I-beam cursor to select the area of Use the I-beam cursor to select the area of maximal exhale. You must start the
maximal exhale (must be at least 3 seconds cursor at the instant of exhale, and by holding the mouse button down, select an
long). area at least 3 seconds in length (refer to Figure 13.15).
The first measurement box has been set up to read Delta T which is the time
between the end and beginning of the selected area. Use the Delta T
measurement to determine the amount of time you have selected.

Fig. 13.15 Selected area for maximal exhale

9. Click Calculate FEV. After you have selected the correct area, click Calculate FEV to plot the
cumulative expired volume over time. The program will cut out your selected
area, invert it, and paste it into a new channel (Fig. 13.16). The volume
waveform originally recorded will be hidden from view so you can concentrate
on the data needed to calculate FEV.
10. Review the data on the screen.
 If similar, go to Step 11.

Fig. 13.16 FEV Plot

 If different, Redo. If after comparing the data obtained to Fig. 13.16, you feel the area you selected
in Step 7 was incorrect, click the Redo button and redo Steps 8-10.
Segment 2 — MVV
11. Click Continue. The current FEV data on the screen will be automatically saved to disk for later
analysis and the screen display will change to include a Record MVV button.
12. Place a nose clip on and begin breathing It is important that you begin breathing through the airflow transducer before
through the airflow transducer. you click the Record MVV button.
Make sure the air does not leak through the mouthpiece or nose clip.

Recording continues…
Page 12 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

13. Click Record MVV.


14. Perform the following procedure: The Director should guide Subject through this procedure.
a) Breathe normally into the airflow
transducer for 5 cycles.
b) Breathe quickly and deeply for 12-15 b) For optimal results, the emphasis during the MVV recording
seconds. should be on speed, more than depth of breathing.
WARNING o The best results are obtained at breathing rates > 60
This procedure can make Subject breaths/min. At that rate, Subject is breathing out using
dizzy and light headed. Subject maximal effort as in the forced expiration recording.
should be sitting down and
Director should watch Subject.
Stop the procedure if Subject
feels sick or excessively dizzy.

c) Breathe normally again and continue


for 5 more cycles.
15. Click Stop. As soon as Stop is pressed, the Biopac Student Lab software will automatically
convert the airflow data to volume data. At the end of the calculation, just the
16. Review the data on the screen.
volume data will be shown on the screen (Fig. 13.17).
 If similar, go to Step 17.
If all went well, your data should look similar to the figure below, and you can
proceed to Step 17.

Fig. 13.17

 If different, click Redo. The data may be different if the procedure wasn’t followed precisely. In this
(If you press Redo, the data you have case, click “Redo” and redo the recording by repeating Steps 13-16.
just recorded will be erased.)
17. Click Done. This lesson produces two files; one for FEV data and one for MVV data, as
indicated by the extension. After you press Done, a dialog of options will be
18. Click Yes.
generated; make your choice, and continue as directed. Data will automatically
be saved in the “Data Files” folder on the hard drive.
 If Done > Copy to another location is selected, the FEV and MVV data
files will both be automatically copied to the selected location.
If choosing the “Record from another Subject” option:
a) You will not need to recalibrate the airflow transducer with the syringe
(Calibration Stage 2).
b) Remember to have each person use his/her own mouthpiece, bacterial
filter and nose clip.
c) Repeat recording Steps 1-18 for each new Subject.
d) Each person will need to use a unique file name.
END OF RECORDING
Lesson 13: Pulmonary Function II Page 13

V. DATA ANALYSIS
FAST TRACK Data Analysis Detailed Explanation of Data Analysis
1. Enter the Review Saved Data mode and Enter the Review Saved Data mode. 
choose the correct FEV-L13 file.
For the first part of the analysis, choose the data file from the FEV recording
(saved with “FEV-L13” added to the file name).
 Note channel number (CH)
designations:
Channel Displays
CH 2 Volume
 Note measurement box settings:
Channel Measurement
CH 2 Delta T
CH 2 P-P

Fig. 13.18 FEV data


The measurement boxes are above the marker region in the data window. Each
measurement has three sections: channel number, measurement type, and result.
The first two sections are pull-down menus that are activated when you click
them. The following is a brief description of these specific measurements. 
Delta T: The Delta Time measurement is the difference in time between
the end and beginning of the selected area.
P-P (peak-to-peak): finds the maximum value in the selected area and
subtracts the minimum value found in the selected area.
The “selected area” is the area selected by the I-Beam tool (including
endpoints).
The following tools help you adjust the data window: 
Display menu: Autoscale horizontal, Autoscale waveforms, Zoom Previous
Scroll Bars: Time (Horizontal); Amplitude (Vertical)
Cursor Tools: Zoom Tool
Buttons: Show Grid, Hide Grid
2. Use the I-beam cursor to select the area The p-p measurement for the selected area represents the Vital Capacity (VC).
from time zero to the end of the recording.

A

Data Analysis continues…


Fig. 13.19
Page 14 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

3. Use the I-beam cursor to select the first The selected area should be from Time
one-second interval (Fig. 13.20). 0 to the one-second reading, as
displayed in the Delta T measurement.
B The volume expired in the time
interval from 0 to the end of second
one (Vol 0-1) is indicated by the P-P
measurement. Use this volume to
calculate FEV1, which is the % of VC
expired in the time interval from 0 to
Fig. 13.20 FEV1
the end of second one.
4. Use the I-beam cursor to select the first The selected area should be from Time
two-second interval (Fig. 13.212). 0 to the two-second reading, as
displayed in the Delta T measurement.
B The volume expired in the time
interval from 0 to the end of second
two (Vol 0-2) is indicated by the P-P
measurement. FEV2 is the % of VC
expired in the time interval from 0 to
the end of second two.
Fig. 13.21 FEV2

5. Use the I-beam cursor to select the first The selected area should be from Time
three-second interval (Fig. 13.22). 0 to the three-second reading, as
displayed in the Delta T measurement.
B The volume expired in the time
interval from 0 to the end of three (Vol
0-3) is indicated by the P-P
measurement. FEV3 is the % of VC
expired in the time interval from 0 to
the end of second three.
Fig. 13.22 FEV3

6. Select File > Save Changes. 


7. Pull down the Lessons menu, select
For the second part of the analysis, choose the data file from the MVV
Review Saved Data, and choose the
recording (saved with “MVV-L13” added to the file name.)
correct MVV- L13 file.
 Note channel number (CH)
designations:
Channel Displays
CH 2 Volume
 Note measurement box settings:
Channel Measurement
CH 2 Delta T
CH 2 P-P
8. Use the zoom tool to set up your display
window for optimal viewing of the deep,
fast breathing segment of the recording
(Fig. 13.23).
Fig. 13.23 Select the area of deep fast breathing with the Zoom Tool

Data Analysis continues…


Lesson 13: Pulmonary Function II Page 15

9. Use the I-beam cursor to select a twelve- Fig. 13.24 shows the result of the zoom selection (bordered in Fig.13.23) as 23
second area that is convenient to count the complete individual cycles, and from that a 12.01-second interval (see the
number of cycles in the interval (Fig. Delta T result) with about 15 cycles.
13.24).

C

Fig. 13.24 MVV data

10. Place a marker at the end of the selected To place a marker, click in
area (Fig. 13.25). the lower portion of the
marker label region above
the endpoint of the selected
area. This is important
because you will need to
identify the region endpoint
after you deselect the area.
Enter marker text.
Fig. 13.25 Marker insertion

11. Use the I-beam cursor to select each You need to select each complete individual cycle up to the endpoint of the
complete individual cycle in the 12- originally selected area, as indicated by the marker you inserted. If there is an
second interval defined in Step 9. Select incomplete cycle at the end, do not count it.
one cycle at a time.
Fig.13.26 shows the first cycle of the 12-second interval defined in Fig. 13.24
C selected:

Fig. 13.26 Cycle selection

12. Save or print the data file. You may save the data to another location, save notes that are in the journal, or
13. Exit the program. print the data file. 
END OF DATA ANALYSIS

END OF LESSON 13
Complete the Lesson 13 Data Report that follows.
Page 16 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
Lesson 13: Pulmonary Function II Page 17

PULMONARY FUNCTION II
Pulmonary Flow Rates
 Forced Expiratory Volume (FEV1,2,3)
 Maximal Voluntary Ventilation (MVV)
Student’s Name:
Lab Section:
Date:

I. Data and Calculations


Subject Profile
Name Height

Age Gender: Male / Female Weight

A. Vital Capacity (VC)

= ________________

B. Comparison of FEVX% to Normal Values


Table 13.2
Time Forced Expiratory Vital Capacity (FEV/VC) = Averages
Interval Volume (VC) FEV/VC x 100 = % FEVx for
(sec) from A calculate calculate reference
0-1 % FEV1 83%
0-2 % FEV2 94%
0-3 % FEV3 97%

C. MVV Measurements (Note, all volume measurements are in liters)


1) Number of cycles in 12-second interval: ______
2) Calculate the number of respiratory cycles per minute (RR):
RR = Cycles/min = Number of cycles in 12-second interval x 5
Number of cycles in 12-second interval (from above): ______ x 5 = ______cycles/min
3) Measure each cycle

Complete Table 13.3 with a measurement for each individual cycle. If Subject had only 5 complete cycles/12-sec period,
then only fill in the volumes for 5 cycles. If there is an incomplete cycle, do not record it. (The Table may have more
cycles than you need.)
Table 13.3
Measurement Measurement
Cycle Cycle
Number Number
Cycle 1 Cycle 9
Cycle 2 Cycle 10
Cycle 3 Cycle 11
Cycle 4 Cycle 12
Cycle 5 Cycle 13
Cycle 6 Cycle 14
Cycle 7 Cycle 15
Cycle 8 Cycle 16
Page 18 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
4) Calculate the average volume per cycle (AVPC):

Add the volumes of all counted cycles from Table 13.3.

Sum = ________________ liters

Divide the above sum by the number of counted cycles. The answer is the average volume per cycle (AVPC)

AVPC = _______ / ____________________ = ____________________liters


Sum # of counted cycles

5) Calculate the MVVest

Multiply the AVPC by the number of respiratory cycles per minute (RR) as calculated earlier.

MVV = AVPC x RR = _______ x _________ = __________________liters/min


AVPC RR

II. Questions

D. Define Forced Expiratory Volume (FEV).

E. How do Subject’s FEVx values compare to the average per Table 13.2?
FEV1 less than same as greater than
FEV2 less than same as greater than
FEV3 less than same as greater than

F. Is it possible for a Subject to have a vital capacity (single stage) within normal range but a value for FEV1 below normal
range? Explain your answer.

G. Define Maximal Voluntary Ventilation (MVV).

H. How does Subject’s MVV compare to others in the class? less than same as greater than
Lesson 13: Pulmonary Function II Page 19

I. Maximal voluntary ventilation decreases with age. Why?

J. Asthmatics tend to have their smaller airways narrowed by smooth muscle constriction, thickening of the walls, and mucous
secretion. How would this affect vital capacity, FEV1, and MVV?

K. Bronchodilator drugs open up airways and clear mucous. How would this affect the FEV and MVV measurements?

L. Would a smaller person tend to have less or more vital capacity than a larger person? Less More
M. How would an asthmatic person’s measurement of FEV1 and MVV compare to an athlete?

Explain your answer.

End of Lesson 13 Data Report


Physiology Lessons Lesson 14
for use with the
Biopac Student Lab BIOFEEDBACK
Relaxation and Arousal

EDA/GSR
Richard Pflanzer, Ph.D.
Associate Professor
Indiana University School of Medicine
Purdue University School of Science

J.C. Uyehara, Ph.D.


Biologist
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

William McMullen
Vice President
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

BIOPAC® Systems, Inc.


42 Aero Camino, Goleta, CA 93117
(805) 685-0066, Fax (805) 685-0067
info@biopac.com
www.biopac.com

Manual Revision 3.7.6


08252009
 BIOPAC Systems, Inc.
Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6 Page 3
II. EXPERIMENTAL OBJECTIVES
1) Introduce the concept of biofeedback training for relaxation.
2) Measure levels of arousal via heart rate and electrodermal activity (EDA).

III. MATERIALS
 BIOPAC disposable vinyl electrodes (EL503), 3 electrodes per Subject
 Electrode lead (SS2LA/L)
 BIOPAC EDA setup
o Disposable Setup: EDA/GSR Lead (SS57L) and EDA Gelled Electrodes (EL507 x 2)
o Reusable setup: EDA/GSR transducer (SS3L) and Electrode gel (GEL1)
 Biopac Student Lab System: software BSL 3.7.3 or above
data acquisition unit MP36, MP35, or MP30 (Windows only)
 Computer System

IV. EXPERIMENTAL METHODS

 For further explanation, use the online support options under the Help Menu.
A. SET UP
FAST TRACK Set Up DETAILED EXPLANATION OF SET UP STEPS
1. Turn the computer ON.  The desktop should appear on the monitor. If it does not appear, ask
the laboratory instructor for assistance.
2. Make sure the BIOPAC MP3X unit is 
turned OFF. BIOPAC MP3X unit
3. Plug the equipment in as follows:
EDA setup (SS3L or SS57L)—CH 1
Electrode lead set (SS2L —CH 2
4. Turn the MP3X Data Acquisition Unit
ON. SS2LA/L
Electrode Lead Set
EDA Setup to CH 2
to CH 1

SS3L shown
or SS57L
EDA/GSR Lead

Fig. 14.1
5. Select a Subject (who has not exercised 
within the last hour).
Subject must not have done any rigorous exercise within the last hour. For
optimal adhesion, electrodes should be placed on the skin at least 5 minutes
before the start of Calibration

Set Up continues…
Page 4 L14: Biofeedback
6. Set up the EDA. HINT For a good signal to be picked up, it helps if the subjects
have a little sweat on their hands (not a lot, but enough so
that their hands are not completely smooth or cold). If
subjects wash their hands just prior to the recording or if
they have been sitting in a cold room, then they must do
something to activate the sweat glands before beginning
calibration or recording. If subjects begin with colder hands,
the scale will be diminished and the signal will be easily
saturated once they “warm up” during the lesson.

 SS57L and EL507 Attach two EL507


electrodes to the subject’s
fingertips and connect the
SS57L lead, as shown in
Fig. 9.3.

Fig. 9.3 SS57L and EL507 Setup


 SS3LA and GEL1 If using the SS3L/SS3LA reusable setup, you must clean and then fill with
electrode gel to obtain accurate recordings:
 Clean and fill both cavities of the
EDA transducer (SS3L/SS3LA) with  CLEAN: Each cavity of the EDA transducer should be carefully
gel and then attach to the Subject cleaned with a small flat blade screwdriver and then the interior surface
(Fig. 9.4). should be gently roughed with an abrasive pad.
 FILL: Fresh gel must be applied in order to obtain an accurate
EDA/GSR signal.
IMPORTANT These steps are critical—data quality may suffer if the transducer becomes
You must fill both sensor gummed with dried gel from previous uses.
cavities with electrode gel Sensors attach to
(GEL1) before attaching bottom of fingertips
to the fingers.
Velcro straps
wrap around
fingers

Fig. 9.4 SS3L/SS3LA attachment and connection

The SS3L/SS3LA is typically placed on the index and middle finger of the
left hand.
Position the transducer so that the sensor is on the bottom of your fingertip
(the part without the fingernail) and wrap the Velcro tape around the
finger so the transducer fits snugly but not so tight that blood circulation is
cut off. It’s a fine line between tight and too tight.The SS3L and SS3LA
attach to the fingertips in an identical manner (Fig. 9.4) and should be in
place for at least five minutes prior to the start of recording.

Setup continues…
Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6 Page 5
7. Set up Lead II ECG.
a.) Place three electrodes on the
one on right forearm
Subject (Fig. 14.2). (just above wrist)
right forearm
WHITE lead

one on inside right leg


(just above ankle bone)
right leg left leg
one on inside left leg BLACK lead RED lead
(just above ankle bone) (ground)
Fig. 14.2 Fig. 14.3
 medial surface of right leg, just above the ankle bone
 medial surface of left leg, just above the ankle bone
 right anterior forearm at the wrist (same side of arm as the palm of
hand).
b.) Attach the electrode lead Each of the pinch connectors on the end of the electrode cable needs to be
(SS2LA/L) to the Subject attached to a specific electrode. The electrode cables are each a different
following the color code (Fig. color, and you should follow Fig. 14.3 to ensure that you connect each cable
14.3). to the proper electrode.
 When the electrode cable is The pinch connectors work like a small clothespin, but will only latch onto
connected properly, the LEAD II the nipple of the electrode from one side of the connector.
electrode configuration will be
established.
8. Start the Biopac Student Lab Program.

9. Choose Lesson 14 (L14-Biofeedback).

10. Type in your filename. Use a unique identifier.


11. Click OK.
This ends the default Setup.
END OF SETUP
Page 6 L14: Biofeedback
B. CALIBRATION
The Calibration procedure establishes the hardware’s internal parameters (such as gain, offset, and scaling) and is critical for
optimum performance. Pay close attention to the Calibration procedure.

FAST TRACK Calibration DETAILED EXPLANATION OF CALIBRATION STEPS


1. Subject should sit in a relaxed state,
breathing normally.
2. Click Calibrate (then YES, then OK). When you click Calibrate, two dialog boxes will pop-up to make sure you are
ready for the calibration procedure. Click YES for the first box and click OK
for the second box.
You should see three tracings on the screen: the EDA recording, the ECG
recording, and the Heart Rate (ECG Rate).
3. After the “beep,” inhale and exhale deeply A beep should occur four seconds into the recording.
once. The Subject should take one deep inhale and exhale, and then return to normal
breathing. The program needs to see some variation in the EDA and BPM data.
Note: The Subject should inhale and exhale without tensing the chest muscles
too much, as this may cause excessive EMG artifact.
4. Wait for the Calibration to stop. The Calibration will run for 20 seconds and then stop automatically, so let it run
its course.
5. Check your calibration data. At the end of the 20-sec calibration recording, your screen should resemble Fig.
14.5.
 If similar, proceed to the Data
Recording section.
 If different, Redo Calibration.
EDA/GSR

Figure 14.5
Both recording channels should show some fluctuation. If there is not any
fluctuation, then it is possible that a transducer is not connected properly and
you must redo calibration.
If the display of Heart Rate shows large fluctuations (20 BPM or more) during
the interval from 4-20 seconds, then it is possible that excessive EMG artifact
during inhale and exhale caused loss of BPM tracking and you should redo the
calibration and have the Subject breathe less deeply.
If you did not hear a beep during the calibration, then you should make sure
your computer volume is turned up and redo calibration. Redo by clicking
Redo Calibration and repeating the entire calibration sequence.

END OF CALIBRATION
Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6 Page 7
C. RECORDING LESSON DATA
FAST TRACK Recording DETAILED EXPLANATION OF RECORDING STEPS
1. Prepare for the recording. In order to work efficiently, read this entire section so you will know what to do for
each recording segment.
This lesson requires that the Subject concentrate on the monitor display of Heart
Rate and Arousal (EDA) and try to change the reading(s) without physical
movement. Heart Rate and level of arousal (EDA) are independent, so the Subject
may be able to change one or the other or both.
When you begin recording, your Heart Rate and your EDA
(Fig. 14.6) will be plotted in a thermometer style bar chart.

Fig. 14.6 Heart Rate and Arousal (EDA)


The Heart Rate will be displayed to the left and will increase (rise) as the heart rate
increases. Arousal (EDA) will be displayed on the right, and will increase (rise) as
the body resistance decreases, indicating a higher level of arousal.
The upper and lower range of each reading was set with your calibration data. Both
readings should begin with values in approximately the center of the display. If
your reading for either bar begins beyond the mid-range, you may want to consider
redoing calibration.
The bar chart display only works while data is being recorded. The display will
change to a standard data plot when recording is complete.
2. Click Record. The recording will begin and will run continuously until you click Stop or the time
indicated runs out.
3. For the first 90 seconds of the recording, Hints for achieving relaxation:
Subject should try to relax so that both a) Relax your posture.
bars move down. b) Breathe in and out very slowly.
c) Imagine yourself at a warm, relaxing seashore.
d) Smile.
e) Close your eyes.
4. After 90 seconds, Subject should try to To move the bars up, you need to become more aroused.
move the bars up by increasing arousal and
Recorder should insert an event marker 90 seconds into the recording to indicate
Recorder should insert an event marker.
that the Subject is now attempting arousal versus relaxation.
 Insert event marker at 90 seconds. To insert an event marker, press F9 on Windows or Esc on Mac.
(No marker label is needed.) (As you are viewing the bar chart display, you will not see the marker as it is
entered. A marker can also be entered after the data is recorded.)


Hints for achieving arousal:
a) Think of a stressful situation.
b) Have the Director clap behind you.
c) Make a scowl with your face.
d) Hold your breath.
5. Click Stop. When you click Stop, the data window will change to display a standard three-
channel recording with ECG, Heart Rate, and EDA. This data represents the entire
Recording continues…
recording.
Page 8 L14: Biofeedback
6. Review the data on the screen. If all went well, your data should look similar to Fig. 14.7 and you can proceed to
Step 7.
 If similar, go to Step 7.
Note: The recording will vary greatly from person to person, and it is hard to
generalize about the “results.” Hopefully, you were able to manipulate your
physiological responses to some degree. This may take some practice, as many
people are not used to thinking that they have some control over things like their
heart rate and nervous system.

Fig. 14.7 Sample data


 If different, click Redo. The data might be different if:
a) The BPM data fluctuates excessively, indicating that an electrode may have
“peeled” up.
b) The EDA signal goes outside of its plotting region, indicating that one of the
EDA transducers may not have had good contact.
If incorrect, you should redo the recording by clicking Redo and repeating Steps 2-
6. Note that once you press Redo, the data you have just recorded will be erased.
7. Click Done. A pop-up window with options will be generated. Make your choice, and continue
as directed.
If choosing the “Record from another Subject” option:
a) Attach the electrodes and transducer to the new Subject per Set Up Steps 5
and 6, and continue the entire lesson from Set Up Step 9.
b) Each the new Subject will need to use a unique file name.
8. Remove the electrodes and transducers. Remove the electrode cable pinch connectors, and peel off the electrodes. Throw
out the electrodes (BIOPAC electrodes are not reusable). Wash the electrode gel
 If an SS3L transducer was used, clean residue from the skin, using soap and water. The electrodes may leave a slight ring
the gel cavities. on the skin for a few hours. This is normal, and does not indicate that anything is
wrong.
END OF RECORDING If an SS3L transducer was used, use alcohol to clean out the electrode gel cavities.
Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6 Page 9
V. DATA ANALYSIS
FAST TRACK Data Analysis DETAILED EXPLANATION OF DATA ANALYSIS STEPS
1. Enter the Review Saved Data mode.  Enter the Review Saved Data mode.
Note Channel Number (CH) designation: The data window should come up the same as Fig. 14.8.
Channel Displays
CH 2 ECG
CH 41 Heart Rate
CH 42 EDA

Fig 14.8
2. Turn OFF Channel 2, ECG.  To turn a channel OFF, click the channel number box while holding
down the “Ctrl” key (Windows) or the “Option” key (Mac).

Fig. 14.9 Channel 2 turned off


3. Setup your display window for optimal This is the data that represents Subject trying to relax between Time 0 and the
viewing of the data interval when the event marker you inserted at 90 seconds.
Subject was trying to relax.
 The following tools help you adjust the data window:
Autoscale horizontal Horizontal(Time) Scroll Bar
Autoscale waveforms Vertical (Amplitude) Scroll Bar
Zoom Tool Zoom Previous
4. Set up the measurement boxes as follows:  The measurement boxes are above the marker region in the data
Channel Measurement window. Each measurement has three sections: channel number, measurement
type, and result. The first two sections are pull-down menus that are activated
CH 41 value
when you click them. Brief definition of measurements:
CH 42 value value: displays the amplitude value for the channel at the point selected
by the I-beam cursor. If a single point is selected, the value is for that
point, if an area is selected, the value is the endpoint of the selected area.
Note The “selected area” is the area selected by the I-beam tool
(including the endpoints).

Data Analysis continues…


Page 10 L14: Biofeedback
5. Measure the EDA and heart rate values It takes a few heart rate cycles for the BPM data to be correct, so measuring
about 10 seconds into the recording. data 10 seconds into the record will be an accurate baseline. Simply clicking
the cursor at Time = 10 seconds will update the value measurements.
A

Fig 14.10
6. Scroll to the point of maximal relaxation. Use the horizontal scroll bar to move through the data. Select a point at the
end of the first interval (before the marker) representing the point of maximal
relaxation.

Fig. 14.11
7. Take the measurements on this point as
needed.

A
8. Scroll to the point of maximal arousal. Scroll to the second interval (after the marker). Select a point at the end of the
interval representing the point of maximal arousal.
9. Take the measurements on this point as
needed.

A
10. Save or print the data file.  You may save the data to a drive, save notes that are in the journal, or
11. Exit the program. print the data file.
END OF DATA ANALYSIS

END OF LESSON 14
Complete the Lesson 14 Data Report that follows.
Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6 Page 11
BIOFEEDBACK
Relaxation and Arousal
DATA REPORT

Student’s Name:
Lab Section:
Date:

I. Data and Calculations

Subject Profile
Name Height

Age Gender: Male / Female Weight

A.
Table 14.1
Condition
Measurement Baseline Maximal Maximal
(10 sec.) Relaxation Arousal

Heart Rate (BPM)

EDA (MH)

II. Questions

B. Based on the data from Table 14.1, did the effects of the parasympathetic nervous system change with biofeedback?
Explain the physiological mechanisms causing the results.

C. Describe a biofeedback program for “stress management.” Include details such as the physiological variable(s) you
would measure, the transducers needed, and your criterion for a successful training program.
Page 12 L14: Biofeedback

D. Name the branches of the autonomic nervous system and explain their function.

E. Define Biofeedback and explain in general terms how it works.

F. What change, if any, did your EDA recording show when you were aroused? Relaxed?

G. Why is EDA a useful measure for biofeedback training?

End of Lesson 14 Data Report


Physiology Lessons Lesson 15
for use with the
Biopac Student Lab AEROBIC EXERCISE PHYSIOLOGY
Cardiovascular and Respiratory Adjustments
 ECG During and Post-Exercise
 Ventilation During and Post-Exercise
 Heat Exchange

J.C. Uyehara, Ph.D.


Biologist
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

William McMullen
Vice President
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

BIOPAC® Systems, Inc.


42 Aero Camino, Goleta, CA 93117
(805) 685-0066, Fax (805) 685-0067
info@biopac.com
www.biopac.com

Manual Revision 3.7.6


09112009
 BIOPAC Systems, Inc.
Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6 Page 5

II. EXPERIMENTAL OBJECTIVES


1) Record and compare changes in pulmonary airflow before, during, and after a brief period of moderate exercise.
2) Record and compare changes in respiratory rate and changes in heart rate before, during, and after the exercise
period.
3) Compare and note any changes in Lead II electrocardiogram recorded before, during, and after moderate exercise.
4) Record and compare changes in skin temperature associated with the brief periods of moderate exercise and
recovery.

III. MATERIALS
 BIOPAC airflow transducer with removable, cleanable head (SS11LA)
o If using older SS11L transducers with non-removable head, insert into the larger diameter port.
 BIOPAC disposable mouthpiece and bacteriological filter
 Optional: BIOPAC Autoclaveable Reusable Mouthpiece (AFT8)
 Nose clip
 BIOPAC Temperature Transducer SS6L (Fast Response Thermistor)
 Tape
 BIOPAC electrode lead set (SS2LA/L)
 BIOPAC disposable vinyl electrodes (EL503), 3 electrodes per Subject
 BIOPAC electrode gel (GEL1) and abrasive pad (ELPAD) or Skin cleanser or alcohol prep
 Biopac Student Lab System: software BSL 3.7.3 or above
data acquisition unit MP36, MP35, or MP30 (Windows only)
 Computer System

IV. EXPERIMENTAL METHODS

 For further explanation, use the online support options under the Help Menu.
A. SET UP
FAST TRACK Set Up DETAILED EXPLANATION OF SET UP STEPS
1. Turn the computer ON.
 The desktop should appear on the monitor. If it does not appear,
2. Make sure the BIOPAC MP3X unit is turned ask the laboratory instructor for assistance.
OFF.

3. Plug the equipment in as follows:
Airflow Transducer (SS11LA) — CH 1
Electrode lead set (SS2LA/L) — CH 2
Temp.Transducer (SS6L) — CH 3

4. Turn the MP3X Data Acquisition Unit ON.

Set Up continues… Figure 15.4


Page 6 Lesson 15: Aerobic Exercise Physiology
5. Select a willing Subject. The Subject should be able to perform moderate exercise for up to 10
minutes and will need to remove his/her top to allow electrode placement
WARNING as shown in Fig. 15.7.
Any person with a history of heart Subject should not have any prior medical history related to heart or
failure or respiratory conditions, such as respiratory conditions.
asthma, should not be a Subject.

6. Insert a clean mouthpiece (and filter if IMPORTANT: If your lab sterilizes the airflow heads after each use,
applicable) onto the airflow transducer as make sure a clean head is installed now.
described below: Have the Subject personally remove the filter and mouthpiece from the
plastic packaging. This mouthpiece will become the Subject’s personal
To be safe, follow this procedure mouthpiece. It is advisable to write the Subject’s name on the
precisely to make sure the airflow mouthpiece and filter with a permanent marker so they can be reused
transducer is sterile. later.

 If not sterilizing the head after each If using SS11LA transducer and not sterilizing the head after each use,
use: insert a filter and mouthpiece into the airflow transducer on the side
labeled “Inlet.”
Insert a filter and mouthpiece into the
airflow transducer on the side labeled
“Inlet.”

IMPORTANT!
Always insert on the
side labeled “Inlet”

Figure 15.5 SS11LA with unsterilized head

 If sterilizing the head after each use: If using SS11LA transducer and sterilizing the head after each use, insert
a disposable mouthpiece (BIOPAC AFT2) or an autoclavable mouthpiece
Insert a disposable mouthpiece (BIOPAC (BIOPAC AFT8) into the airflow transducer on the side labeled “Inlet.”
AFT2) or an autoclavable mouthpiece
(BIOPAC AFT8) into the airflow
transducer on the side labeled “Inlet

IMPORTANT!
Always insert on the
side labeled “Inlet”

Figure 15.6 SS11LA with sterilized head


7. Place three electrodes on the Subject (Fig 15.7 The approximate placement is shown in Fig. 15.8 below. This creates a
below). Lead II configuration that is much less prone to EMG artifact.

Set Up continues…
Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6 Page 7
8. Attach the electrode lead set (SS2L) to the
electrodes (Fig. 15.7).

WHITE lead

electrodes
BLACK lead
(Ground)
RED lead

Right side left side

Figure 15.7
Each of the pinch connectors on the end of the electrode cable needs to
be attached to a specific electrode. The electrode cables are each a
different color, and you should follow Fig. 15.7 to ensure that you
connect each cable to the proper electrode.
The pinch connectors work like a small clothespin, but will only latch
onto the nipple of the electrode from one side of the connector.
Position the electrode cables such that they are not pulling on the
electrodes. Connect the electrode cable clip (where the cable meets the
three individual colored wires) to a convenient location (can be on the
Subject’s clothes). This will relieve cable strain.

9. Tape the temperature transducer (SS6L) to the The temperature transducer should be taped to the fingertip, as shown:
fingertip (Fig. 15.8).

Sensor end of
Temperature
transducer
(SS6L)

Taped to finger tip


Figure 15.8
The temperature transducer will accurately measure the change in
temperature, which in this lesson is the value it has been set up to
measure. (Note: In this lesson, the transducer has not been set up to
measure absolute temperature and that value may not be accurate.)
For this lesson, skin temperature at rest is assumed to be 90 F.
10. Start the Biopac Student Lab Program.

11. Choose lesson “L15” and click OK.
Lesson L15 is Aerobic Exercise Physiology.
12. Type in your filename.
Use a unique identifier.
13. Click OK.
This ends the default Setup.
END OF SETUP
Page 8 Lesson 15: Aerobic Exercise Physiology
B. CALIBRATION
The Calibration procedure establishes the hardware’s internal parameters (such as gain, offset, and scaling) and is critical for
optimum performance. Pay close attention to the Calibration procedure.
FAST TRACK Calibration DETAILED EXPLANATION OF CALIBRATION STEPS
1. Double check the electrodes, and make sure the Make sure the electrodes adhere securely to the skin. If they are being
Subject is relaxed. pulled up, you will not get a good ECG signal.
The Subject must be relaxed during the calibration procedure. The
Subject’s arms and legs need to be relaxed so that the muscle (EMG)
signal does not corrupt the ECG signal.
2. Subject should put on a nose clip and
breathe through the airflow transducer (Fig.
15.9).

Important!
Always breathe through
the side labeled “Inlet.”

Figure 15.9
3. Click Calibrate. The Calibrate button is in the upper left corner of the Setup window. This
will start the calibration recording.
4. Subject should relax and breathe normally. The Subject needs to remain relaxed and breathe normally through the
airflow transducer until calibration stops.
5. Wait for the calibration procedure to stop. The calibration procedure will stop automatically after 8 seconds.
6. Check the calibration data: At the end of the 8-sec calibration recording, the screen should resemble
Fig. 15.10.
 If similar, proceed to Data Recording.

 If different, Redo Calibration.

Figure 15.10
The “airflow” recording should show signal variation, the ECG recording
should be a reduced waveform with a relatively flat baseline, and the “Skin
temp” recording should be a relatively flat line.
If your data resembles Fig. 15.10, proceed to the Data Recording section.
If the data shows any large deviations or large baseline drifts, or there is no
signal detected on the airflow or ECG recording, then you should recheck
your connections and redo the calibration by clicking on the Redo
Calibration button and repeating the entire calibration sequence.
END OF CALIBRATION
Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6 Page 9
C. RECORDING LESSON DATA
FAST TRACK Recording DETAILED EXPLANATION OF RECORDING STEPS

1. Prepare for the recording. For this lesson, there is some flexibility in how the data is recorded:
 You may continuously record through the exercise and resting period.
 Alternately, you may use the Suspend/Resume button to take
segments of data at various intervals; this method saves a lot of
memory and disk space.
Four channels of data will be displayed during the recording: ECG, ECG
Rate, airflow, and skin temperature.

Your instructor will specify the type and


duration of exercise.
This lesson describes a continuous recording
method and includes data samples from a
stepping-in-place exercise.

Figure 15.11

Hints for obtaining optimal data:


a) Apply the electrodes at least 5 minutes before exercising. Sweating
tends to affect the adhesion of the electrodes to the skin.
b) Subject’s clothing should not interfere with electrodes during the
recording; Subject may need to leave his/her top off during the
recording.
c) Subject should try to minimize EMG artifact generated in the arms
and chest, which will interfere with the ECG signal. This may be
difficult depending on how the exercise is performed.
d) Subject should try to relax the arm holding the airflow transducer so
EMG artifact is minimized.
e) Always insert the filter and mouthpiece and breathe through the side
of the SS11LA airflow transducer labeled “Inlet.”
2. Calculate the Subject’s maximum heart rate Calculate and record the Subject’s maximum heart rate before the Subject
for exercise. starts to exercise using the following formula:
To be safe, use 80% of the maximum heart rate:
Subject’s calculated maximum 0.8 [220 – (age) ] = Maximum Heart Rate for Subject
heart rate:
The Subject should not exceed this rate during exercise.
______________________

3. Click Record. You will begin to record data.


When you begin recording, a thermometer style bar graph will appear on
the right side of the graph window. It is simply a visual aid for monitoring
the Subject’s BPM and only works while data is being recorded; it does
not appear in the Review Saved Data mode.
4. Subject delays start of exercise for 5 seconds, After about 5 seconds of recording, the Director should instruct the
then starts exercising. Subject to start exercising.
Recording continues… Keep recording after the Subject stops exercising.
Page 10 Lesson 15: Aerobic Exercise Physiology

WARNING
The Director should monitor heart rate
and ensure that the Subject does not
exceed the maximal heart rate
calculated above.

Recorder should insert event markers: To insert event markers, press F9 on Windows or Esc on Mac and label
each marker. Marker labels can be added or edited after recording.
a) At beginning of exercise
 “Begin”
b) If Subject begins to sweat

 “Sweating”
c) If intensity of exercise changes

 “description of change”
5. Subject should continue to exercise until one You need to continue to record after the Subject stops exercising. Your lab
of the following occurs: instructor should specify the length of this recording segment for you. In
most cases, 5 minutes would be the recommended minimum for this
a) Subject reaches maximum heart rate.
segment.
b) Subject feels lightheaded.
To insert event markers, press F9 on Windows or Esc on Mac and label
c) The recording runs 5 minutes. each marker. Marker labels can be added or edited after recording.
When Subject stops, Recorder should insert
event marker.

 “Stop”
6. Continue to record (for up to 5 minutes) while The Instructor may specify a different amount of time.
Subject is recovering from exercise.
7. Click Suspend. When you click Suspend, the recording should halt, giving you time to
review the data.
8. Review the data on the screen. If all went well, data should look similar to Fig. 15.12.
 If similar, go to Step 10.

Figure 15.12

Note Data could vary significantly, depending on the recording method


and exercise performed.

 If different, go to Step 9. The data might be different if:


a) There is a loss of signal on any channel, indicating that one or more
transducers or electrodes slipped off.
b) The Suspend button was pressed prematurely
c) There is significant variation in the ECG BPM data within a short
time interval, indicating that too much EMG artifact is present in
Recording continues… the ECG signal.
Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6 Page 11

d) There is an extreme, large baseline drift, indicating that an electrode


peeled up or is not adhering properly.
Note: It is normal to have some baseline drift during exercise, as
shown in the figure.
9. Click Redo. Click Redo and repeat Steps 3-8. Note that once you press Redo, the data
you have just recorded will be erased.
10. Click Done. After you press Done, a pop-up window with options will appear. Make
your choice, and continue as directed.
If choosing the “Record from another Subject” option:
a) Repeat Set Up Steps 5-8 for new Subject and continue the entire
lesson from Set Up Step 10.
b) Each Subject will need to use a unique file name.
11. Remove the electrodes and transducers. Remove the electrode cable pinch connectors, and peel off the electrodes.
Throw out the electrodes (BIOPAC electrodes are not reusable). Wash
electrode gel residue from the skin, using soap and water. Electrodes may
leave a slight ring on the skin for a few hours. This is normal, and does not
indicate anything wrong.
END OF RECORDING

V. DATA ANALYSIS
FAST TRACK Data Analysis DETAILED EXPLANATION OF DATA ANALYSIS STEPS

1. Enter the Review Saved Data mode and


choose the correct file.
 Enter the Review Saved Data mode.
 Note Channel Number (CH) designations:
Channel Displays
CH 1 Airflow
CH 2 ECG
CH 3 Skin Temperature
CH 41 Heart Rate Figure 15.13

 Confirm measurement settings:  The measurement boxes are above the marker region in the data
Channel Measurement window. Each measurement has three sections: channel number,
measurement type, and result. The first two sections are pull-down menus
CH 41 Value that are activated when you click them.
CH 1 BPM The following is a brief description of these specific measurements.
CH 1 Max Value: displays the amplitude value for the channel at the point selected
CH 3 Value by the I-beam cursor. If a single point is selected, the value is for that
point, if an area is selected, the value is the endpoint of the selected area.
BPM: The Beats Per Minute measurement first calculates the difference
in time between the end and beginning of the area selected by the I-Beam
tool (same as T), and divides this value into 60 seconds/minute.
Max: The maximum measurement finds the maximum amplitude value
within the area selected by the I-Beam tool (including the endpoints).
The “selected area” is the area selected by the I-Beam tool (including the
endpoints).
2. Setup your display window for optimal This is the period before the Subject started exercising.
viewing of the first 5 seconds at the start of
data collection.
Data Analysis continues…
Page 12 Lesson 15: Aerobic Exercise Physiology

 These tools can be used to adjust the data window:


Display menu: Autoscale horizontal, Autoscale waveforms, Zoom Previous
Scroll Bars: Time (Horizontal); Amplitude (Vertical)
Cursor Tools: Zoom Tool
Buttons: Overlap, Split, Show Grid, Hide Grid
3. Using the I-Beam cursor, choose a point within
the 5-second interval and take the heart rate
and skin temperature measurements (Fig.
15.14).

A

Figure 15.14
Note: In Figure 15.14, the BPM measurement is not giving an
accurate reading because only one point is selected.
4. Using the I-Beam cursor, select an area from The airflow transducer records inhalation as positive values, no airflow as
the start of one inhale to the start of the next 0, and exhalation as negative values. Therefore, the start of inhalation is
inhale, and take the BPM and max airflow recorded as the ascending positive waveform starting at 0. The end of
measurements exhalation is where the recording ends at 0 from a negative value.
(Fig. 15.15). Start of inhale Start of next inhale

A

Figure 15.15
5. Scroll to the Exercise segment of the recording Choose a point value for the heart rate (CH 41 value) and skin temperature
and take measurements at every 30-second (CH3 value) measurements, and select an area from the start of one inhale
interval (0 sec., 30 sec., 60 sec., etc.) to to the start of the next inhale for the breathing rate (CH1 BPM) and max
complete Table 15.2 of the Data Report. airflow (CH1 max) measurements.

B
6. Scroll to the post-exercise segment of the
recording and take measurements to complete
Table 15.3.
 You may save the data to a drive, save notes that are in the journal, or
C print the data file.
7. Save or print the data file.
8. Exit the program.
END OF DATA ANALYSIS

END OF LESSON 15
Complete the Lesson 15 Report that follows.
Lesson 15: Aerobic Exercise Physiology Page 13

Aerobic Exercise Physiology


Cardiovascular and Respiratory Adjustments
* ECG During and Post-Exercise
* Ventilation During and Post-Exercise
* Heat Exchange

DATA REPORT

Student’s Name:
Lab Section:
Date:

I. Data and Calculations


Subject Profile
Name Height

Age Gender: Male / Female Weight

Calculated maximum heart rate:

A. Pre-exercise
Complete Table 15.1 with the requested measurements for data in the 5-second interval before exercise.
Table 15.1
Heart Rate Breathing Rate Airflow Skin Temp

B. During Exercise
Complete Table 15.2 with the requested measurements for data during exercise.

*Note Time references are the starting points of the exercise segment and do not correspond to the data window’s
horizontal time scale. You may not have collected 5 minutes of data.
Table 15.2
Time* Time* Heart Rate Breathing Rate Airflow Skin Temp
(min) (secs)
0
0
30
60
1
90
120
2
150
180
3
210
240
4
270
5 300
Page 14 Lesson 15: Aerobic Exercise Physiology
C. Post-Exercise
Complete Table 15.3 with the requested measurements for data after exercise.

*Note Time references are the starting points of the post-exercise segment and do not correspond to the data window’s
horizontal time scale. You may not have collected 5 minutes of data.
Table 15.3
Time* Time* Heart Rate Breathing Rate Airflow Skin Temp
(min) (secs)
0
0
30
60
1
90
120
2
150
180
3
210
240
4
270
5 300

II. Questions:
D. Using your data, compare changes in pulmonary airflow that occurred during exercise and during the recovery period.

E. Is pulmonary airflow synonymous with pulmonary ventilation? Justify your answer.

F. Use the data in Tables 15.2 and 15.3 to describe changes in respiratory rate and heart rate that occur during and after
moderate exercise. Explain the physiological basis of the observed changes.
Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6 Page 15
G. How long did it take for heart rate, respiratory rate, and pulmonary airflow to return to resting (pre-exercise) levels?

H. Compare the electrocardiogram recorded during the pre-exercise, exercise, and post-exercise periods, and describe any
observed changes.

I. Compare changes in skin temperature recorded before, during, and after exercise. Explain the physiological basis of the
observed changes.

J. When exercising, does wiping off sweat help cool the body? Why or why not?

K. By what cellular chemical process is most of the ATP requirement for exercising skeletal muscles met?

L. What is meant by the term “oxygen debt”?

M. A high oxygen debt is associated with a low blood pH. Why and how?
Page 16 Lesson 15: Aerobic Exercise Physiology
N. Explain why and how dynamic exercise increases cardiac output.

O. List four other cardiovascular responses to dynamic exercise.

End of Lesson 15 Data Report


Physiology Lessons Lesson 16
for use with the
BLOOD PRESSURE
Biopac Student Lab  Indirect measurement
 Ventricular Systole & Diastole
 Korotkoff sounds
Richard Pflanzer, Ph.D.  Mean Arterial pressure
Associate Professor Emeritus
Indiana University School of Medicine
Purdue University School of Science

William McMullen
Vice President
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

BIOPAC® Systems, Inc.


42 Aero Camino, Goleta, CA 93117
(805) 685-0066, Fax (805) 685-0067
info@biopac.com
www.biopac.com

Manual Revision 3.7.6


09112009
 BIOPAC Systems, Inc.
Lesson 16: Blood Pressure Page 5

By convention, blood pressures determined by indirect methods are expressed in the form of a ratio: systolic pressure/diastolic
pressure. For example, if systolic pressure was measured as 135 mm Hg and diastolic pressure was measured as 80 mm Hg,
systemic arterial blood pressure would be expressed as 135/80, and pulse pressure would be 55 mm Hg. If the sound became
muffled at 85 mm Hg and disappeared at 80 mm Hg, the systemic arterial blood pressure would be expressed as 135/85-80.

A note about your BP reading from this lab

There are many factors that influence blood pressure measurement, such as: genetics, age, body weight, state of physical activity,
level of salt, caffeine or other drugs in the system, monitor’s hearing, etc.

The Journal of the American Medical Association published the following blood pressure classification data (Table 16.1) from the
Seventh Report of the National High Blood Pressure Education Program’s Joint National Committee on Prevention, Detection,
Evaluation, and Treatment of High Blood Pressure (JNC 7):

CLASSIFICATION OF BLOOD PRESSURE


for Adults Aged 18 Years or Older
BP Classification Systolic mmHg Diastolic mmHg Lifestyle Modification
Normal < 120 and < 80 Encourage
Prehypertension 120-139 or 80-89 Yes
Stage 1 hypertension 140-159 or 90-99 Yes
Stage 2 hypertension  160 or  100 Yes
Note:Diagnosis of high blood pressure is based on the average of two or more readings taken at each of two or more visits
after initial screening. Unusually low readings should be evaluated for clinical significance. © 2003 AMA
Table 16.1 JNC 7 Blood Pressure Classifications

If your blood pressure as determined from this lesson is “high,” you should not be too concerned. A mistake may have been made
in the measurement, or there may be other factors affecting your system that resulted in a temporarily high reading.

If you are concerned about it, please consult your doctor. Do not try to diagnose or treat yourself based on the laboratory blood
pressure readings.
Please review the following procedure before you come into the lab so recording can proceed quickly.

Blood Pressure Measurement


The following is a review of the basic clinical blood pressure measurement procedure using the sphygmomanometer and
stethoscope, with an explanation of the logic behind each step.
As discussed earlier, this is an indirect blood pressure measurement. It can be fairly accurate if performed exactly as
described, but will nonetheless provide only an approximation of the absolute blood pressure.
It is important that you try to minimize errors by following the measurement procedure as detailed, and it is also important
that you realize it is impossible to eliminate all errors.
Note: The actual procedure used in this lesson will have a few additional steps since you will be
simultaneously recording the parameters.
Basic measurement step Reason
1. Select the proper size cuff for your Subject. Cuffs come in several sizes and it is important that you select
the right size cuff for Subject’s arm because if the cuff is too
 The BIOPAC sphygmomanometer cuff is
large you may get incorrect low readings, and if it is too small
designed for arms with a circumference from 25.4
you may get incorrect high readings.
cm (10 inches) to 40.6 cm (16 inches). This is the
standard adult range, and is marked on the cuff to
make sure you fall within it. If this cuff does not
fit your Subject, you should use another Subject
for this lesson so the readings are accurate.
2. Make sure all the air in the sphygmomanometer cuff is If air is left in the cuff you may get a false high reading
expelled before use. because an excessive amount of pressure will be required to
 Turn the release valve fully counter-clockwise and occlude the brachial artery.
roll the cuff up while squeezing it.
Page 6 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

Basic measurement step Reason


3. Close the valve.
 Turn the release valve fully clockwise.
4. Position Subject’s arm at heart level. You need to minimize the effects of gravity. Arm above heart
 Hold up Subject’s arm, or level can give false low readings, and arm below heart level
can give false high readings.
 Have Subject rest his/her arm on the lab table.
5. Place the cuff so that the “Artery” label is over The cuff pressure must be applied directly to the artery, which
Subject’s brachial artery (with the arrow on the label requires the bladder inside the cuff to be in the proper position.
facing down).
 There is an “Artery” label (with arrow) that is
sewn into the cuff.
6. Position the cuff such that the lower edge of the cuff is The cuff edge should be high enough to avoid covering any
1.5 to 2 inches above the antecubital fossa (inner aspect part of the stethoscope diaphragm. This is to minimize any
of elbow). extraneous noise cause by the cuff rubbing against the
diaphragm.
7. Wrap the cuff evenly and snugly around Subject’s arm A loose cuff can give a false high reading because of the
and allow the Velcro® to hold it in place. increased pressure required to occlude the brachial artery.
 After it is snugly in place, you may wish to inflate
the cuff slightly (10-20 mmHg) so that it will stay
in place.
8. Make sure all the rubber tubing and cables of both the Any tubing on the sphygmomanometer that is pinched can
sphygmomanometer cuff and stethoscope are not cause false pressure reading and if the stethoscope tubing is
tangled or pinched. pinched, it can greatly reduce the loudness of the Korotkoff
sounds.
9. Position the sphygmomanometer pressure dial indicator Reading the dial at an angle can cause inaccurate readings due
such that you can read the face of the dial straight on. to parallax error.
 The dial indicator can be clipped to the strap sewn
into the cuff above the “Artery” label.
Notes for the following steps:
a) It is important to not inflate the cuff higher than is Besides causing pain for Subject, an overinflated cuff may
needed. produce a vasospasm, which can cause incorrect pressure
readings.
b) It is important to not leave the cuff at a high pressure Besides discomfort for Subject (which can elevate blood
for an extended period of time. pressure), occlusion of blood caused by the cuff creates venous
congestion in the forearm. The blood must be allowed to drain
or it can lead to incorrect pressure readings. For the same
reason, it important to wait at least one (1) minute between
successive blood pressure measurements.
Step we will use:
10. Palpate the brachial artery between the antecubital The stethoscope diaphragm needs to be placed over the
fossa and the lower edge of the cuff to find where the brachial artery where the Korotkoff sounds are best heard.
pulse is best felt.
This procedure can be a bit tricky so take note: The pulse is felt
 Use your first and second fingers to feel the when the artery is compressed over bone or firm tissue. To feel
pulsation of the brachial artery on the inside of the pulse, compress the artery firmly then ease up on the
your elbow. pressure slightly. After a few tries you should get the hang of
 During the actual lesson, you can note this position it.
by marking the spot with a washable felt pen.
Lesson 16: Blood Pressure Page 7

Basic measurement step Reason


Alternate technique:
10. Inflate the cuff to 110 mmHg and place the stethoscope This alternate procedure can result in optimal placement of the
diaphragm over the brachial artery between the stethoscope diaphragm, but it can take longer to find. As noted
antecubital fossa and the lower edge of the cuff and above, it is not safe to inflate the cuff for a long period of time,
move it around to find the place where the sounds are so this technique is not used in the lesson because when you
best heard. add the steps required to perform the recording, it simply takes
too long.
Step we will use:
11. Inflate the cuff to 160 mmHg. If cuff is not inflated high enough, true systolic pressure may
 Pump the cuff rapidly then release to reduce distal be missed.
vasculatory engorgement. This technique has the advantage of being quick and easy, and
 It is assumed that the majority of Subjects in the for reasons discussed above, it is preferable to minimize the
physiology lab will have systolic pressures below amount of time the cuff is at high pressure. The disadvantage
this pressure. of this technique is that it uses more pressure than most
Subjects probably need, and (in rare cases) it may miss the
point of diastolic pressure. However, because a simultaneous
recording will be per-formed, and time will be time spent
reviewing the recording procedure, this is the best technique
because it is fast.
Alternate technique:
11. Either by listening through the stethoscope, or by This technique makes sure the cuff pressure does not go
palpating the radial artery (on flexor surface of wrist), excessively high.
inflate the cuff 20 to 30 mmHg above the point at
which the sounds or pulse disappear.
12. Place the stethoscope in the correct position. Excessive pressure could distort the artery and give incorrect
pressure indications (usually gives a diastolic pressure reading
 Do not push down excessively on it and try to
that is too low). Also, excessive pressure can cause the
maintain a constant pressure against the skin.
stethoscope to rub on Subject’s skin, which may generate
extraneous noise.
13. Release the pressure at a rate of 2 to 3 mmHg/second. Deflating too slowly produces venous congestion, which can
give false high diastolic pressure readings. Deflating too
rapidly leads to inaccuracies because the actual point of
systolic or diastolic pressure could lie between heartbeats. The
slower the heart rate, the more inaccurate the reading.
14. Note the pressure at which the Korotkoff sounds first This sound indicates the pressure closest to the systolic
appear (systolic). pressure.
15. Continue to listen and note the pressure when the This pressure is close to the point of diastolic pressure.
sounds completely disappear (diastolic).
Note: The point at which the sounds become muffled is closer
to the diastolic pressure but since it’s easier to detect the
disappearance of sound—and the difference between the two is
small—we will use the point of disappearance of sound.
16. Deflate the cuff as rapidly as possible after all the This will minimize patient discomfort and reduce venous
sounds disappear. congestion.

When evaluating a patient or Subject, you will normally take their blood pressure at different points in time and/or under
different circumstances (at rest vs. after exercise, etc.) to see how the blood pressure changes. With this in mind, it becomes
important that your technique is consistent every time you do it. If two people use different techniques, they may get slightly
different readings, but the difference (or delta)—which can be the more important factor—will be very consistent for each
person.
Page 8 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

II. EXPERIMENTAL OBJECTIVES


1. To use an auscultatory method for an indirect determination of systemic arterial systolic and diastolic blood
pressures and to correlate the appearance and disappearance of vascular sound with systolic and diastolic pressures
respectively.
2. To measure, record, and compare systemic arterial blood pressure in the right arm and the left arm of the same
Subject under identical conditions.
3. To measure, record, and compare systemic arterial blood pressures in the same Subject under different experimental
conditions of rest and exercise.
4. To compute and compare pulse pressure and mean arterial pressure under different experimental conditions of rest
and exercise.
5. To compute the pulse pressure wave velocity by measuring the time between the R-wave of the ECG and the
Korotkoff sounds.

III. MATERIALS
 BIOPAC Pressure Cuff (SS19L with gauge dial for MP3X or SS19LA with onscreen gauge display for MP45)
 BIOPAC Stethoscope (SS30L)
 BIOPAC Electrode Lead Set (SS2L or SS2LA)
 Electrodes – disposable, 3 per Subject (EL503)
 Rubbing alcohol and swab (to clean stethoscope earpieces and stethoscope diaphragm)
 Tape measure (for pulse speed calculation)
 Optional: washable felt pen (to mark stethoscope placement on arm)
 Biopac Student Lab System: software BSL 3.7.3 or above if using MP3X or BSL 3.7.5 if using MP45
data acquisition unit MP36, MP35, MP30 (Windows only), or MP45
 Computer System

IV. EXPERIMENTAL METHODS

 For further explanation, use the online support options under the Help Menu.
A. SETUP
FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION
1. Select your lab group. Lab Group Requirements:
You should work in a group of at least 3 people. One person will be
CAUTION! Subject, one (Recorder) will operate the computer, and another person
(Director) will perform the blood pressure measurement.
Subject selected must not have had or
now have any disorder, hypertension, Subject must meet the qualifications listed to the left.
heart surgery, stroke, or any history of
cardiovascular degeneration. Recorder is responsible for starting and stopping the recording, and
adding markers to the recording. Only Recorder should look at the
Subject must not have consumed computer screen.
caffeine, smoked, or performed heavy
exercise within one hour of the Director should perform the measurement normally, without regard to the
recording. recording aspect, but should call out the points of systolic and diastolic
pressure so that Recorder can add the markers to the data recording.
The name of the lesson file should be Director’s name.
2. Make sure the BIOPAC MP3X unit is
turned OFF. 

Setup continues…
Lesson 16: Blood Pressure Page 9

3. Plug the equipment in as follows (Fig.


16.7):
BP Cuff (SS19L/LA) — CH 1
Stethoscope (SS30L) — CH 3 *
Electrode lead set (SS2LA/L) — CH 4 **
__________________________________
If an MP45 is used for recording:
* Stethoscope is CH 2
** ECG is not recorded

4. Turn the MP3X Data Acquisition Unit ON.


5. Turn the computer ON.

Figure 16.7 MP3X (top) and MP45 (bottom) equipment connections

 The desktop should appear on the monitor. If it does not appear, ask
the laboratory instructor for assistance.
6. Place three electrodes on the Subject as The standard electrode placement is shown in Fig. 16.8 below.
shown. Fig 16.8.
 It is important that you follow the electrode procedure below to
obtain an optimal ECG recording:
a) Abrade the surface of the skin at the points of electrode placement
(see following figure) in about a 2” diameter.
Do not use alcohol to clean the skin. Alcohol will dry the skin and
prevent good electrical contact with the electrode.
b) Peel off an electrode using the tab. Try not to touch the adhesive.
c) Place a drop of GEL1 electrode gel onto the small sponge of the
electrode (without allowing any gel to get on the adhesive).
d) Attach the electrodes to the skin in the positions shown (over the
previously abraded areas).

 An alternate placement is shown on


page 10 which may not be practical in
every lab group, but will yield the best
data.

Setup continues… Figure 16.8 Standard Electrode placement


Page 10 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

7. Attach the electrode lead set (SS2LA/L) to


the electrodes as shown, paying close
attention to the lead colors (Fig. 16.9).

Figure 16.9 Standard electrode lead attachment


Each of the pinch connectors on the end of the electrode cable needs to be
attached to a specific electrode. The electrode cables are each a different
color and you should follow the figure provided to ensure that you connect
each cable to the proper electrode.
The pinch connectors work like a small clothespin, but will only latch onto
the nipple of the electrode from one side of the connector.
Position the electrode cables such that they are not pulling on the
electrodes. Connect the electrode cable clip (where the cable meets the
three individual colored wires) to a convenient location (can be on the
Subject’s clothes). This will relieve cable strain.
8. Clean the stethoscope earpieces and Before using the stethoscope, clean each earpiece with rubbing alcohol and
diaphragm. allow it to dry completely. You should also clean the surface of the
stethoscope diaphragm (the part that comes in contact with the skin) for
9. Open the cuff valve and roll the cuff in on
each new Subject.
itself, then press to flatten and close the
valve. This will release all pressure from the cuff.
10. Start the Biopac Student Lab Program.

11. Choose lesson “L16” (L16-Blood Pressure)
Use a unique identifier. The file name should be the Director’s identifier
and click OK.
(the one performing the blood pressure measurement vs. Subject). Click
12. Type in the Director’s filename and click OK to end default setup.
OK.
13. Optional Set Preferences. This lesson has optional Preferences for data and display while recording.
 Choose File > Preferences. Per your Lab Instructor’s guidelines, you may set:
 Select an option. Journal Text: show minimum guiding text vs. detailed text
Grids: show or hide gridlines
 Select the desired setting and click OK. Recording Length: allow from 30 seconds to 30 minutes of data
If running BSL 37.5 with an MP45, you may also set:
Gauge Color:
Choose blue or white
background with
contrasting dial
END OF SET UP

WHITE lead
An alternate electrode placement is shown at
right. This placement will yield the best results electrodes
but may not be practical in your lab. BLACK lead
RED lead
(Ground)

Right side left side


Figure 16.10 Alternate electrode lead attachment
Lesson 16: Blood Pressure Page 11

B. CALIBRATION
Calibration establishes the hardware’s internal parameters (such as gain, offset, and scaling) and is critical for optimum
performance. Pay close attention to Calibration.

FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION


Cuff is not on Subject during calibration. Calibration is only required once for multiple subjects.

1. Double check the electrodes and Make sure the electrodes adhere securely to the skin. If they are being
stethoscope, and make sure Subject is pulled up, you will not get a good ECG signal.
relaxed and sitting down. Subject must be relaxed during the calibration procedure so that the
muscle (EMG) signal does not corrupt the ECG signal. The Calibrate
2. Click Calibrate. button is in the upper left corner of the program window. This will start
the calibration recording.

3. Confirm cuff is deflated and click OK.

4. Director should inflate the cuff to 100 Pump the bulb to inflate the cuff until the gauge reads 100 mmHg. (You
These steps only required with MP3X (not MP45).

mmHg and then tell the Recorder that may need to pump 10 to 12 times to establish enough pressure in the cuff
he/she is ready. for a gauge reading.)

5. Recorder should click OK.Director Recorder should wait until the Director gives the go ahead.
should deflate the cuff to 40 mmHg and
then tell the Recorder that he/she is
ready.

Use the pressure release valve to deflate the cuff pressure to 40 mmHg.
6. Recorder should click OK.  Do not worry if you are not exactly at 40mmHg.
But it is important to try to keep the pressure constant.
Recorder should wait until the Director gives the go ahead.

The calibration recording will begin when OK is clicked.

7. Director taps the stethoscope diaphragm After the calibration recording begins, tap lightly on the stethoscope
twice. diaphragm. Calibration will stop automatically after 8 seconds.
The calibration recording should resemble Fig. 16.11. The stethoscope
8. Check calibration data: wave should have clear spikes to indicate when it was lightly tapped.

 If similar, proceed to Data


Recording.

Figure 16.11
 If different, Redo Calibration. If data resembles Fig. 17.8, proceed to Data Recording.
If you need to redo calibration, recheck connections and click Redo
Calibration, then repeat the entire calibration sequence.
END OF CALIBRATION
Page 12 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

Practice pressure release


To obtain accurate measurements, it is important that the cuff pressure is released at a rate of 2-3 mmHg per second. You are
encouraged to practice pressure release several times before proceeding to the recording segment. To practice, you’ll need a watch
or clock with a second hand. The following steps will help you develop a consistent pressure release technique:
a) Open the cuff valve and roll the cuff in on itself, then press to flatten and close the valve.
 This will release all pressure from the cuff.
b) Pump the cuff bulb until the pressure dial reads 160 mmHg.
c) Tell the timer when you are ready, and slowly turn the valve counter-clockwise to begin releasing the cuff pressure.
 Open the valve slowly so that you don’t have a large pressure drop, and try to maintain an even release.
 To keep the release rate constant, you may need to open the valve more as the cuff pressure diminishes.
d) When pressure is at 100 mmHg, say “Stop” and ask the timer how long that took.
 It should take you about 20-30 seconds to drop 60 mmHg.
e) Repeat as necessary until you can release cuff pressure at 2-3 mmHg per second.

C. RECORDING LESSON DATA


FAST TRACK Recording DETAILED EXPLANATION OF RECORDING STEPS
1. Prepare for the recording. This lesson records blood pressure and vascular sounds from the stethoscope
in a total of seven segments. Two channels of data will be displayed during
the recording: Pressure and Stethoscope.
CAUTION! Hints for obtaining optimal data:
Do not inflate the cuff higher than is
needed. Never leave the cuff at high a) Subject must not have consumed caffeine or smoked within one hour of
pressure (more than 120 mmHg) for the recording and should relax for a few minutes before recording
more than 1 minute. begins.
b) Subject should never hold up his/her own arm or flex the bicep muscle.
The arm must be in a relaxed state to minimize EMG artifact.
c) Director should find an arrangement that makes it easy to inflate and
deflate the cuff while viewing the pressure dial indicator.
d) Director must not leave the cuff at a high pressure for an extended
period of time.
e) Earpieces of the stethoscope should not be too tight.
f) The room should be quiet so you can easily hear the sounds through the
stethoscope.
2. Review the Blood Pressure measurement It is hoped that you will review the procedure before you come into the lab,
procedure provided in the Introduction so that you may go through the recordings more quickly. The lesson will
(pages 5-7). carefully guide you through all the steps, but it important to review the core
part of the measurement. In the real clinical setting you will probably not be
simultaneously recording the data.
3. Make sure all the air in the Turn the release valve fully counter-clockwise and roll the cuff up while
sphygmomanometer cuff is expelled and squeezing it. Turn the pressure release valve fully clockwise.
close the pressure release valve.
4. Place the cuff on Subject’s LEFT arm. The first recording is done on Subject’s left arm.
(Fig. 16.12)
 “Artery” label should be over the brachial
artery (with the arrow on the label facing
down).
 Lower edge of cuff should be 1.5 to 2
inches above the antecubital fossa (inner
aspect of elbow).

Recording continues…
Lesson 16: Blood Pressure Page 13

 Wrap the cuff evenly and snugly on There is an “Artery” label (with
Subject’s arm. arrow) that is sewn into the cuff.
5. Check that the tubing and cables are not The cuff edge should be high
tangled or pinched. enough to avoid covering any part
of the stethoscope diaphragm.
The Velcro® wrap should hold the
cuff in place, but you may wish to
inflate the cuff slightly (10-20
mmHg) so that it will stay in place.
Make sure none of the rubber tubing
and cables of the
sphygmomanometer cuff or the
stethoscope are tangled or pinched.

Figure 16.12

6. Position Subject’s arm at heart level (Fig.


16.13).

Figure 16.13
Find a position that is comfortable for Director and Subject. Director may
hold up Subject’s arm, or Subject may rest his/her arm on the lab table.
Note: Director should hold the pump bulb as shown, with both fingers on
the release valve so it can be easily turned.
7. Palpate the brachial artery between the Use your first (index) and second (middle) fingers to feel the pulsation of the
antecubital fossa and the lower edge of the brachial artery on the inside of the elbow. This can be tricky, but after a few
cuff to find where the pulse is best felt. tries you should get the hang of it. It may help if Subject makes a fist while
 Use your first and second finger. you are trying to locate the pulse.
 Subject may make a fist to help locate
pulse, but should relax arm for the
recording.
8. Mark this spot with a washable felt pen. Once you have located the pulse, mark the spot by tracing along the edge of
the top and bottom of the stethoscope diaphragm, so you can use it for the
9. Make sure the “Artery” label of the cuff is
other recording segments.
aligned with the pulse point.
10. Place the stethoscope in the correct position You need to press firmly enough to establish good contact sound, but you
and apply firm but not excessive contact shouldn’t be pressing too hard into Subject’s arm.
pressure.

Recording continues…
Page 14 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

Problems you may encounter:


a) You can’t hear the Korotkoff sounds.
With some people, it is just difficult to hear the Korotkoff sounds
off of their arm. This does not mean that anything is wrong with
the person’s physical state, so do not alarm them — it’s just a
fact of life. If this is the case, wait one minute and repeat the
measurement using a slightly different position for the
stethoscope diaphragm and/or using the other arm.
Another possibility is that your hearing is not acute enough to
detect the sounds, but the recording is picking them up, which
for the purposes of this lesson is ok. In a real clinical setting, if
you could not hear the sounds, you would need to try a strictly
palpatory method to get the reading. For this lab, since you
probably have a time constraint, you might just switch Subjects.
b) You hear an auscultatory gap.
Wait at least 1 minute, and then try the measurement again. If
this second reading fails, then use the palpatory method with the
brachial or radial artery while inflating the cuff and note the
point where the pulse is no longer felt. This value will be
Subject’s approximate systolic pressure value. The diastolic
value should be found the normal way (disappearance of all
sounds). The recording will not be accurate, but it will allow you
to finish the lessons and answer the questions.
Segment 1 — Left arm, Seated 1
11. Recorder clicks Record when Director is When you click Record, the recording will begin and an append marker
ready. labeled “Left arm, seated 1” will automatically be inserted.
12. Director inflates cuff to 160 mmHg and The majority of Subjects in the physiology lab will have systolic pressures
says when ready. below this pressure. Pump to inflate the cuff— note that the gauge display
may respond slowly.
CAUTION!
Do not leave the cuff at this pressure
for more than 1 minute.
13. Recorder clicks OK.
14. Director releases the pressure at a rate of 2 The first sound (which may resemble a sharp tapping) indicates the pressure
to 3 mmHg/second and calls out when the closest to the systolic pressure.
Korotkoff sounds first appear (systolic).  If Korotkoff Sounds appear at the start of the recorded segment, click
Suspend, Redo, Yes, and Resume and then inflate cuff to 180 mmHg
Recorder inserts an event marker.
(instead of 160 mmHg).
 Systolic — press F4
To insert a pre-labeled event marker, press F4.
 To manually enter a marker and type a label: press F9 on Windows or
Esc on Mac; markers and labels can be edited after recording.
15. Director continues to listen and call out This pressure is close to the point of diastolic pressure.
when the pressure sounds completely
disappear (diastolic).  If sound diminishes but never disappears, note diastolic at the point
sound diminishes.
Recorder inserts an event marker.
To insert a pre-labeled event marker, press F5.
 Diastolic — press F5
 To manually enter a marker and type a label: press F9 on Windows or
Esc on Mac; markers and labels can be edited after recording.

Recording continues…
Lesson 16: Blood Pressure Page 15

16. Director deflates cuff as rapidly as possible Release cuff pressure rapidly to reduce distal vasculatory engorgement
and Recorder clicks Suspend. (reduce venous congestion) and minimize patient discomfort.
Note Some noise from the rapidly deflating cuff may be recorded on the
stethoscope channel. This is normal.
17. Review the data on the screen (Fig.16.14).

 If similar, go to Step 18.

 If different, Redo.

Figure 16.14 After first recording segment


The Pressure wave should be a decreasing slope.
The sound wave (in the Stethoscope channel) should show the appearance
of the Korotkoff sounds after a few seconds, with little noise before or after.
If you see little sounds recorded, the stethoscope was probably not placed
well and you should redo the recording. The ECG wave should not have too
much noise in it.
Segment 2 — Left arm, seated 2
18. Director inflates cuff to 160 mmHg and
says when ready.
19. Recorder clicks Resume. When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append marker
labeled “Left arm, Seated 2” will automatically be inserted.
20. Director releases pressure at a rate of 2 to 3
mmHg/second and calls out when systolic
 If Korotkoff Sounds appear at the start of the recorded segment, click
Suspend, Redo, Yes, and Resume and then inflate cuff to 180 mmHg
and then diastolic are detected.
(instead of 160 mmHg).
Recorder inserts event markers.
To insert pre-labeled event markers, press F4 and then F5.
 Systolic — press F4
 To manually enter a marker and type a label: press F9 on Windows or
 Diastolic — press F5
Esc on Mac; markers and labels can be edited after recording.
21. Recorder clicks Suspend and then Director Click Suspend after diastolic is detected. If sound diminishes but never
deflates cuff as rapidly as possible. disappears, note diastolic at the point sound diminishes. This will minimize
patient discomfort and reduce venous congestion. Note: Some noise from the
rapidly deflating cuff may be recorded on the stethoscope channel at this
point. This is normal.
22. Review the data on the screen.
 If similar, go to Step 23.
 If different, Redo.

Figure 16.14 After second recording segment

Recording continues…
Page 16 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

Segment 3 — Right arm, seated 1


23. Switch cuff to Subject’s right arm. Follow the previously detailed cuff placement guidelines and prepare for
recording (see Steps 4-10).
24. Director returns cuff pressure to 160
mmHg and says when ready.
 Subject remains relaxed and seated
with arm at heart level.
25. Recorder clicks Resume. When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append marker
labeled “Right arm, seated 1” will automatically be inserted.
26. Director releases cuff pressure at 2-3
mmHg/second and calls out when systolic
 If Korotkoff Sounds appear at the start of the recorded segment, click
Suspend, Redo, Yes, and Resume and then inflate cuff to 180 mmHg
and then diastolic sounds are detected.
(instead of 160 mmHg).
Recorder inserts event markers.
To insert pre-labeled event markers, press F4 and then F5.
 Systolic — press F4
 To manually enter a marker and type a label: press F9 on Windows or
 Diastolic — press F5 Esc on Mac; markers and labels can be edited after recording.
27. Recorder clicks Suspend and then Click Suspend after diastolic is detected. If sound diminishes but never
Director deflates cuff as rapidly as disappears, note diastolic at the point sound diminishes.
possible.
This will minimize patient discomfort and reduce venous congestion. Note:
28. Review the data on the screen. Some noise from the rapidly deflating cuff may be recorded on the
stethoscope channel at this point. This is normal.
 If similar, go to Step 29.
See the data sample in Fig. 16.14 for comparison.
 If different, Redo.
Segment 4 — Right arm, Seated 2
29. Director returns cuff pressure to 160
mmHg and says when ready.
 Subject remains relaxed and seated.
30. Recorder clicks Resume. When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append marker
labeled “Right arm, seated 2” will automatically be inserted.
31. Director releases cuff pressure at 2-3
mmHg/second and calls out when systolic
 If Korotkoff Sounds appear at the start of the recorded segment, click
Suspend, Redo, Yes, and Resume and then inflate cuff to 180 mmHg
and then diastolic sounds are detected.
(instead of 160 mmHg).
Recorder inserts event markers.
To insert pre-labeled event markers, press F4 and then F5.
 Systolic — press F4
 To manually enter a marker and type a label: press F9 on Windows or
 Diastolic — press F5 Esc on Mac; markers and labels can be edited after recording.
32. Recorder clicks Suspend and then Click Suspend after diastolic is detected. If sound diminishes but never
Director deflates cuff as rapidly as disappears, note diastolic at the point sound diminishes.
possible.
This will minimize patient discomfort and reduce venous congestion. Note:
Some noise from the rapidly deflating cuff may be recorded on the
stethoscope channel at this point. This is normal.
33. Review the data on the screen. See the data sample in Fig. 16.14 for comparison.
 If similar, go to Step 34.
 If different, Redo.

Recording continues…
Lesson 16: Blood Pressure Page 17

Segment 5 — Right arm, supine 1


34. Subject lies down and relaxes.
35. Director returns cuff pressure to 160
mmHg and says when ready.
36. Recorder clicks Resume. When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append marker
labeled “Right arm, supine 1” will automatically be inserted.
37. Director releases cuff pressure at 2-3
mmHg/second and call out when systolic
 If Korotkoff Sounds appear at the start of the recorded segment, click
Suspend, Redo, Yes, and Resume and then inflate cuff to 180 mmHg
and then diastolic sounds are detected.
(instead of 160 mmHg).
Recorder inserts event markers.
To insert pre-labeled event markers, press F4 and then F5.
 Systolic — press F4
 To manually enter a marker and type a label: press F9 on Windows or
 Diastolic — press F5 Esc on Mac; markers and labels can be edited after recording.
38. Recorder clicks Suspend and then Click Suspend after diastolic is detected. If sound diminishes but never
Director deflates cuff as rapidly as disappears, note diastolic at the point sound diminishes.
possible.
This will minimize patient discomfort and reduce venous congestion. Note:
Some noise from the rapidly deflating cuff may be recorded on the
stethoscope channel at this point. This is normal.
39. Review the data on the screen. See the data sample in Fig. 16.14 for comparison.
 If similar, go to Step 40.
 If different, Redo.
Segment 6 — Right arm, supine 2
40. Director returns cuff pressure to 160 Subject remains supine and relaxed.
mmHg and says when ready.
41. Recorder clicks Resume. When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append marker
labeled “Right arm, supine 2” will automatically be inserted.
42. Director releases cuff pressure at 2-3
mmHg/second and calls out when systolic
 If Korotkoff Sounds appear at the start of the recorded segment, click
Suspend, Redo, Yes, and Resume and then inflate cuff to 180 mmHg
and then diastolic sounds are detected.
(instead of 160 mmHg).
Recorder inserts event markers.
To insert pre-labeled event markers, press F4 and then F5.
 Systolic — press F4
 To manually enter a marker and type a label: press F9 on Windows or
 Diastolic — press F5 Esc on Mac; markers and labels can be edited after recording.
43. Recorder clicks Suspend and then Click Suspend after diastolic is detected. If sound diminishes but never
Director deflates cuff as rapidly as disappears, note diastolic at the point sound diminishes.
possible.
This will minimize patient discomfort and reduce venous congestion. Note:
Some noise from the rapidly deflating cuff may be recorded on the
stethoscope channel at this point. This is normal.
44. Review the data on the screen. See the data sample in Fig. 16.14 for comparison.
 If similar, go to Step 45.
 If different, Redo.

Recording continues…
Page 18 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

Segment 7 — Right arm, after exercise


45. Confirm Subject can safely exercise and Confirm that Subject meets has no history of disorders and meets the
determine if the cuff must be removed for requirements listed to the left before performing any exercise.
exercise.

CAUTION!
Subject selected must not have
had or now have any disorder,
hypertension, heart surgery,
stroke, or any history of
cardiovascular degeneration.

Subject must not have consumed


caffeine, smoked, or performed
heavy exercise within one hour of
the recording.
46. Subject exercises to elevate heart rate to a Subject does 50 push-ups or run in place for 5-minutes to elevate the heart
moderate level and then sit to recover. rate to a moderate level.
47. Check cuff placement. Check cuff placement and reposition if necessary after exercise.
48. Recorder clicks Resume. When Resume is clicked, the recording will continue and an append marker
“Right arm, after exercise” will automatically be inserted.
49. Director inflates cuff pressure to 180
mmHg and says when ready. The starting cuff pressure is higher than in previous segments.
50. Director releases cuff pressure at 2-3  If Korotkoff Sounds appear at the start of the recorded segment, click
mmHg/second and call out when systolic Suspend, Redo, Yes, and Resume and then inflate cuff to 200 mmHg
and then diastolic sounds are detected. (instead of 180 mmHg).
Recorder inserts event markers. To insert pre-labeled event markers, press F4 and then F5.
 Systolic — press F4  To manually enter a marker and type a label: press F9 on Windows or
Esc on Mac; markers and labels can be edited after recording.
 Diastolic — press F5
51. Recorder clicks Suspend and then Click Suspend after diastolic is detected. If sound diminishes but never
Director deflates cuff as rapidly as disappears, note diastolic at the point sound diminishes.
possible.
This will minimize patient discomfort and reduce venous congestion. Some
noise from the rapidly deflating cuff may be recorded on stethoscope channel
at this point. This is normal.
52. Review the data on the screen. See the data sample in Fig. 16.14 for comparison.
 If similar, go to Step 54.
 If different, Redo.
53. Click Done. Click Done to end all lesson recordings. After you press Done, a prompt
asking you to confirm that you are finished with all blood pressure recordings
54. Click Yes.
will appear.
Click Yes and the blood pressure data will be written to the data file.
After you click Yes, a dialog with options will be generated. Make your
choice, and continue as directed.
If choosing the “Record from another Subject” option:
 Repeat Setup Step 9 for new Subject and continue the entire lesson from
Setup Step 11.
 Each Subject will need to use a unique file name.
END OF RECORDING
Lesson 16: Blood Pressure Page 19

V. DATA ANALYSIS
FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION

1. Enter the Review Saved Data mode and


choose the correct file.
 Note Channel Number (CH)
designations:
Channel Displays Units
CH 1 Pressure mmHg
CH 3* Stethoscope milliVolts
CH 4** ECG Lead II milliVolts
________________________________

If an MP45 was used for recording:


* Stethoscope is CH 2 on MP45
** ECG is not recorded Figure 16.15

 The measurement boxes are above the marker region in the data
window. Each measurement has three sections: channel number,
measurement type, and result. The first two sections are pull-down menus that
 Note measurement box settings: are activated when you click them.
Channel Measurement The following is a brief description of the measurements.
CH 1 Value Value: displays the amplitude value for the channel at the point selected
by the I-beam cursor. If a single point is selected, the value is for that
CH 4 BPM point, if an area is selected, the value is the endpoint of the selected area.
CH 1 Delta T BPM: Beats Per Minute first calculates the difference in time between the
end and beginning of the area selected by the I-Beam tool (same as Delta
T), and then divides this value into 60 seconds/minute.
Delta T: measures the difference in time between the end and beginning
of the selected area.
The “selected area” is the area selected by the I-Beam tool (including
endpoints).
2. Setup your display window for optimal This segment is the period from the first append marker (at Time Zero) to
viewing of the first recording segment. the next append marker.

The following tools help you adjust the data window: 


Display menu: Autoscale horizontal Autoscale waveforms, Zoom Previous
Scroll Bars: Time (Horizontal); Amplitude (Vertical)
Cursor Tools: Zoom Tool
Buttons: Overlap, Split, Show Grid, Hide Grid
3. Use the I-Beam cursor to select the point This is the event marker that was entered manually when the Director
that corresponds to the first event detected the systolic pressure point.
marker (Fig. 16.16).
Complete the Data Report table with the
requested measurements.

 A – value measurements
(one measurement for each segment)
Data Analysis continues…
Page 20 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

Figure 16.16
Note: In Figure 16.16, the value measurement represents cuff pressure at the
selected point and the BPM measurement is not giving an accurate reading
because only one point is selected with the I-beam cursor.
4. Select the point that corresponds to the Note that to help distinguish a Korotkoff sound from other noise, you should
first sound the stethoscope detected. (Fig. note that the proper sound appears at a point in time corresponding to the T-
16.17). wave of the ECG cycle. This can be of great assistance in determining the
beginning and ending of sounds.
 A – value measurements
(one measurement for each segment)

Figure 16.17 Cursor at first sound detected by microphone


5. Select the point that corresponds to the This is the event marker that was entered manually when the Director
second event marker (Fig. 16.18). detected the diastolic pressure point.

B
(one measurement for each segment)

Figure 16.18

Data Analysis continues…


Lesson 16: Blood Pressure Page 21

6. Select the point that corresponds to the To help distinguish a Korotkoff sound from other noise, you should note that
end of the Korotkoff sounds (diastolic the proper sound will appear at a point in time corresponding to the T-wave
pressure) as recorded by the stethoscope of the ECG cycle.
(Fig. 16.19). This is the last sound
detected by the stethoscope.

B
(one measurement for each segment)

Figure 16.19 last sound detected by microphone


7. Measure BPM.
 Using ECG signal:

Look at the ECG complexes in the


region between the systolic and
diastolic pressure and select an area
from one R-wave to the next R-wave
(Fig. 16.20).

Figure 16.20 Select one R-to-R interval on ECG signal

 Using Korotkoff sounds:

If ECG was not recorded, look for


successive Korotkoff sound peaks on
the Stethoscope channel and select
the area between peaks, then measure
BPM on the Pressure channel (Fig.
16.21).

Figure 16.21 Approximate R-to-R interval by selecting between Korotkoff detection


Record the BPM result and then repeat
this measurement on two successive R-
waves.
BPM changes on a beat-by-beat cycle, so for the most accurate measurement
C you should take BPM (R-R) measurements on 3 successive R-waves and find
the average BPM.
(one measurement for each segment)
Data Analysis continues…
Page 22 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

8. Zoom in on one of the ECG complexes in TIP: You may want to hide Channel 1 (cuff pressure) to make it easier to see
the time between systolic and diastolic the other channels.
pressure.
9. If ECG was not recorded, as with MP45
system, skip to step 10.

Using the I-beam cursor, select the area


from the peak of the R-wave to the
beginning of the sound detected by the
stethoscope (Fig. 16.21).
Note the Delta T measurement.

E

Figure 16.21 Timing of Korotkoff Sounds


10. Zoom out and locate the next recording You can use the marker tools to find the start of each segment. Each segment
segment. begins at its labeled append marker and ends at the next append marker .
11. Repeat Steps 4-11 for each recording This lesson had seven recording segments (unless modified for your lab
segment to complete the Data Report with session). Segments are identified by their append markers .
measurements from all seven recording
segments.
12. Save or print the data file.
 You may save the data to another location, save notes that are in the
journal, or print the data file.
13. Quit the program.

END OF DATA ANALYSIS

END OF LESSON 16
Complete the Lesson 16 Data Report that follows.
Biopac Student Lab Page 23
Blood Pressure
 Indirect measurement  Korotkoff sounds
 Ventricular Systole & Diastole  Mean Arterial pressure

DATA REPORT
Student’s Name:
Lab Section:
Date:

I. Data and Calculations


Subject Profile
Name Height

Age Time: Gender: Male / Female Weight

A. Systolic Measurements
Complete Table 16.2 with the systolic measurements for all seven data segments. Note the pressure measurement at the
marker insertion point (where Director detected systolic) and where the first sound was detected with the stethoscope.
Calculate the deltas between the trials for each condition and between the Marker and Stethoscope pressure measurements.
Table 16.2 Systolic Data

Systolic mmHg
At Marker Marker Avg. First Sound Sound Avg.
Condition Trial Insertion (calculate) detected (calculate)
1
Left arm, sitting up
2

1
Right arm, sitting up
2

1
Right arm, lying down
2
Right arm, after exercise 1

B. Diastolic Measurements
Complete Table 16.3 with the diastolic measurements from each of the seven data segments. Note the pressure measurement
at the marker insertion point (when the Director detected diastolic) and where the sound disappeared. Calculate the deltas
between the trials for condition and between the marker and the stethoscope measurements for each segment.
Table 16.3 Diastolic Data

Diastolic mmHg
Condition Trial At Marker Marker Avg. First sound Sound Avg.
Insertion (calculate) detected (calculate)
1
Left arm, sitting up
2

1
Right arm, sitting up
2

1
Right arm, lying down
2

Right arm, after exercise 1


Page 24 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
C. BPM Measurements
Complete Table 16.4 with the BPM measurements from three cycles of each of the seven data segments and calculate the
mean BPM for each segment.

* Cycle measurements: If ECG was recorded, use ; if ECG was not recorded, use .
Table 16.4 BPM
Cycle* Calculate the Mean
Condition Trial
1 2 3 of Cycles 1-3 of Trial 1-2 means
1
Left arm, sitting up
2

1
Right arm, sitting up
2

1
Right arm, lying down
2

Right arm, after exercise 1

D. Summary of Mean Blood Pressure Data

Complete Table 16.5 with the average from sound data from tables 16.2 and 16.3 and then calculate the pulse pressure and
the mean Arterial Pressure (MAP).

Pulse pressure = Systolic pressure  Diastolic pressure

MAP 
pulse pressure
 diastolic pressure OR MAP 
systolic pressure  2 diastolic pressure 
3 3
Table 16.5
SYSTOLE DIASTOLE BPM Calculations:
CONDITION Table 16.2 Table 16.3 Pulse
Table 16.4 MAP
Sound Average Sound Average pressure
Left arm, sitting up
Right arm, sitting up

Right arm, lying down

Right arm, after exercise

E. Timing of Korotkoff Sounds NOTE—This table requires ECG data, which is not recorded on MP45 systems.
Complete Table 16.6 with the Delta T for each condition, and calculate the means.
Table 16.6
Timing of Sounds
Condition Trial Mean (calc)

1
Left arm, sitting up
2

1
Right arm, sitting up
2

1
Right arm, lying down
2

Right arm, after exercise 1


Lesson 16: Blood Pressure Page 25
F. Calculation of Pulse Speed
Complete the calculation using Segment 1 data (left arm, sitting up).
Distance Distance between Subject’s sternum and right shoulder? cm
Distance between Subject’s right shoulder and antecubital fossa? cm
Total distance? cm
Time Time between R-wave and first Korotkoff sound? secs
Speed Speed = distance/time = ___________cm / ________sec cm/sec

II. Questions:
1. Note the difference in systolic pressure value between when the sound actually began, was detected by the stethoscope
transducer, and was recorded, and the time when the observer first heard the sound and pressed the marker button. (Example:
141 mmHg – 135 mmHg = 6 mmHg). What factors could account for this difference? Would the observed difference be the
same if measured by another observer? Explain your answer.

2. a) Does your systolic and/or diastolic arterial pressure change as your heart rate increases?

b) How does this change affect your Pulse Pressure?

c) How would you expect the systolic, diastolic and pulse pressures to change in a normal healthy individual as their heart
rate increases?

3. Give three sources of error in the indirect method of determining systemic arterial blood pressure.
Page 26 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6
4. Use an equation that relates flow, pressure, and resistance to define mean arterial pressure:

5. Blood flow (liters per min.) through the pulmonary circuit equals blood flow through the systemic circuit, but pulmonary
resistance to flow is 5 times less than the systemic resistance to flow. Using the equation in Question 4, show that mean
pulmonary pressure is 5 times less than mean systemic pressure.

6. Define the first and second sounds of Korotkoff. Which sound is used to approximate systolic pressure and which sound is
used to approximate diastolic pressure?

7. Why is mean arterial pressure not equal to (systolic pressure – diastolic pressure)/2?

8. Define pulse pressure. Explain, in terms of changes in systolic and diastolic pressures, why pulse pressure increases during
exercise.

9. Give one reason why blood pressure in the left arm may be different than blood pressure in the right arm of a Subject at rest.

10. Name an artery other than the brachial that could be used for an indirect measurement of blood pressure and explain your
choice.

End of Lesson 16 Data Report


Physiology Lessons Lesson 17
for use with the HEART SOUNDS
Biopac Student Lab  Cardiac valve functions
 Relationship between electrical and mechanical
events of the cardiac cycle

Richard Pflanzer, Ph.D.


Associate Professor Emeritus
Indiana University School of Medicine
Purdue University School of Science

William McMullen
Vice President
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

BIOPAC® Systems, Inc.


42 Aero Camino, Goleta, CA 93117
(805) 685-0066, Fax (805) 685-0067
info@biopac.com
www.biopac.com

Manual Revision 3.7.6


09032009
 BIOPAC Systems, Inc.
Lesson 17: Heart Sounds Page 5

II. EXPERIMENTAL OBJECTIVES


1. To listen to human heart sounds and describe them qualitatively in terms of intensity or loudness, pitch, and
duration.
2. To correlate the human heart sounds with the opening and closing of cardiac valves during the cardiac cycle and
with systole and diastole of the ventricles.
3. To determine the nature of the change in the relationship between electrical and mechanical events of the cardiac
cycle as heart rate increases.

III. MATERIALS
 BIOPAC Amplified Stethoscope (SS30L)
 BIOPAC electrode lead set (SS2LA/L)
 BIOPAC disposable vinyl electrodes (EL503), 3 electrodes per Subject
 BIOPAC electrode gel (GEL1) and abrasive pad (ELPAD)
 Biopac Student Lab System: software BSL 3.7.5 or above
data acquisition unit MP36, MP35, MP30 (Windows only), or MP45
 Computer System

IV. EXPERIMENTAL METHODS


 For further explanation, use the online support options under the Help Menu.
A. SET UP

FAST TRACK Set Up DETAILED EXPLANATION OF SET UP STEPS


1. Turn the computer ON.  The desktop should appear on the monitor. If it does not appear, ask
2. Make sure the BIOPAC MP3X unit is the laboratory instructor for assistance.
turned OFF.
3. Plug the equipment in as follows:
Stethoscope (SS30L) — CH 1
Electrode lead set (SS2LA/L) — CH 2
4. Turn ON the MP3X Unit.

Figure 17.5 MP3X (top) and MP45 (bottom) equipment connections

5. Select a Subject, a Recorder and, if This lesson teaches the clinical detection of heart sounds, which are
appropriate in your lab group, a Director. monitored in four positions on the upper chest (between ribs two and six).
See notes at right  Normally, this involves one person (Director) listening to the heart sounds
of another individual (Subject). However, in a lab setting this may not be
comfortable or appropriate due to gender differences and personal
Setup continues… preference. In such cases:
Page 6 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

 Subject may listen to his/her own heart sounds by acting as and


following instructions for the Director.
 When a Subject listens to his/her own heart sounds, it is imperative
that the right arm remains relaxed so EMG artifact does not corrupt the
ECG signal.—this means that Subject must hold the stethoscope with
the left hand.
A Recorder is always required to run the lesson and insert markers.
6. Place three electrodes on Subject.

 Standard electrode placement is shown


to the right (Fig. 17.6).

 The alternate electrode placement


shown on page 6 is preferred because it
will yield the best data, but it may not be
practical in your lab group.

7. Attach the electrode lead set (SS2LA/L) to


the electrodes as shown, paying close
attention to the lead colors (Fig. 17.7).

Figure 17.6 Electrode placement & lead attachment

Each of the pinch connectors on the end of the electrode cable needs to be
attached to a specific electrode. The electrode cables are each a different
color—follow the figure provided to ensure that you connect each cable to
the proper electrode.
The pinch connectors work like a small clothespin, but will only latch onto
the nipple of the electrode from one side.

Position the electrode cables so they do not pull on the electrodes. Clip the
electrode cable clip (where the cable meets the three individual colored
wires) to a convenient location (such as Subject’s clothes) to relieve cable
strain.

8. Start the Biopac Student Lab Program.



9. Choose Lesson 17 (L17-Heart Sounds)
Use a unique identifier.
and click OK.
This ends Set Up.
10. Type in your filename and click OK.

11. Optional Set Preferences. This lesson has optional Preferences for data and display while recording.
Per your Lab Instructor’s guidelines, you may set:
 Choose File > Preferences.
Journal Text: show minimum guiding text vs. detailed text
 Select an option. Grids: show or hide gridlines
 Select the desired setting and click OK. Recording Length: allow from 30 seconds to 30 minutes of data
END OF SET UP

An alternate electrode placement is shown to the right


(Fig. 17.7).
This placement will yield the best results but may not be
practical or appropriate in your lab due to gender
differences and/or personal comfort.
Subject’s clothing should not interfere with the electrodes;
Subject may need to lift his/her shirt in this setup.
Figure 17.7 Alternate (Optimal) Electrode Placement
Lesson 17: Heart Sounds Page 7

B. CALIBRATION
Calibration establishes the hardware’s internal parameters (such as gain, offset, and scaling) and is critical for optimum
performance. Pay close attention to Calibration.

FAST TRACK Calibration DETAILED EXPLANATION OF CALIBRATION STEPS

1. Double check the electrodes, and make sure Make sure the electrodes adhere securely to the skin. If they are being
Subject is relaxed. pulled up, you will not get a good ECG signal.

Subject must be relaxed during the calibration. Subject’s arm needs to be


relaxed so that the muscle (EMG) signal does not corrupt the ECG signal.

2. Click Calibrate. The Calibrate button is in the upper left corner of the program window.
This will start the calibration recording.

3. Read the prompt and click OK.

4. Director should lightly tap the stethoscope After recording begins, Director should lightly tap the stethoscope
diaphragm twice. diaphragm twice. Calibration will stop automatically after 8 seconds.

5. Check calibration data: At the end of the 8-sec calibration recording, the screen should resemble
Fig. 17.8.

 If similar, proceed to Data Recording.

 If different, Redo Calibration.

Figure 17.8

The stethoscope wave should have clear spikes to indicate when it was
lightly tapped.

The ECG wave should not show any large spikes, jitter, or large baseline
drifts.

If you need to redo the calibration, recheck your connections and click
Redo Calibration, then repeat the entire calibration sequence.

If your data resembles Fig. 17.8, proceed to the Data Recording section.
END OF CALIBRATION
Page 8 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

C. RECORDING LESSON DATA

FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION

1. Prepare for the recording. In this lesson, you will note the heart sounds in four positions, and then
record two segments: one with Subject at rest and one post-exercise. Two
 Review the positions where heart sounds channels of data will be displayed during the recording: Stethoscope and
are best heard. ECG.

o See Fig. 17.9 or Subject should be seated, relaxed and still, with arms at side of body with
o Help > Valve Positions hands apart in lap and legs flexed at knee with feet supported.
2. Position the Subject. Hints for obtaining optimal data:
a) Subject should be at rest and should not have exercised within the
last hour.
b) Apply the electrodes at least 5 minutes before recording. Sweating
tends to affect electrode adhesion to the skin.
c) Subject’s clothing should not interfere with electrodes during the
recording.
d) Minimize EMG artifact generated in the arms and chest, which will
interfere with the ECG signal:
 Subject must be seated and relaxed: arms at side of body with
hands apart in lap; legs flexed at knee with feet supported
 Subject should relax and not move the right arm.
e) Subject should remain still and quite during the listening and
recording segments. Any sound will be passed through the
stethoscope.
f) Director should hold the stethoscope diaphragm with moderate and
consistent pressure. Any change in pressure or movement will be
picked up on the stethoscope as extraneous noise.

Figure 17.9 Heart valve position and corresponding stethoscope placement


Recording continues…
Lesson 17: Heart Sounds Page 9

Note Heart Sounds

3. Recorder clicks the Note Sounds button.


4. Director places the stethoscope in the To find the Aortic and Pulmonic positions on an adult, follow the
Aortic position and listens. collarbone to the jugular (supraclavicular) notch, which is a little
depression just below the Adam’s apple. Go down vertically 2.5” and
 This is Position A in Fig. 17.9. 1.5” to the right for Aortic or 1.5” to the left for Pulmonic.
 Make sure you are between the ribs (not on bone).
 This description only works on adults.
5. Recorder types in notes per Director and Describe the intensity (loudness), pitch and duration of the heart sound.
then clicks Next. You can use up to 255 characters.

6. Director places the stethoscope in the The Pulmonic valve is on roughly the same horizontal plane as the Aortic
Pulmonic position and listen. valve.
 This is Position P in Fig. 17.9. From the Aortic position, move almost horizontally left, but drop a little
lower, remaining in the intercostal space. Place the stethoscope
diaphragm between the second and third ribs, more to the left margin of
the sternum.
7. Recorder types in notes per Director and Describe the intensity (loudness), pitch and duration of the heart sound.
click Next. You can use up to 255 characters.
8. Director places the stethoscope in the From the Pulmonic position, follow down the breastbone to the xiphoid
Tricuspid position and listen. process of the sternum. Place the stethoscope to the right of that, between
that and the rib (which you can palpate).
 This is Position T in Fig. 17.9.
The sternum covers the actual valve position in the heart, and you don’t
want the sound energy to be absorbed by the breastbone, so drop to the
costal cartilage below it.
9. Recorder types in notes per Director and Describe the intensity (loudness), pitch and duration of the heart sound.
click Next. You can use up to 255 characters.
10. Director places the stethoscope in the The Mitral valve is on roughly the same horizontal plane as the Tricuspid
Mitral position and listen. valve.
 This is Position M in Fig. 17.9. From the Tricuspid position, move the bell almost directly lateral to the
left and place the stethoscope diaphragm between the fifth and sixth ribs.
11. Recorder types in notes per Director and Describe the intensity (loudness), pitch and duration of the heart sound.
clicks Done. You can use up to 255 characters. When Done is clicked, the descriptive
text will automatically be entered into the Journal.
12. Director should decide which position Use the same position for all recording segments to minimize variance
yields the best heart sounds. Use this due to location.
position for all recording segments.

Recording continues…
Page 10 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

Segment 1: Seated, at rest


13. Director places the stethoscope where the Note the position precisely so you can use the same position for the Segment 2
heart sounds are best heard. Post-exercise recording.
14. Recorder clicks Record. When you click Record, the recording will
begin and an append marker labeled “Seated,
 Subject should breathe normally for at Rest” will automatically be inserted.
20 seconds.
TIP In this lesson, Display > Autoscale
Waveforms and Autoscale
Horizontal are enabled DURING
recording.
Subject should breathe normally for the first 20 seconds.
15. After 20 seconds, Recorder tells Subject to Subject should begin a slow, deep inhalation, hold for one second and continue
begin a slow, deep inhale-exhale cycle and with a slow exhalation, then return to normal breathing.
inserts an event marker at start of inhalation
and again at the start of exhalation.  Do not inhale quickly or you will increase the EMG artifact.

a) F4 at beginning of inhale. Recorder should insert event markers and enter labels.
To insert pre-labeled Event Markers, press F4 (inhale) and then F5 (exhale).
 “start of inhale”
b) F5 at beginning of exhale.  Labels can also be entered manually: press F9 on Windows or Esc on
Mac; labels can be edited after data is recorded.
 “start of exhale”
16. Recorder clicks Suspend after exhalation is
complete.
17. Review the data on the screen. The heart sounds should be clearly visible and the ECG should not have
excessive drift or noise.
 If similar, go to Step 17.
 If different, click Redo.

Figure 17.10 Data for Subject At Rest

Segment 2: After exercise


18. Unclip the electrode lead cables from each Subject must be able to move about freely to exercise and elevate the heart
electrode. rate.
19. Subject should exercise to elevate his/her Subject should exercise to elevate his/her heart rate to ~1.5 x resting heart rate
heart rate to a moderate level (~1.5 x resting This will vary depending on Subject and the level of physical fitness.
HR) and then sit down to recover. Generally, 20-30 push-ups/jumping-jacks or running in place for 25-40 steps
will suffice. After exercise, Subject should sit and relax with arms at side of
body with hands apart in lap and legs flexed at knee with feet supported.
20. Reconnect the electrode lead cables to Check electrode adhesion and reconnect cables after exercise. Pay attention to
Subject in the proper position by color. the lead color for proper placement, as shown in Fig. 17.6.

21. Director should place the stethoscope Use the same position as used in Step 14 for the Segment 1 “Seated, at rest”
where it was placed for Segment 1. recording, so that placement is not a significant variable.
22. Recorder clicks Resume. When Resume is clicked, the recording will continue and an append marker
labeled “After exercise” will be automatically inserted.
Recording continues…
Lesson 17: Heart Sounds Page 11

23. Recorder clicks Suspend after 20 seconds The ECG wave should not have excessive noise or drift. If it does, check
of data has been recorded. electrode adhesion and redo the recording.
24. Review the data on the screen.
 If similar, go to Step 24.
 If different, Redo.

Figure 17.11 Data for Subject Post-Exercise

25. Click Done. When you click Done, you will be prompted to confirm that you are done
with all recording segments. When you click Yes, dialog with options will be
26. Click Yes.
generated. Make your choice, and continue as directed.
If choosing the “Record from another Subject” option:
 Repeat Setup Steps 6-7 and 10-11 for the new Subject, then repeat the
entire lesson from Recording Step 1 (calibration does not have to be
repeated).
 Each Subject will need to use a unique file name.
27. Remove the electrodes. Remove the electrode cable pinch connectors. Peel off and discard the
electrodes; BIOPAC electrodes are not reusable. Wash the electrode gel
residue from the skin, using soap and water. The electrodes may leave a slight
ring on the skin for a few hours. This is normal, and does not indicate that
END OF RECORDING anything is wrong.

V. DATA ANALYSIS
FAST TRACK DETAILED EXPLANATION
1. Enter the Review Saved Data mode and
choose the correct file.
 Enter the Review Saved Data mode
 Note Channel Number (CH)
designations:
Channel Displays
CH 1 Stethoscope
CH 2 ECG (Lead II)
 Note measurement box settings:
Channel Measurement
CH 1 P-P
CH 1 Delta T
CH 1 BPM Figure 17.12 Heart Sounds data file

 The measurement boxes are above the marker region in the data
window. Each measurement has three sections: channel number,
measurement type, and result. The first two sections are pull-down menus
that are activated when you click them.

Data Analysis continues…


Page 12 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

The following is a brief description of these specific measurements.


P-P (peak-to-peak) shows the difference between the maximum
amplitude value and the minimum amplitude value in the selected
area.
Delta T is the difference in time between the end and beginning of the
selected area.
Beats Per Minute calculates the difference in time between the first and
last selected points and then divides this value into 60 seconds/minute
to extrapolate BPM.
The “selected area” is the area selected by the I-Beam tool (including
endpoints)
2. Set up the display window for optimal This is the recording of Subject “Seated, at rest,” breathing normally,
viewing of the first recorded segment beginning at the first append marker at Time 0.

 The following tools help you adjust the data window:


Display menu: Autoscale horizontal Autoscale waveforms,
Zoom Previous
Scroll Bars: Time (Horizontal); Amplitude (Vertical)
Cursor Tools: Zoom Tool
Buttons: Overlap, Split, Show Grid, Hide Grid
3. Zoom in on an area of two complete Zoom to an area when Subject was breathing normally, before the start of
cardiac cycles. deep inhalation.
4. Use the I-Beam cursor to select the area
from one R-wave to the next R-wave (Fig.
17.13).
Note the BPM measurement.

A

Figure 17.13 R-wave to R-wave

5. Zoom in on an area of one complete Note Make sure the cardiac cycle you select does not have extraneous
cardiac cycle. noise. The first major heart sound should follow the R-wave.

6. Use the I-Beam cursor to select an area


from the start of one R-wave to the first
peak of the first heart sound (Fig. 17.14).
Note the Delta T measurement.

A

Figure 17.14 R-wave to first heart sound

Note A “peak” is relative to the waveform and may cross above or below
Data Analysis continues… the baseline.
Lesson 17: Heart Sounds Page 13

7. Use the I-Beam cursor to select an area


from the start of one R-wave to the first
peak of the second heart sound (Fig.
17.15).
Note the Delta T measurement.

A

Figure 17.15 R-wave to second heart sound

8. Use the I-Beam cursor to select an area


from the start of the second heart sound to
the start of the first sound of the next cycle
(Fig. 17.16).
Note the Delta T measurement.

A

Figure 17.16 second heart sound to next first sound

9. Use the I-Beam cursor to select an area


that encompasses the first heart sound
(Fig. 17.17).
Note the P-P measurement.
A

Figure 17.17 Area of first heart sound

10. Use the I-Beam cursor to select an area


that encompasses the second heart sound
(Fig. 17.18).
Note the P-P measurement.
A

Data Analysis continues… Figure 17.18 Area of second heart sound


Page 14 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

11. Scroll to the Inhale interval of the “Seated, This interval begins with the event marker labeled “Inhale.” Begin
at rest” segment of the recording and take measurements a few cardiac cycles into the “Inhale” interval.
the measurements described above (in
Steps 3-10) as required to complete Table
17.1.

A
This interval begins with the event marker labeled “Exhale.” Begin
12. Scroll to the Exhale interval of the
measurements a few cardiac cycles into the “Exhale” interval.
“Seated, at rest” segment of the recording
and take the measurements described
above (in Steps 4-10) as required to
complete Table 17.1.
A
13. Scroll to the After exercise segment of the This segment begins with the append marker labeled “After exercise.”
recording and take the measurements Begin measurements a few cardiac cycles into the segment.
described above (in Steps 3-10) as
required to complete Table 17.1.
A
14. Save or print the data file.
You may save the data to another location, save notes that are in the
15. Exit the program journal, or print the data file.
END OF DATA ANALYSIS

END OF LESSON 17
Complete the Lesson 17 Data Report that follows.
Lesson 17: Heart Sounds Page 15

Heart sounds
 Cardiac valve functions
 Relationship between electrical and mechanical events of the cardiac cycle
DATA REPORT
Student’s Name:

Lab Section:

Date:
Subject Profile

Name Height Gender: Male / Female

Age Weight

I. Data and Calculations

A. Heart Sound Measurements


Complete Table 17.1 with Segment 1 and Segment 2 data and complete the required calculations.

Table 17.1
Segment 1: At Rest Segment 2:
Selected area Measurement
At Rest Inhalation Exhalation After exercise
R-wave to next
R-wave
R-wave to first
sound
R-wave to
second sound
first to second calculate calculate calculate calculate
sound
second sound to
next first sound
first sound

second sound

B. Description of Heart Sounds Note: You may paste descriptions from the Lesson 17 journal here. .

Describe the first heart sound (aortic) and then describe the other sounds in terms of intensity (loudness), pitch and duration
relative to the first sound. This is a subjective description.

Aortic

Pulmonic

Tricuspid

Mitral
Page 16 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

II. Questions
1. Relative to the electrical and mechanical events of the cardiac cycle, what do each of the measurements in Table 17.1
represent?
BPM:
Delta T: R-wave to first sound
R-wave to second sound
first to second
second sound to next first sound
P-P: first sound
second sound
2. Note whether the measured values in Table 17.1 increased, decreased or did not change from the resting value when heart
rate increased.
Measured Value Increased Decreased No Change
BPM
Delta T R-wave to first sound
R-wave to second sound
first to second
second sound to next first sound
P-P first sound
second sound

3. Explain why each of these would change.

4. Briefly describe the cause of the turbulence associated with each of the four heart sounds:
1st sound

2nd sound

3rd sound

4th sound
Lesson 17: Heart Sounds Page 17

5. Which of the four heart sounds is loudest? Give a reason.

6. Does ventricular ejection occur during ventricular depolarization or during ventricular repolarization?
Refer to your experimental record before you answer, and explain your answer.

7. Which cardiac valves close during ventricular systole? Which cardiac valves close during ventricular diastole?
Systole:
Diastole:
8. Define “systolic murmur” and give one example of a cause.

9. Define “diastolic murmur” and give one example of a cause.

10. Define “cardiac cycle.”

11. Briefly characterize the relationship between the electrical events and the mechanical events of the cardiac cycle.

End of Lesson 17 Data Report


Physiology Lessons Lesson 20
for use with the
SPINAL CORD REFLEXES
Biopac Student Lab
 Latent periods and reaction times
 Contractile force vs. stimulus strength
 Jendrassik maneuver influence
 Voluntary vs. involuntary activation of skeletal
muscle

Richard Pflanzer, Ph.D.


Associate Professor Emeritus
Indiana University School of Medicine
Purdue University School of Science

William McMullen
Vice President
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.

BIOPAC® Systems, Inc.


42 Aero Camino, Goleta, CA 93117
(805) 685-0066, Fax (805) 685-0067
info@biopac.com | www.biopac.com

Manual Revision 3.7.6


08252009
 BIOPAC Systems, Inc.
Lesson 20: Spinal Cord Reflexes Page 5

II. EXPERIMENTAL OBJECTIVES


1. To become familiar with anatomical and physiological elements of simple spinal reflexes.
2. To examine properties of some simple neuromuscular reflexes commonly tested in physical diagnosis.
3. To measure and compare latent periods and reaction times of extensor and flexor reflexes.
4. To elicit an extensor reflex and compare contractile force vs. stimulus strength.
5. To apply the Jendrassik maneuver and observe exaggeration of an extensor reflex.
6. To measure and compare reaction times of voluntary activation of skeletal muscle vs. involuntary (reflex) activation of
skeletal muscle.

III. MATERIALS
 Reflex Hammer Transducer (SS36L)
 Response Setup
o Via electrodes:
- Electrode lead set (SS2LA/L)
- Disposable vinyl electrodes (EL503)
3-6 per subject
- Electrode gel (GEL1)
- Abrasive pad (ELPAD)
 OR
o Via goniometer:
- Twin-axis Goniometer
(SS20L or SS21L)
- Single-sided tape (TAPE1)
 Push-pin, thumb tack or alternate media for cutaneous stimulus
 Chair
 Biopac Student Lab System: software BSL 3.7.5 or above
data acquisition unit MP36, MP35, MP30 (Windows only), or MP45
 Computer System
Page 6 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

IV. EXPERIMENTAL METHODS

 For further explanation, use the online support options under the Help menu.
A. SET UP
Fast Track Set Up Detailed Explanation of Set Up Steps
1. Select a Subject, a Recorder and, if This lesson is designed to teach the anatomical and physiological elements of
appropriate in your lab group, a Director. simple spinal reflexes, which are monitored by EMG electrodes or a
goniometer in this lesson.
2. Turn the computer ON.
 The desktop should appear on the monitor. If it does not appear, ask the
laboratory instructor for assistance.
3. Make sure the BIOPAC MP3X unit is
turned OFF.

4. Plug the equipment in as follows:
Reflex Hammer SS36L — CH 1
AND
Lead Set SS2LA/L — CH 2
OR
Goniometer SS21L — CH 2
 SS21L-Y input only
5. Turn the MP3X Data Acquisition Unit
ON.

Figure 20.3 Hardware


6. If using SS2L and electrodes: Abrade the site and place electrodes; use GEL1 if necessary:
Place six electrodes on the Subject.
Knee Reflex Electrodes
a) Place three for knee reflex
(fig. 20.4).  Two electrodes on the quadriceps
muscle on front of thigh,
b) Place three for ankle reflex approximately 10 cm (4”) apart.
(fig. 20.5).
 One electrode (as ground) on the
interior thigh of the same leg.
The distance between
electrodes is critical.
If you do not get a measurable
response during calibration, move
the electrodes further apart and Ankle Reflex Electrodes
repeat calibration. You can place electrodes on the
same or opposite leg; clinicians might
use the same leg to test the ipsilateral
reflex response.
 Two electrodes on the inside of the
calf muscle, approximately 13 cm
Fig. 20.4 Knee Reflex
(5”) apart, near the midline of the leg.
 One electrode (as ground) just inside
of the ankle on the same leg.

Figure 20.5 Ankle Reflex


Set Up continues…
Lesson 20: Spinal Cord Reflexes Page 7

OR
If using SS21L Goniometer:
a) Tape the telescopic endblock
laterally on the leg so the axes of the
leg and endblock coincide, when
viewed in the sagittal plane.
b) Tape the leg fully (extend the
goniometer to max length), and
attach the fixed endblock to the thigh
so the axes of the thigh and endblock
coincide.

Figure 20.6 Attach a goniometer (SS20L) to the outside of the knee.

Ensure that the goniometer (SS20L) is attached to the outside of the knee (as
seen in figure 20.5). This will measure angular movement of the leg, which is
proportionate to the force of the strike from the reflex hammer.
7. If using SS2L and electrodes: Clip the Attach the SS2L leads to the knee reflex electrodes (as seen in figure 20.3
lead set (SS2L) to the electrodes as and described in Table 20.1).
described for Knee Reflex (Fig. 20.4 and
Lead Color Signal Position
Table 20.1).
Red (+) middle electrode
White (-) closest to waist
Black (ground) interior thigh
Table 20.1 Electrode lead attachment for Knee Reflex

The electrode cables are each a different color — follow the figure provided
to ensure proper connection between each cable and electrode.
Position the electrode cables so they do not pull on the electrodes. Clip the
electrode cable clip (where the cable meets the three individual colored
wires) to a convenient location (such as Subject’s clothes) to relieve cable
strain.
8. Mark the optimal reflex spot on the Tips to help locate the optimal reflex spot:
Subject. a) relax leg
 Have the Subject sit with his or her b) locate midline ridge on the knee cap
legs hanging over the edge of a chair c) feel below the ridge, no more than an inch below the tip of the
or desk at 90 degrees. patella
 Find the optimal reflex spot on the d) tap this spot with the reflex hammer to confirm a strong response
Subject’s knee and mark the spot. Mark the optimal reflex spot—if you prefer, use tape and a pen mark rather
than marking the subject directly.
9. Start the Biopac Student Lab program.

10. Choose Lesson 20 (L20- -Spinal Cord
Reflexes) and click OK.
11. Type in your filename.
 Use a unique identifier.
12. Click OK.
This ends default Setup.
END OF SETUP
Page 8 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

B. CALIBRATION
The calibration procedure establishes the hardware’s internal parameters (such as gain, offset, and scaling) and is critical for
optimum performance. Pay close attention to the calibration procedure.
Fast Track Calibration Detailed Explanation of Calibration Steps
1. Set the Reflex Hammer on a flat surface. The Calibrate button is in the upper left corner of the Setup window. Clicking
Subject should sit with legs hanging at the Calibrate button will generate a prompt to confirm that subject is seated
precisely 90° degrees. properly:
2. When ready, click Calibrate.
a. Confirm Subject’s legs are hanging at
90° degrees and then click OK.
b. Lightly tap the Reflex Hammer two or
three times on a flat surface.
When Subject is ready, click OK to start the calibration recording. The
c. Subject should fully extend leg to 0° calibration procedure will stop automatically after 12 seconds.
and then return to 90°.
At the end of the calibration recording, the screen should resemble Fig. 20.7 or
The calibration procedure will stop Fig. 20.8
automatically after 12 seconds.
3. Check the calibration data.
 If similar, proceed to Data Recording.
 If different, Redo Calibration.
The distance between electrodes
is critical. If you do not get a
measurable response using EMG
electrodes, move the electrodes
further apart and repeat calibration.

Figure 20.7 – Reflex & Response Calibration via EMG Electrodes

Figure 20.8 – Reflex & Response Calibration via Goniometer

The Hammer Strike channel should show a clear spike to indicate when the
reflex hammer was lightly tapped and the Response channel should clearly
indicate a response following the strike.
If data resembles Fig. 20.7/Fig. 20.8, proceed to the Data Recording section.
To redo calibration, recheck connections and click Redo Calibration, then
repeat the entire calibration sequence.
END OF CALIBRATION
Lesson 20: Spinal Cord Reflexes Page 9

C. RECORDING LESSON DATA


Fast Track Recording Detailed Explanation of Recording Steps
1. Review the spinal reflex positions. In this lesson, you will note the spinal cord reflexes in the following six
scenarios. Two channels of data will be displayed during the recording: Reflex
Hammer Strike and Response.
 Knee Jerk Reflex—tests the femoral nerve
 Knee Jerk Reflex—during Jendrassik maneuver
 Knee Jerk Reflex—with mental distraction
 Flexor Withdrawal Reflex—tests delay in knee jerk when another reflex is
stimulated
 Voluntary Knee Jerk Reflex
 Ankle Jerk Reflex—tests the medial popliteal nerve
2. Prepare for the recording. For Segment 3: Prepare five addition problems consisting of two three-digit
numbers (e.g., 247 + 498).
a) Prepare five math problems.
For Segment 4: Prepare a push-pin, thumb tack, or alternate media for
b) Select media for cutaneous stimulus.
cutaneous stimulus (to prick to the skin).
Use a 5-sec interval between strikes in each segment to allow the leg to return
to rest between strikes.
Use INCREASING force in Segment 1, and try to apply the SAME FORCE for
each strike in Segments 2-6.
Segment 1: Knee Jerk Reflex Tests the femoral nerve
3. Ask subject to close eyes and then click The optimal reflex spot was marked in Setup.
Start.
The optimum response was marked in Setup. When you click Start, the
4. Strike the optimal reflex spot of the recording will begin and an append marker labeled “Knee Jerk Reflex” will be
patellar tendon and observe the resulting inserted automatically.
muscle contraction.
Note To obtain accurate goniometer data, it is crucial that the leg come to a
5. Repeat the patellar tendon strike every 5 resting position between strikes in this segment.
seconds, four times. Start with a light tap
Use INCREASING force for each strike.
and INCREASE strike force.
6. Click Suspend. When you click Suspend, the recording will halt, giving you time to review the
data and prepare for the next recording segment.
7. Review the data on the screen.
 If correct, go to Step 8.
 If incorrect, click Redo.

Figure 20.9

Channels should show clear spikes to indicate when the reflex hammer was
lightly tapped and a response following each strike.

Recording continues…
Page 10 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

Segment 2: Knee Jerk Reflex Jendrassik maneuver


8. Subject remains seated with legs
hanging over the edge of a chair/desk at
90 degrees and prepares to perform the
Jendrassik maneuver (see description at To perform the
right). Jendrassik maneuver,
Subject hooks the
9. Ask subject to close eyes and perform
the Jendrassik maneuver, then click hands together by the
Resume. flexed fingers at chest
level and concentrates
on pulling the hands
apart with as much
force as possible
without breaking the
interlock.

Figure 20.10 Subject in position for Jendrassik maneuver


 The patellar tendon is tapped while the Subject attempts to pull apart
the interlocked fingers.
 Immediately after the strike, Subject should relax grip (hands
hooked together but not pulled apart), then repeat grip on cue from
the Director before each strike.
10. While the Subject is performing the When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append marker
Jendrassik maneuver, strike the patellar labeled “Knee Jerk during Jendrassik maneuver” will be inserted automatically.
tendon and observe the resulting muscle
Note To get accurate goniometer data, it is crucial that the leg come to a
contraction.
resting position between strikes in this segment.
 Subject should relax grip between strikes
and resume on Cue from the Director. Subject should relax grip immediately after each strike, then repeat on cue
from the Director before the next strike.
11. Repeat the simultaneous Jendrassik
maneuver/patellar tendon strike every 5 IMPORTANT: Try to apply the SAME FORCE for each strike.
seconds with the SAME FORCE, four
times.
12. Click Suspend. When you click Suspend, the recording will halt, giving you time to review the
data and prepare for the next recording segment.
13. Review the data on the screen.
 If correct, go to Step 14.
 If incorrect, click Redo.

Figure 20.11 Knee Jerk Reflex during Jendrassik maneuver

Channels should show clear spikes to indicate when the reflex hammer was
lightly tapped and a response following each strike.

Recording continues…
Lesson 20: Spinal Cord Reflexes Page 11

Segment 3: Knee Jerk Reflex With mental distraction


14. Get your prepared addition problems. Director readies the five addition problems, each consisting of two three-digit
numbers (e.g., 247 + 498), that were prepared in Step 2.
15. Subject remains seated with legs hanging
over the edge of the desk/chair at 90
degrees.

16. Ask subject to close eyes and then click When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append marker
Resume. labeled “Knee Jerk with mental distraction” will be inserted automatically.
17. Director verbally provides the first math Note To get accurate goniometer data, it is crucial that the leg come to a
problem and then, as the Subject tries to resting position between strikes in this segment.
quickly solve it silently in his or her head,
The Subject should attempt to solve each problem in the shortest amount of
strikes the patellar tendon and observes
time possible without using a pen or calculator. While the Subject performs
the resulting muscle contraction.
mental math, the Director should strike the patellar tendon.
18. Repeat the simultaneous mental
IMPORTANT: Try to apply the SAME FORCE for each strike.
math/patellar tendon strike every 5
seconds with the SAME FORCE, four
times. Use a new math problem each time.
19. Click Suspend. When you click Suspend, the recording will halt, giving you time to review the
data and prepare for the next recording segment.
20. Review the data on the screen.
 If correct, go to Step 21.
 If incorrect, click Redo.

Figure 20.12 Knee Jerk Reflex with mental distraction

Channels should show clear spikes to indicate when the reflex hammer was
lightly tapped and a response following each strike.
Segment 4: Flexor Withdrawal Reflex Knee jerk when another reflex is stimulated
21. Subject remains seated with legs hanging When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append marker
over the edge of a chair/desk at 90 labeled “Flexor Withdrawal Reflex” will be inserted automatically.
degrees.
Note To get accurate goniometer data, it is crucial that the leg come to a
22. Ask subject to close eyes and then click resting position between strikes in this segment.
Resume.
23. Apply a cutaneous stimulus on the front of Use a push-pin, thumb tack, or alternate media for cutaneous stimulus (to prick
the thigh and simultaneously strike the to the skin) on the front of the thigh; at the same time, strike the patellar tendon
patellar tendon and observe the response. and observe the resulting muscle contraction.
24. Repeat the simultaneous cutaneous You want to introduce the cutaneous stimulus on the same path the neurons
stimulus/patellar strike every 5 seconds stimulated by the reflex hammer strike follow. In this case, the rectus femoris,
with the SAME FORCE, four times. which is part of the quadriceps femoris.
25. Click Suspend. IMPORTANT: Try to apply the SAME FORCE for each strike.

Recording continues…
Page 12 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

26. Review the data on the screen. When you click Suspend, the recording will halt, giving you time to review the
data and prepare for the next recording segment.
 If correct, go to Step 27.
 If incorrect, click Redo.

Figure 20.13 Flexor Withdrawal Reflex

Channels should show clear spikes to indicate when the reflex hammer was
lightly tapped and a response following each strike.
Segment 5: Voluntary Knee Jerk Reflex Response to sound of strike
27. Subject remains seated with legs hanging When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append marker
over the edge of a chair/desk at 90 labeled “Voluntary Knee Jerk Reflex” will be inserted automatically.
degrees.
Note To get accurate goniometer data, it is crucial that the leg come to a
28. Ask subject to close eyes and then click resting position between strikes in this segment.
Resume.
IMPORTANT: Try to apply the SAME FORCE for each strike.
29. Strike the hammer on a flat surface and
ask Subject to voluntarily jerk the knee
upon hearing the hammer strike.
30. Repeat the table strike/voluntary knee jerk
every 5 seconds with the SAME FORCE,
four times.
31. Click Suspend.
32. Review the data on the screen. When you click Suspend, the recording will halt, giving you time to review the
data and prepare for the next recording segment.
 If correct, go to Step 33.
 If incorrect, click Redo.

Figure 20.14 Voluntary Knee Jerk Reflex

Channels should show clear spikes to indicate when the reflex hammer was
lightly tapped and a response following each strike.

Recording continues…
Lesson 20: Spinal Cord Reflexes Page 13

Segment 6: Ankle Jerk Reflex Tests the medial popliteal nerve


33. Switch the setup to Ankle Reflex Ankle Reflex setup
(description at right).
Using electrodes—disconnect the leads from the Knee Reflex setup electrodes
If using SS2L Leads and clip to the electrodes on the calf and ankle (as described in Table 20.2).
Switch the leads to Ankle Reflex as Lead Color Signal Position
designated in Table 20.2. calf, close to
Red +
knee
White - middle of calf
Black ground inside of ankle
Table 20.2 Electrode Lead Attachment for Ankle Reflex

If usingSS21L Goniometer Using the goniometer—carefully untape the


goniometer from the Knee Setup. With the foot
Move the goniometer to the ankle so that
at a right angle to the leg (close to 90º lateral
one end is vertical along the line of the
aspect of the foot and tibia), tape one end
tibia and the other end is horizontal along
vertically along the line of the tibia and tape the
the lateral surface of the foot.
other end horizontally along the lateral surface of
the foot (not on the medial surface—the arch may interfere with good setup).
34. Subject should bend the leg at the knee
and rest the knee and shin on the seat of a Relax the ankle
chair. The foot should hang over the edge so the foot is
of the chair. hanging freely
from the leg
(this is usually at
about 90º).

Figure 20.15 Subject in position for Ankle Jerk Reflex

35. Ask subject to close eyes and then click When you click Resume, the recording will continue and an append marker
Resume. labeled “Ankle Jerk Reflex” will be inserted automatically.
36. Strike the Achilles tendon behind the Note To get accurate goniometer data, it is crucial that the leg come to a
ankle just above the heel and observe the resting position between strikes in this segment.
resulting muscle contraction.
IMPORTANT: Try to apply the SAME FORCE for each strike.
37. Repeat the Achilles tendon strike every 5
seconds with the SAME FORCE, four
times.
38. Click Stop.
39. Review the data on the screen. When you click Stop, the recording will halt, giving you time to review the
data. Channels should show clear spikes to indicate when the reflex hammer
 If correct, go to Step 40. was lightly tapped and a response following each strike.
 If incorrect, click Redo.

Figure 20.16 Ankle Jerk Reflex

Recording continues…
Page 14 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

40. Click Done and then Yes to confirm When you click Done, you will be prompted to confirm that you are done with
recording is complete. all recording segments. When you click Yes, a window with options will be
generated. Make your choice and continue as directed.
If choosing the “Record from another Subject” option:
 Repeat the entire lesson from Set Up Step 6 for the new Subject.
 Each Subject will need to use a unique file name.
41. Remove the electrodes or the goniometer. Remove the electrode cable pinch connectors and peel off the electrodes and
throw them out the electrodes are not reusable).
END OF RECORDING Gently remove the tape from the goniometer and set it on a flat surface.

V. DATA ANALYSIS
Fast Track Data Analysis Detailed Explanation of Data Analysis Steps
1. Enter the Review Saved Data mode and
choose the correct file.
 Enter the Review Saved Data mode.
2. Note Channel Number (CH) designations:
Channel Displays
CH 1 Reflex Hammer Strike
CH 2 Response

Figure 20.17

3. Set up the measurement boxes as follows:


 The measurement boxes are above the marker region in the data
Channel Measurement window. Each measurement has three sections: channel number,
measurement type, and result. The first two sections are pull-down menus
CH 1 Delta T
that are activated when you click them.
CH 1 Max
The following is a brief description of these measurements.
CH 2 Max
Delta T time change used here to determine the response time from
hammer strike to muscle response.
Max maximum amplitude; used here to determine strike force and
angular displacement of the knee
The result applies to the “selected area” as selected by the I-Beam tool
(including the endpoints).
4. Set up the display for optimal viewing of Segment 1 starts at the append marker labeled “Knee Jerk Reflex” (Time 0)
the first recorded segment. and ends at the marker labeled “Knee Jerk Reflex during Jendrassik
maneuver.”

 The following tools help you adjust the data window:


Autoscale horizontal Zoom Previous
Autoscale waveforms Horizontal (Time) Scroll Bar
Zoom Tool Vertical (Amplitude) Scroll Bar
Data Analysis continues….
Lesson 20: Spinal Cord Reflexes Page 15

5. Zoom in and select each strike in Segment To measure reaction times, select the area from the onset of the hammer
1 to complete measurements for the data strike in CH 1 to the onset of EMG activity in CH 2.
report.

 A, B

Figure 20.18

6. Click the marker menu and select the Segment 2 starts at the “Knee Jerk Reflex during Jendrassik maneuver”
Append marker for Segment 2, then marker and ends at “Knee Jerk Reflex with mental distraction.”
choose Display > Autoscale Waveforms,
then zoom in and select each strike to
complete measurements for the data
report.

 A, B

Figure 20.19

7. Click the marker menu and select the Segment 3 starts at the “Knee Jerk Reflex with mental distraction” marker
Append marker for Segment 3, then and ends at the “Flexor Withdrawal Reflex” marker.
choose Display > Autoscale Waveforms,
then zoom in and select each strike to
complete measurements for the data
report.

 A, B
8. Click the marker menu and select the Segment 4 starts at the “Flexor Withdrawal Reflex” marker and ends at the
Append marker for Segment 4, then “Voluntary Knee Jerk Reflex” marker.
choose Display > Autoscale Waveforms,
then zoom in and select each strike to
complete measurements for the data
report.

 A, B

Data Analysis continues….


Page 16 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

9. Click the marker menu and select the Segment 5 starts at the “Voluntary Knee Jerk Reflex” marker and ends at the
Append marker for Segment 5, then “Ankle Jerk Reflex” marker.
choose Display > Autoscale Waveforms,
then zoom in and select each strike to
complete measurements for the data
report.

 A, B
10. Click the marker menu and select the Segment 6 starts at the “Ankle Jerk Reflex” marker and ends at the end of the
Append marker for Segment 6, then data file.
choose Display > Autoscale Waveforms,
then zoom in and select each strike to
complete measurements for the data
report.

 A, B
11. Save or print the data file.
 Save the data to a drive, save notes that are in the journal, or print the
12. Exit the program. data file.
END OF DATA ANALYSIS

End of Lesson 20
Complete the Lesson 20 Data Report that follows.
Lesson 20: Spinal Cord Reflexes Page 17

DATA REPORT
Student’s Name:
Lab Section:
Date:

Subject Profile
Subject’s Name:
Gender: Male / Female Age: Height: Weight:
I. DATA TABLES—SPINAL CORD REFLEX MEASUREMENTS
A. Complete Table 20.3 with reaction time (latent period) data for each segment and complete the required calculations.
Reaction time is measured from onset of hammer strike to onset of EMG activity.

Trial #
Jendrassik Mental Math Flexor Voluntary Knee
Knee Jerk Ankle Jerk
maneuver Distraction Withdrawal Jerk
1 msec msec msec msec msec msec

2 msec msec msec msec msec msec

3 msec msec msec msec msec msec

4 msec msec msec msec msec msec

5 msec msec msec msec msec msec

Average

msec msec msec msec msec msec


Table 20.3

B. Complete Table 20.4 with Strike Force and Response Amplitude data for each segment and complete the required
calculations. Use the result to calculate the relationship between strike force and EMG amplitude.
Jendrassik Mental Math Flexor Voluntary
Measure Trial # Knee Jerk Ankle Jerk
maneuver Distraction Withdrawal Knee Jerk

1 Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts

2 Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts

3 Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts

4 Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts

5 Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts

Calculated Average

1 Deg. Deg. Deg. Deg. Deg. Deg.

2 Deg. Deg. Deg. Deg. Deg. Deg.

3 Deg. Deg. Deg. Deg. Deg. Deg.

4 Deg. Deg. Deg. Deg. Deg. Deg.

5 Deg. Deg. Deg. Deg. Deg. Deg.

Calculated Average

Table 20.4
Page 18 Biopac Student Lab 3.7.6

II. QUESTIONS
1. What is the physiological meaning of the term “reflex”?

2. List the anatomical components of a reflex pathway in correct sequence from beginning to end.

3. What is the difference between an ipsilateral reflex and a contralateral reflex?

4. Define “reciprocal inhibition” and explain its importance.

5. The stronger the percussion hammer tap on the patellar tendon, the greater the reflex contraction of the quadriceps femoris.
Explain.

6. The Jendrassik maneuver may exaggerate spinal reflexes such as the patellar reflex. Explain.

7. When a physician elicits the patellar reflex, what physiological activities are being examined? List four. (Hint: think of the
function of each component of the reflex pathway.)
Lesson 20: Spinal Cord Reflexes Page 19

8. Briefly explain the function of the supraspinal descending inhibitory motor pathways.

9. There are two pathways by which the Jendrassik maneuver facilitates alpha motor neuron output. Describe one.

End of Lesson 20 Data Report

You might also like